Buick Grand National Electrical Diagnosis Manual section 8A

1987 CHASSIS SERVICE MANUAL Volume II BUICK CONTENTS ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS MANUAL CONTENTS ................ SYMBOLS...

17 downloads 403 Views 31MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

1987 CHASSIS SERVICE MANUAL

Volume

II

BUICK

CONTENTS

ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS MANUAL CONTENTS ................ SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES. . . . . TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS. . . . . . . . . . TROUBLESHOOTING TESTS. . . . . . . . . . REPAIR PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTRODUCTION..

2-0 3-1 4-0 4-2 4-3

5-0

ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS CENTURY ("A" CARLINE).

. . . . . CONTENTS

LESABRE ESTATE WAGONIELECTRA ESTATE WAGON ("B" CARLINE)

.......

CONTENTS

ELECTRAIPARK AVENUE ("C" CARLINE)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . CONTENTS

....... CARLINE). . . . . . . .

RlVlERA ("E" CARLINE)

CONTENTS

REGAL ("G"

CONTENTS

LESABRE ("H" CARLINE)

. . . . . . CONTENTS

SKYHAWK ("J" CARLINE)

.....

CONTENTS

SOMERSETISKYLARK ("Nu CARLINE)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . CONTENTS

DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION

This manual contains the following kinds of diagnostic information: Electrical Schematics Component Location Lists Harness Connector Faces Troubleshooting Hints System Checks System Diagnosis Circuit Operation Descriptions Harness Routing Views InputTest Using these elements together will make electrical troubleshooting faster and easier. Each element is described below. The Electrical Schematic should always be your starting point in using this Electrical Troubleshooting Manual. The schematic shows the electrical current paths when a circuit is operating properly. I t is essential to understand how a circuit should work before trying to figure out why it doesn't. The Harness Connector Faces show the cavity or terminal locations in all the multi-pin connectors shown in the schematic. Together with the wire colors and terminals given in the schematic, they help you locate test points. The drawings show the connector faces you see after the harness connector has been disconnected from a component. When more than one connector is connected to a component the connectors are all shown together. Both halves of in-line connectors are shown together. The Troubleshooting Hints offer short-cuts or checks t o help you determine the cause of a complaint. They are not intended to be a rigid

procedure for solving an electrical situation. Rather, Troubleshooting Hints represent a common-sense approach, based oa an understanding of the circuit. The System Check gives a summary of how the circuit should be operated and what should happen. This is especially important when you are working on a new system. The System Check will help you identify symptoms, lead you t o diagnosis and confirm the system alter repair. The System Diagnosis provides a procedure to follow that will locate the condition in a circuit. If your own knowledge of the system and the Troubleshooting Hints have not produced a quick fix, follow the System Diagnosis. All procedures are based on symptoms to assist you in locating the condition as fast as possible. The Circuit Operation, will help you understand the circuit. I t describes the components and how the circuit works. The Component Location List helps you find where the parts of the circuit are in the vehicle. A brief statement of the location is given and also a reference to a drawing that shows the component and i t s connecting wires. These Component Location Views are in section 201. Harness Routing Views are found in cell 203. These views show the routing of the major wiri n g harnesses and t h e in-line connectors between the major harnesses. These views will make troubleshooting easier when you are not sure about harness routing.

Riviera ("E" Car) ONLY

The Input Tests sections permit you to use the Body Computer (BCM)to troubleshoot circuits that interface with the BCM and IPC. The step-by-step test procedures in Cells 301 (BCM Input Tests) and 302 (Instrument Panel Input Tests) should be used after a circuit problem is isolated by using a System Diagnosis. The System Diagnosis procedures direct you t o the proper Diagnostic Test procedure. PAGE NUMBER

This section is organized into cells with most cells containing a circuit schematic and the text for that circuit. This makes the section easy to use, since the page number for a schematic will normally stay the same year after year, and it will also be the same in all the GM publications about that circuit. For example, the Cruise Control schematic will always be the first pages of cell 34. The other information for Cruise Cona ~ 34-2. e d 34-3. etc. trol follows them and is ~ " Some cells may have more than one circuit schematic, such as power distribution, interior lights, and air conditioning. The circuit you want can either be located by using the index, or by a quick look through the related cell. All the engine circuits for a particular engine VIN type are in the same cell. This makes that cell easy to use, since schematics for other cars are not in your way. The instrument panel schematics are organized similarly. If you are working on a 'car with a Digital Cluster, only the schematics that apply to that car's Digital Cluster will be in the cell you use. Information on the Indicators and Gages Clusters will be in other cells. ~-

-

z-

SCHEMATICS

HORN

These schematics break the entire electrical system down into individual circuits. You are not distracted by wiring which is not part of the circuit you're working on.

'IN I I

I t is important to realize that no attempt is made on the schematic t o represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the car. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a schematic from one which is only a few inches long. The number of cavities for each connector is listed in the Component Location List. Similarly, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. The following example shows how to read a Horn schematic, see figure 1. Locate the Horn schematic using the Index. The circuit schematic will look somewhat like the one t o the right. The schematic is read from top t o bottom.

-

-

INTRODUCTION

SEE FUSE BLOCK DETAILS

sZ1l

RELAY

-

I I I I I

.35 BLK

Voltage is applied to the Horn Relay a t all times. When the relay coil is grounded by closing the Horn Switch, the relay contacts close. When the relay contacts are closed, both the LH and RH Horns are energized. 1 OK CRN

29

CAPACITOR

.8 BLK/

-

--

Figure 1 - Typical Horn Schematic

INTRODUCTION

I

COMPONENT LOCATIONS When you are ready to locate the schematic components on the car. use the Component Locations List, see figure 2.

COMPONENT LOCATION

Listed in the left hand column are the components shown on the schematic. Next to the Convenience Center is the location, "Under LH side of IIP." Reference to I,H and R H is made a s though the troubleshooter WAS sitting in the driver's seat. On the same line, in the far right column, is a page-figure reference. In this case, you are directed to figure A on page 201-6.

Convenience Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under Horn BrushISlip Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . Under Horn Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under

COMPONENTS L H side of IIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L H side of IIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

201-6-A 201-6-A 201-5-E 201-5-E

CONNECTORS C100 (46 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L H side of dash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-5-B C201 (11 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under L H side of IIP, near C100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-5-F

Where connectors are listed, the number of cavities is provided. This represents the total number of cavities in the connector, regardless of how many are actually used. This information i s provided to help you identify connectors on the car.

GROUNDS GlOl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH front of engine compartment, behind headlights panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-8-D

Grounds are listed next in the table. The location description for GI01 reads, "LH front of engine compartment, behind headlights panel. "You are directed to page 201-8figure D. Nearly every compcnent, connector, ground or splice shown on a schematic can be pinpointed visually by u s i n g t h e Component Location Views figures.

Page-Figure

SPLICES S139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front lights harness, behind L H front light panel 201-8-C S212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, behind IIP, above steering column. . . 201-6-B

I

Figure 2 - Typical Entries In The Component Location List

I

INTRODUCTION HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES The connectors, see figure 3, are labeled with the component they are connected to, or the connector number, C224, from the schematic where they appear and their color. The identifying number is for reference only; it is not the connector part number. For in-line connectors, the half shown is usually the Socket half. If both views are shown, the other is marked Pin Half. Only connectors that have two or more terminals are shown. If you need to backprobe a connector while it is on the component, the order of the terminals must be mentally reversed. The wire color is a help in this situation. If there is more than one wire of the same color, you may need to locate a test point from its terminal number. A useful trick is to imagine that you are probing a terminal from behind the page you are looking at. Then mentally locate that terminal with respect to the keyway or other reference mark.

I

*

ELK

ELK

BLK 12004727

Blower Motor

V03000 2

C 129

C3 BLU

C2 WHT

C1 ELK

BLU 12015196

Horn Relay v00010 0

Rad~o Figure 3 -Typical Harness connector Faces

INTRODUCTION

-

OTHER INFORMATION

WINDSHIELD HEADER

Body Part Names

REAR WINDOW HEADER

Refer to figure 4 for the correct body part names.

END PANEL

VIN References

If schematics for more than one variation of an engine type-V6, for example-are shown, then the schematics will be labeled with VIN designations to distinguish the variations. Service Parts Identification Label

To aid service and parts personnel in identifying options and parts originally installed, a Service Parts Identification Label h a s been placed in the car. See the General Information Section OA of the Chassis Service Manual for the location of the label and the definition of the option codes. Abbreviations

A/C - Air Conditioning BCM - Body Computer Module ECM - Electronic Control Module or Engine Control Module I / P - Instrument Panel RH - Right Hand, as seen from driver's seat LH - Left Hand Not Used - The connector cavity has no function.

AREA (INSIDE)

I LH "0"

I I LH ,,C,,

PILLAR

I

\-

Figure 4 - Body Part Names

PANEL I

INTRODUCTION Power Distribution

The Power Distribution schematic shows the wiring from the Battery and Generator to the S t a r t e r Solenoid, Fuse Block, lgnition Switch and Light Switch. The first component after a Fusible Link is also shown. In certain instances, the first component after a Fuse Block fuse and Light Switch is also shown. The Power Distribution schematic refers to Fuse Block Details and Light Switch Details schematics. By using these three (3) schematics, power distribution wiring can be followed from the Battery and Generator to the first component after a Fusible Link, Fuse and Light Switch. The ability to follow the power distribution wiring to the first component in each circuit is extremely helpful in locating short circuits which cause fusible links and fuses to open.

POWER DISTRIBUTION 3 RED

FUSIBLE L I N K D

L

2 L 4 V I N U 1 BLK V6 V I N L 2 RED ~ q VIN 3 R E D

As::*

FUSIBLE L I N K F

L4 V l N U V6 V I N L

I I

~

1 BLK

L4 VIN U h

\

I

I

3RED

L4 V I N U 19 BLK V 6 V I N L 32 BLK

2

r--1 CDDLANT

1

I

F

L--l

PAGE 31 0

I

I gELny

BATTERY

3 RED

L

19 E L K

D

1

LIGHT SWITCH

Figure 5 is a sample Power Distribution schematic. I t shows how voltage is applied from the positive Battery terminal to the various circuits on the car. For example, Battery voltage is applied to the Starter Solenoid, the Fusible Link D, the RED wire and connector ClOO to Fuse 1 and Fuse 2 in the Fuse Block and the Light Switch in the LH Pod. These fuses are said to be Hot At All Times, since Battery voltage is always applied to them. Notice that Battery voltage is a!so applied to Fusible Link F and the RED wire to the Coolant Fan Relay.

GpIJ 8 DRN

240

I

c

r---1

I I

L---J

\

SEE LIGHT SWITCH DETAILS PAGE 1 2 0

I I

HEADLIGHT R= SWITCH -PAGE 1 0 0 0

SEE FUSE BLOCK DETAILS PAGE 11 2

Figure 5 - Typical Power Distribution Schematic

INTRODUCTION Fuse Block Details

The Fuse Block Details schematic, see figure 6, shows all the wiring between a fuse and the components connected to the output of the fuse. In certain instances where space permits, this detail is shown on the Power Distribution schematic. The Fuse Block Details schematic is extremely helpful in locating a short circuit that causes a fuse to open.

FUSE BLOCK DETAILS (FUSE 1 AND FUSE 2)

.......................

1 FUSE

'GK f U S E 2 1I 2OAMP

I

80RN

140

H2

CG

80RN

340 A 8 0RN

UGRN

240

8 ORN

340

80RN

340

8 ORN

34U

340

8 'JRN A r r

I

LltHT

LH

r\

'---I I

I SWITCH

LA LH PO0 (SEE L I G H T SWITCH DETAILS PAGE 1 1

/- \

'\

I

/

fi

I -\

1

\-j

COURTESY LIGHTS PAGE 15

RH

/-\

/-',

'4'

'\&I

A,

I---7

;

I

IL--1t ANTENNA RELAY PAGE 52

-

CONSOLE R E A R COURTESY L I G H T PAGE 35

RH /-'

I \ './I DOOR COURTESY LIGHTS PAGE 35

b

Figure 6 - Typical Fuse Block Details Schematic

-

INTRODUCTION Light S w i t c h Details

The Light Switch Details schematic, see figure 7, shows t h e wiring between t h e L i g h t Switch and the components connected t o the

RADIO PAGE47

LH MARKER W T PAGE 32

o u t p u t of t h e L i g h t S w i t c h . I n c e r t a i n instances where space permits, some of this detail may be shown on the Power Distribution schematic. The L i g h t Switch Details sche-

LH T A I L LlCHTS

LICENSE LIGHT

PAGE 32

PAGE 32

RH TAIL LIGHTS PAGE 32

matic helps you understand the many wires that come from the Light Switch. This schematic is also helpful in locating a short circuit t h a t causes the fuse ahead of the Light Switch to open.

RH M A R K E R LH FRONT LH FRONT UNOERHOOO RH FRONT RH FRONT AUTO CONVENIENCE MARKER PARKITURN PARKiTURN MARKER CALCULATOR CENTER -LIGHT

LIGHT

PAGE 32

LIGHT PAGE 30

PAGE 30

PAGE 30

LIGHTS PAGE 38

Figure 7 - Typical Light Switch Details Schematic

W T PAGE 30

LIGHT PAGE 30

PAGE 53

PAGE 28

:1

INTRODUCTION Ground Distribution

Figure 8 is a sample Ground Distribution schematic for the Headlights. I t shows exactly which components share each ground. This information can often be a time-saver when troubleshooting ground circuits. For example, if both Headlights and the ParkITurn Light on one side are all out, you could suspect an open in their common ground wire or the ground connection itself. On the other hand, if one of the lights works, you know 'that the ground and the wire up to the splice are good. You have learned this just by inspecting the schematic and knowing the vehicle's symptoms. No actual work on the lighting system was needed.

GROUND DISTRIBUTION ( G I 0 1 AND G102) FRONT LIGHTS GROUNDS

I

LH -

FRONT

IL1

PARK/TURN

HIGH BEAM

LH DUAL BEAM

HEADLIGHT

HEADLIGHT

LIGHT --

*

RH

RH

E!

DUAL BEAM HEADLIGHT

HIGH BEAM

W T PARK/TURN

HEADLIGHT

1x1

Figure 8 - Typical Ground Distribution Schematic

SYMBOLS FEMALE TERMINAL

ENTIRE COMPONENT SHOWN

CONNECTOR REFERENCE NUMBER FOR COMPONENT LOCATION T A B L E

MALE

TABLE ALSO SHOWS TOTAL NUMBER OF TERMINAL POSSIBLE: C103 ( 6 CAVITIES)

INSULATION COLOR IS BOTH SHOWN A N 0 LABELEO

-I . /

1 2

SPLICES ARE SHOWN A N 0 NUMBEREO

R ~ o2

CIRCUIT NUMBER IS SHOWN TO HELP I N TRACING CIRCUITS

5

rszoa

PART OF A COMPONENT SHOWN

/

BRAKE

-

CLOSED WlTH PARKING BRAKE ON

COMPONENT CASE IS DIRECTLY ATTACHEDTO M E T A L PART OF CAR (GROUNDED)

I

WlRE IS ATTACHE0 TO M E T A L PART OF CAR (GROUNOEO)

6103 -

I

1

GI01

WIRE M A Y H A V E ONE OR MORE SPLICES BEFORE I T IS GROUNOEO.

WlRE INSULATION

2 REDIYEL -c r

*WITH 79

1

5 CAVITY CONNECTOR (4 OUT OF 5 CAVITIES ARE USED)

1

CONNECTOR ATTACHED TO COMPONENT

I

FUSIBLE

LINK

1 RE0

GROUND IS NUMBEREO FOR REFERENCE ON COMPONENT LOCATION TABLE

WlRE IS INOIRECTLY CONNECTED TO GROUND SEE GROUNO DISTRIBUTION

5 CAVITY CONNECTOR (5 OUT OF 5 CAVITIES ARE USED)

NAME OF COMPONENT DETAILS ABOUT COMPONENT OR I T S OPERATION

A WAVY LINE MEANS A WIRE IS TO BE CONTINUE0

2

1

1 YEL

5

TO GENERATOR PAGE 30-0

CONNECTOR ON COMPONENT L E A D (PIGTAIL)

1 OKGRN

1 19

LIGHTS: TURNIHAZAROISTOP/

IS ONE COLOR ANOTHER COLOR STRIPE (RE0 W l T H YELLOW)

WIRE SIZE A N 0 INSULATION COLOR ARE LABELEO

CURRENT PATH IS CONTINUE0 AS LABELEO. THE ARROW SHOWS THE OlRECTlON OF CURRENT FLOW A N 0 IS REPEATED WHERE CURRENT PATH CONTINUES.

A W l R E WHICH CONNECTS TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT. THE WlRE ISSHOWN AGAIN ON T H A T CIRCUIT.

CIRCUIT BREAKER HEATACTUATED CONTACT

HEATING ELEMENT

/

3 BLK

SEE GROUND OISTRIBUTION

C'

0

P

SWITCH CONTACTS THAT MOVE TOGETHER

m l

DASHED LINE SHOWS A MECHANICAL CONNECTION BETWEEN SWITCH CONTACTS

237

RELAY SHOWN

:!Nil

-----

THROUGH

1 ORN NO GAGES

TWO TERMINALS INTHESAME CONNECTORS

WHEN CURRENT FLOWS THROUGH COIL.CONTACT MOVES FROM NORMALLY OPEN POSITION.

n

DASHED L I N E SHOWS A PHYSICAL CONNECTION BETWEEN PARTS (SAME CONNECTOR)

\

NORMALLY CLOSE0 CONTACT

I 1

40 GAGES

P 1 ORN

OPEN CONTACT

COLOR OF FUSE BLOCK ..- - - . CONNECTOR INDICATES T H A T 1-1 POWER IS SUPPLIED WITH I G N I T I O N SWITCH I N ACCY AND RUN POSITIONS

7 I

f

FUSIBLE L I N K

1 ELECTRONIC

I

N-

DIODE CURRENT CAN FLOW O N L Y I N THE DIRECTION

SCREW TERMINAL. SHOWN SEPARATED

STATE

OF THE ARROW "SOLID STATE" IDENTIFIES MODULE AS ELECTRONIC. SlMPLlFlEO COMPONENTS WITHIN THE MODULE SHOW HOW EACH CIRCUIT IS COMPLETED. DO NOT MEASURE RESISTANCE OF CIRCUITS INSIDE SOL10 STATE MODULES.

I

I

INDICATOR IRE01

I A N INDICATOR

!

I

3 CONNECTORS ARE SHOWN CONNECTED TOGETHER A T A JUNCTION BLOCK. FOURTH WlRE IS SOLDER TO COMMON CONNECTION ON BLOCK.

ct10

WHICH DISPLAYS

\

NUMBER FOR TOTAL CONNECTOR LETTERS FOR EACH CONNECTOR

/

/

~ I ~ R N )

L A B E L OF FUSE BLOCK CONNECTOR CAVITY

I I I I I

WIRE CHOICES FOR OPTIONS OR D I F F E R E N T MODELS ARE SHOWN A N D LABELED

NORMALLY

I

I 5VOLTS

INOICATES T H A T THE CIRCUITRY IS N O T SHOWN I N COMPLETE D E T A I L BUT IS COMPLETE ON THE I N D I C A T E D PAGE

SYMBOLS

.lYEL

1

SlNGLE DIAPHRAGM MOTOR

88

NO VACUUM

VACUUM

A

A

3 WIRES ARE SHOWN CONNECTED TOGETHER WITH A PIGGYBACK CONNECTOR

dEL

VACUUM JUNCTION

b

-

*

EASY FLOW DIRECTION

_I

1 VACUUM SOURCE

A

A

VENT MECHANICAL

&-

VACUUM SOURCE

a A

A

VENT

IN THE "AT REST" POSITION SHOWN, THE VALVE OOES THE FOLLOWING: PORT A IS SEAtEO PORT B IS VENTED TO THE ATMOSPHERE

SERVO MOTOR

44

I I

CHECK VALVE

NO FLOW OlRECTlON

DOUBLE OIAPHRAGM MOTOR NO VACUUM

Some vacuum motors such a s t h e servo motor in the Cruise Control can posit.ion the actuating arm a t any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The servo is VACUUM operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum t o the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraclANK tion of the motor arm. Servo motors work like the two position motors; the only difference is in the way the vacuum is applied. Servo motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control.

A

WHEN THE VALVE IS MOVED TO THE "OPERATED" POSITION VACUUM FROM PORT A IS CONNECTEO TO PORT B

SOLENOID VACUUM

-----

VALVE

THE SOLENOID VACUUM VALVE USES THE SOLENOID TO MOVE THE VALVE

Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is applied, the shaft is pulled in. When no vacuum is applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring.

PARTIAL VACUUM

NO VACUUM

Double diaphragm motors can be operated by vacuum in two directions. When there is no vacuum, the motor is in the center "at rest" position.

-)I

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES The following four-step troubleshooting procedure is recommended: Step 1: Check the problem.

Perform a System Check to be sure you understand what's wrong. Don't waste time fixing part of the problem! Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the possible causes. The self-diagnostic system built into the Riviera ("EMcar) will direct you through sections 8A and 8D of this manual. The service diagnostics are entered by simultaneously depressing OFF and WARMER on the AIC controls for more than two (2) seconds. A diagnostic log will be displayed for the Engine Control Module (ECM) and then for the Body Computer Module (BCM). The display will show only the ECM and BCM codes for circuit problems that are current or history. If a current ECM code is displayed on the "E" car, Section 8D1 will direct you to the proper diagnostic procedures. If a current BCM code is displayed, Section 8D2 will direct you to the proper diagnostic procedures. If no codes or if history codes are displayed, refer to the problem circuit in this section 8A for diagnostic procedures.

Fuse Block Details, and Light Switch pages.) Try to operate the shared circuits. If the shared circuits work, then the shared wiring is OK. The cause must be within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, chances are the power (fuse)or ground circuit is faulty.

HEADLIGHTS

-

LIGHT SWITCH

CIRCUIT BREAKER

-PARK *

- -- --- -- BRIGHT

P1RK

ICCW)

I*STRUME*T

IEl-

Step 3: Find the Cause and Repair.

1 YE1

Narrow down the possible causes. Use the Troubleshooting Hints. Make the necessary measurements as ghen in the System Diagnosis.

10

D

I

R

--

BW LT GRN

1 TAN

1 l1ED

1 TAN

11

12

,---~ E tI c ~ 1 L T GRN

11

8 LTGRN

12

11

1 TAN 1 L T GRN

1";;,

INSTRUMENT PANEL

--------

rr PRINTED CIRCUIT 7

I

HEADLIGHT

Step 2: Read the Electrical Schematic.

Study the schematic. Read the Circuit Operation text if you do not understand how the circuit should work. Check circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, switch, etc., are included on each electrical schematic. (Shared circuits are also shown on Power Distribution, Ground Distribution,

I$

HAZARD1 PARK

2BLK

150

SBLK

151 SEE GROUND

B~~

yJ5 -

Figure 9 - Typical Headlights Schematic

-

J

L-

I

8

b g g ' S205 3BLK

fig

--------

I

T

DISTRIBUTION

-

I I

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

I

150

G200 -

-

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES Before you replace a component, check power, signal, and ground wires a t the component harness connector. If these check OK, the component must be bad. Step 4: Test the Repair

Repeat t h e S y s t e m Check t o be sure you have fixed the whole problem. Example

A customer brings in a car and says t h a t the high beams do not work. Step 1: Perform a System Check on the Headlights Circuit. You may discover t h a t both low beams operate. In "Hi," you may notice that the High Beam Indicator comes on. b u t neither high-beam operates. Step 2: Read the Headlights electrical sche-

matic, see figure 9. This is the step t h a t will s a v e you t i m e a n d labor. Remember, i t is essential t o understand how a circuit s h o u l d w o r k , before t r y i n g t o f i g u r e o u t why i t doesn 't. After you understand how the circuit should operate, read the schematic again, this time keeping in mind what you have learned by operating the circuit.

.

Since both low beams work, you know t h a t the Light Switch, the YEI, wire, the I,o contacts of the Headlight Dimmer Switch. terminal 1E of C100. the TAN wires, and grounds G 105 and G 109 are all good.

Furthermore. since you saw that the High Beam Indicator came on when the Headlight Dimmer Switch was moved t o Hi, you know t h a t the Hi contacts of the dimmer switch and the 1 , l GRN wire between the dimmer switch and C 100 are good. A t this point, you could test for voltage a t the RH Headlight with the dimmer switch in Hi. However, it is extremely unlikely t h a t the high beam filaments have burned out in b o t h headlights. or t h a t b o t h headlight connections are bad. The cause must be a bad connection a t C100, or a break in the I,T GRN wire between ClOO and the RH Headlight. You h a v e quickly narrowed t h e possible causes down t o one specific area, and have d o n e absolutely no work on the car itself. Step 3: Find the cause and repair it. Using the Component Location List and the corresponding figure, you can quickly find ClOO and the LT GRN wire. locate the exact trouble point, and make the repair. Step 4: Check the repair by performing a sys-

tem check on the Headlights circuit. This, of course, means m a k i n g s u r e t h a t both high beams, both low beams. and the High Beam Indicator are all working. Now suppose t h a t the symptoms were different. You may have operated the Headlights and found t h a t the low beams were working, but neither the high beams nor the High Beam Indicator were working. Looking a t the schematic, you might conclude the following:

I t is unlikely t h a t both high beam filaments and the High Beam Indicator have all burned out a t once. The cause is probably the dimmer switch or its connector.

IT

TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS Electrical troubleshooting requires the use of common electrical test equipment. TEST LIGHTIVOLTMETER

Use a test light to check for voltage. A Test Light (BT-7905 or equivalent) is made up of a 12-Volt light bulb with apair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. When the bulb goes on, there is voltage a t the point being tested.

A voltmeter can be used instead of a test light. While a test light shows whether or not voltage is present, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present. An increasing number of circuits include solid state control modules. One example is the Electronic Control Module (ECM) used with Computer Command Control and Electronic Fuel Injection. Voltages in these circuits should be tested only with a 10-megohm or higher impedance digital voltmeter or multimeter (5-29125or equivalent). Never use a test light on circuits t h a t contain Solid State components, since damage t o these components may result. When testing for voltage or continuity a t a connection, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Unless you are t e s t i n g a "weather-pack" connector, you should probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector. An accumulation of dirt and corrosion between contact surfaces is sometimes a cause of electrical problems.

CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS

A connector A d a p t e r K i t i s available (535616)for making tests and measurements a t separated connectors. This kit contains an assortment of probes which mate with many of the types of connectors you will see. Avoid using paper clips and other substitutes since they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. SELF-POWERED TEST LIGHT

Use a self-powered t e s t light (5-21008 or equivalent) to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. If the leads are touched together, the bulb will go on. A self-powered test light is used only on an unpowered circuit. First disconnect the car's Battery, or remove the fuse which feeds the circuit you're working on. Select two specific points along the circuit through which there should be continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed and the bulb will go on. Never use a self-powered test light on circuits t h a t contain solid s t a t e components. since damage to these components may result.

Self-Powered Test Light OHMMETER

An ohmmeter can be used instead of a selfpowered test light. The ohmmeter shows how much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the Electronic Control Module (ECM),should be testedonly with a 10megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter (5-29125or equivalent). When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the vehicle Rattery should be disconnected. This will prevent incorrect readings. Digital meters apply such a small voltage t o measure resistance t h a t the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause an ohmmeter t o give a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement, take a reading once. reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ. the solid state component is affecting the measurement.

-

TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS

-

-

TROUBLESHOOTING TESTS

FUSED JUMPER WIRE

TROUBLESHOOTING TESTS

TESTING FOR CONTINUITY

A fused jumper is available (5-36169or equivalent) with small clamp connectors providing a d a p t a t i o n t o m o s t connectors 'without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20 amp fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.

TESTING FOR VOLTAGE

1. Disconnect the car battery.

1. Connect one lead of a test light to a known

2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light

good ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it is the voltmeter's negative lead that you have connected to ground.

or ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to test.

CAUTION: Do not use fused jumper wire in any instance to substitute for inputs or outputs a t the ECM (Electronic Control Module), BCM (Body Control Module), or any microprocessor device.

2. Connect the other lead of the test light or

voltmeter to a selected test point (connector or terminal). 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the voltage reading. I t should be within one volt of measured Battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem.

SHORT FINDER

Short Finders are available (5-8681or equivalent) to locate hidden shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.

r7..

4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you are using an ohmmeter, low or no resistance means good continuity.

BLOWER

S

BLOCK

FUSE TESTER

A simple tester that indicates a blown fuse is available (5-34764 or equivalent). To check a fuse the tester is applied directly to the fuse in the fuse block. Two probes contact the fuse, either into the slots of a flat fuse or to the metal ends of a glass fuse. With power on, a red LED in the tester lights if the fuse is open. The handle of the tester is a tool for removing either type of fuse.

3; Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit.

\

$;:

VOLTMETER)

\

' I L

Voltage che;

SWITCH

a-

Continuity Check Through A Switch

D

TESTING FOR VOLTAGE DROP

TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND

This test checks for voltage being lost along a wire, or through a connection or switch.

With a Test Light or Voltmeter

1. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter t o the end of the wire (or t o one side of the connection or switch) which is closer t o the Battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connection or switch).

3. Operate the circuit. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in v o l t a g e between t h e t w o p o i n t s . A difference (or drop) of more than one volt indicates a problem.

With a Self-Powered Test Light or Ohmmeter 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the

battery and load.

1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the

load. 2. Connect a test light or voltmeter across the fuse terminals ( b e sure t h a t t h e fuse is powered).

3. Beginning near the fuse block, wiggle the harness from side t o side. Continue this a t convenient points (about 6 inches a p a r t ) while watching the test light or voltmeter. 4. When the test light glows, or the voltmeter registers, there is a short t o ground in the wiring near t h a t point.

2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or ohmmeter t o t h e fuse terminal on t h e load side. 3. Connect the other lead t o a known good

ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse block, wiggle the

harness from side to side. Continue this a t convenient points (about six inches apart) while watching the self-powered test light or ohmmeter. 5. When the self-powered test light glows, or the ohmmeter registers, there is a short t o ground in the wiring near t h a t point. B A T T E R Y DISCONNECTED

BLOCK (FUSE

-L .Y1 IBLU

+

A

/'

1-1

VOLTMETER

VOLTMETER)

SHORT TO

El="

DISCONNECTED

OISCONNECTED -

-

Voltage Drop Test

Testing For Short With Test Light or Voltmeter

Testing For Short With Self-Powered Test Light or Ohmmeter

TROUBLESHOOTING TESTS With a Short Finder

1. Remove the blown fuse, leaving the Battery

connected. 2. Connect the Short Finder across the fuse terminals.

3. Close all switches in series with the circuit you are troubleshooting. 4. Operate the Short Finder. The Short Finder will pulse current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field surrounding the circuit wiring between the fuse block and the short. 5. Beginning a t the fuse block, slowly move

the Short Finder meter along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse block and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. When you have moved the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Examine the wiring in that area for the short to ground.

4. Close each connector or switch until the fuse blows, t o find which circuit the short is in. Connect test lamp, meter, or short finder a t the connector t o the suspect circuit (disconnected) rather than a t the fuse termi-

SHORT F m R

my & E

M O V E METER ALONG WIRE

I

I I I

PULSING MAGNETIC FIELO

-

(8A-11)for the fuse t h a t has blown. NEEDLE STOPS MOVING HERE NO PULSING MAGNETIC FIELD

J U M P S T A R T ONLY I F B U I L T - I N HYDROMETER "EYE" ON BATTERY I S DARK. If the "eye" is clear or yellow, do not attempt to jump start. If the "eye" is green, the Battery is charged and does not require a jump s t a r t . Both t h e booster and the discharged Battery should be treated carefully when using jumper cables. CAUTION: Do not expose the Battery to open flame or sparks. Serious personal injury, particularly to the eyes, may result from a Battery explosion, Battery acid, or electrical burns.

I

1. Find the schematic in Fuse Block Details

3. Replace the fuse. If the fuse blows, the short is in the wiring leading t o the first connector or switch. Use a test light, meter, or short finder a s described above. If fuse does not blow, go t o next step.

With the use of electronic components (such as solid-state radios, electronic control modules, and others) becoming more wide-spread each model year, t h e potential for damage caused by improper jump starts increases. The following guidelines are presented to reduce the likelihood of such damage.

BLOCK

Fuses Powering Several Loads

2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load.

PROPER JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES

f

Finding Short With Short Finder

SHORT TO GROUNO

The Ignition Switch must be in OFF when connecting or disconnecting the jumper cables. All accessories. including the Radio, should be turned off before jump starting. Cable polarity must be correct. Component damage can occur if the polarity is reversed, even if only briefly. Connect the positive jumper cable first. then connect the negative cable to the engine ground (not the negative terminal of the dead Battery).

REPAIR PROCEDURES

ELECTRICAL REPAIRS This section provides instruction in the following repairs: Circuit Protection - Typical Electrical Repairs - Splicing Copper Wire - Splicing Aluminum 12 ire - Splicing Tu isted Shielded Cable - Repairing Connectors ( E x c e p t Weather Pack ' and - Repairing Weather Pack " (Environmental) Connectors -

N o t e : A f t e r a n y electrical repair is made,

always test the circuit afterwards by operating the devices in the circuit. This confirms not only t h a t the repair is correct, but also that is was the cause of the complaint.

(see Figure 1). Fuses are a "one time" protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. Auto-fuses are color coded. The standardized color identification and ratings are shown in Figure 2. For service replacement. non-color coded fuses of the same respective current rating can be used. The current rating of each fuse is molded into its head. To determine whether or not an auto-fuse is blown, remove the suspect fuse and examine the element in the fuse for a break, (see Figure 1). If the element is broken, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. There are, however, additional specific circ u i t s w i t h in-line f u s e s . In-line f u s e s a r e located within the individual wiring harness. They a r e usually housed in spring-loaded. twist-type receptacles.

CIRCUIT PROTECTION All electrical circuits are protected against excessive loads which might occur because of shorts or overloads in the wiring system. Such protection is provided by a fuse, circuit breaker, or fusible link. Fuses

T h e most common method of automotive wiring circuit protection is the fuse. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit

GOOD FUSE

BLOWN FUSE

Figure 1 - Sample Fuses

CURRENT RATING (AMPERES)

3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30

COLOR VIOLET BROWN BLUE YELLOW WHITE GREEN

Figure 2 - Fuse Rating And Color Circuit Breakers

A circuit breaker i s a protective device designed to o w n the circuit when a current load is in excess of rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. The circuit breaker will remain open until the trouble is found and corrected. The circuit breaker will close automatically when the excessive current is removed. T h e condition of a circuit breaker may be verified by removing it from the circuit and checking the resistance. A good circuit breaker will have less than 1ohm resistance between the two terminals.

-

REPAIR PROCEDURES Fusible Links

I n addition to circuit breakers and fuses, some circuits use fusible links to protect the wiring. Like fuses, fusible links are "one time" protection devices that will melt and create an open circuit (see Figure 3). Not all fusible link open circuits can be detected by observation. Always inspect that there is Battery voltage past the fusible link to verify continuity. Fusible links are used instead of a fuse in wiring circuits t h a t are not normally fused, such a s the ignition circuit. Each fusible link is four wire-gauge sizes smaller than the cable it is designed to protect. Links are marked on the insulation with wire-gauge size because the heavy insulation makes the link appear to be a heavier gauge than i t actually is. The same wire size fusible link must be used when replacing a blown fusible link.

*

CONNECTOR COVERING

FUSIBLE LINK BEFORE SHORT CIRCUIT

BROKEN CIRCUIT INSIDE INSULATION

CUT WIRE HERE

FUSIBLE LINK AFTER SHORT CIRCUIT

Figure 3 - Good And Damaged Fusible Links

Fusible links are available with two types of insulation: Hypalon "nd SiliconelGXL (SILI GXL). Service fusible links made with SILI GXL may be used to replace either Hypalon" or SILIGXL fusible links. Service fusible links made with H y p a l o n d a y only be used to replace Hypalon "fusible links. To determine the fusible link type: nick the insulation of the blown fusible link with a knife. SILIGXL will have a white inner core under the outer color. Hypalon ' insulation is one color. Service fusible links are available in many lengths. Choose the shortest length that is suitable. If the fusible link is to be cut from a spool, NEVER make a fusible link longer than 228 mm (9 in). CAUTION: Fusible links cut longer than 228 mm (9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection.

To replace a damaged fusible link, cut it off beyond the splice. Replace with a repair link. When connecting the repair link, strip wire and use staking-type pliers to crimp the splice securely in two places (see Figure 4 ) . For more details on splicing procedures see Splicing Copper Wire.

-

To replace a damaged fusible link which feeds two harness wires. cut them both off beyond the splice. Use two repair links. one spliced to each harness wire (see Figure 5).

DAMAGED FUSIBLE LINK

TYPICAL ELECTRICAL REPAIRS An open circuit is an incomplete circuit. Power cannot reach the load or reach ground. If a circuit is open, active components do not energize. A short circuit is an unwanted connection between one part of the circuit and either ground or another part of the circuit. A short circuit causes a fuse to blow or a ciruit breaker to open.

-Locate the damaged wire. -Find and correct the cause of the wire insulation damage. F o r minor damage, tape over the wire. If damage is more extensive, replace t h e . faulty segment of the wire. (Refer to the splicing instructions for copper, aluminum, or shielded cable for the correct splicing procedure.)

+==. DAMAGED FUSIBLE

CUT H E R E

Short Circuits Caused by Damaged Wire Insulation

SPLICING COPPER WlRE

CUT HERE

Step One: Open the Harness

If the harness is taped, remove the tape. To avoid wire insulation damage, use a sewing "seam ripper" to cut open the harness (available from sewing supply stores).

TERMINAL

SPLICE

ONE HARNESS WlRE (RED)

TERMINAL

SPLICE

HARNESS WIRES (RED)

If the harness has a black plastic conduit, simply pull out the desired wire. Note that aluminum wire is enclosed in brown conduit. Refer to Splicing Aluminum Wire if necessary. Step Two: Cut the Wire

@"7--7 -I--= L3

REPAIR L I N K

7-

HARNESS

WIRES ( R E D )

ONE HARNESS WlRE (RED)

Figure 4 - Single Wire Feed Fusible Link -

REPAIR L I N K S

-

Figure 5 - Double Wire Feed Fusible Link

Begin by cutting as little wire off the harness a s possible. You may need t h e e x t r a length of wire later if you decide to cut more wire off to change the location of a splice. You may have to adjust splice locations to make certain that each splice is a t least 40mm (1112") away from other splices, harness branches, or connectors.

REPAIR PROCEDURES Step Three: Strip the Insulation

Step Four: Crimp the Wires

When replacing a wire. use a wire of the same size as the original wire or larger. The schematics list wire size in metric units. The following table (see Figure 6 ) shows the commercial (AWG) wire sizes that can be used to replace each metric wire size. Each AWG size is either equal to or larger than the equivalent metric size.

Select the proper clip to secure the splice. To determine the proper clip size for the wire being spliced. follow the directions included with your clips. Select the correct anvil on the crimper. (On most crimpers your choice is limited to either a small or large anvil.) Overlap the two stripped wire ends and hold them between your thumb and forefinger as shown in Figure 7. Then, center the splice clip under the stripped wires and hold it in place.

METRIC WIRE SIZES

.22 .35 5 8 1.O 2.0 3.0 5.0 8 0 13.0 19.0 32.0

I

AWG SIZES

I

24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2

OVERLAP

-Make sure that the clip and wires are still in t h e correct position. T h e n , apply steady pressure until the crimping tool closes (see Figure 8). Before crimping the ends of the clip, be sure that: -The wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. -No strands of wire are cut loose, and -No insulation is caught under the clip. Crimp the splice again, once on each end. Do not let the crimping tool extend beyond the edge of the clip or you may damage or nick the wires (see Figure 9).

Figure 6 - Wire Size Conversion Table

To find the correct wire size either find the wire on the schematic page and convert the metric size to the AWG size, or use an AWG wire gage. If you aren't sure of Lhe wire size, start with the largest opening in your wire stripper and work down until you get a clean strip of the insulation. Be careful to avoid nicking or cutting any of the wires. Check the stripped wire for nicks or c u t strands. If the wire is damaged, repeat the procedure on a new section of wire. The two stripped wire ends should be equal in length.

SPLICE

Figure 7 - Centering The Splice Clip

-Open the crimping tool to its full width and rest one handle on a firm flat surface. -Center the back of the splice clip on the proper anvil and close the crimping tool to the point where the former touches the wings of the clip.

Figure 8 - Crimping The Splice Clip

REPAIR PROCEDURES

SPLICE CLlP

==%=

Step Five: Solder

Apply 60140 rosin core solder to Lhe opening in the back of the clip (see Figure 10). Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment you are using.

ALIGN TOOL W I T H EDGE OF CLIP Step Six: Tape the Splice

T O CRIMP ENDS OF SPLICE

Center and roll the splicing tape. The tape should cover the entire splice. Roll on enough tape to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. Do not flag the tape. Flagged tape may not provide enough insulation, and the flagged ends will tangle with the other wires in the harness (see Figure 11).

I f the wire does not belong in a conduit or other harness covering, tape the wire again. Use a winding motion to cover the first piece of tape (see Figure 12).

GOOD (ROLLED)

Figure 9 - Completing The Crimp

SPLICING ALUMINUM WIRE General Motors cars have a front body wiring harness made of 2.0 metric and 1.0 metric (14 and 16 gauge) insulated solid cable aluminum wires. These wires are enclosed in a brown solid plastic conduit from behind the instrument panel t o the rear of the car.. A special repair kit (1684873-GR.2.530-KITALUM-WIRE T E R M I N A L R E P A I R ) is available to help make repairs on aluminum wires. This kit contains materials and instructions that can be used either to splice wire or crimp on new terminals. The kit includes the following parts: Figure 10 - Applying The Solder

BAD (FLAGGED) m

Figure 11 - Proper First Taping

-

-

-

w

REPAIR PROCEDURES Step One: Open the Harness

Step Four: Coating the SpliceITerminal

Hecause the harness has a solid plastic cond u i t , simply c u t t h e conduit open with diagonal cutters and pull out the desired wire. Re careful not t o damage any of the wires when cutting open the conduit.

'l'o prevent corrosion, apply a generous coating of petroleum jelly t o the splice area. If you are replacing a lead, also thoroughly coat the terminal crimp area and aluminum core with petroleum jelly. Both areas are shown in Figure 13 and identified with the letter "A."

Step Two: Cut the Wire

TAPE AGAIN IF NEEDED

Figure 12 - Proper Second Taping

Hegin hy cutting as little wire off the harn e s s a s possible. You may need t h e e x t r a length of wire later if you decide to c u t more wire off t o change the location of a splice. You may have t o adjust splice locations t o make certain t h a t each splice is a t least 40mm (1112") away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. Step Three: Strip the Insulation

-Small cylindrical metal splice clips. -A plastic tube of petroleum jelly. -Ten 2.0 metric (13 gauge) DK G K N leads: 130mm (6") long with terminals. -Ten 1.0 metric (16 gauge) BRN leads:150 mm ( 6") long with terminals. Use of the special materials in this kit will help prevent galvanic corrosion. Galvanic corrosion causes increased resistance between the terminal and wire, or the splice clip and wire, or both. Increased resistance would affect the operation of the electrical components in the repaired circuit.

U'hen replacing a wire or lead, use a wire of the same size a s the original wire, or larger. Look up the metric wire size on the schematic and select the proper-sized leads from the special repair kit. Remember t h a t the wires in this harness can only be one of two sizes-2.0 metric or 1.0 metric (14 or 16 gauge).

Step Five: Crimp the Wires

-Select the-proper-sized splice clip (follow t h e instructions included in the special repair kit). -Place one wire end in each e n d of t h e splice clip. -Crimp t h e clip firmly t o the wire using 10" slip joint pliers. Do NOT solder the splice (see Figure 14). -Repeat this procedure for the second wire or lead in the splice clip.

Use wire strippers of the proper gauge to strip approximately 6mm (114 "1 of insulation frorn each wire end. When stripping t h e outer jacket from the aluminum wire core. be careful not t o nick or damage the core. A damaged core will weaken the assembly a t this point.

Figure 13 - Where To Apply Petroleum Jelly

REPAIR PROCEDURES Step Six: Tape Splicellnsert Terminal

Step Four: Re-Assemble the Cable

T a p e o\.er b o t h t h e splice clip a n d t h e petroleun~jelly to seal out moisture and insulate t h e splice (see Figure 1 5 ) . I f you have replaced a lead, do not tape over the terminal crimp area but insert the lead into the connector body.

After you have spliced and taped each wire, rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. Re careful to avoid wrapping the drain wire in the tape. Next, splice t h e drain wire following t h e splicing instructions for copper wire. Then, wrap the drain wire around the conductors and mylar tape (see Figure 18).

SPLICING TWISTED1 SHIELDED CABLE Twistedishielded cable is sometimes used to protect wiring from electrical noise (stray signals). For example. two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the ECM and the distributor. See Figure 16 for a breakdown of twistedlshielded cable construction.

Step Five: Tape the Cable

Tape over the entire cable using a winding motion (see Figure 19). This tape will replace the section of the jacket you removed to make the repair. I

Figure 14 - Crimping The First Half Of The Splice Clip (Aluminum Wire)

I

I

Step One: Remove Outer Jacket

I

Remove the outer jacket and discard it. He careful to avoid cutting into the drain wire or the mylar tape.

OUTER JACKET

DRAIN WIRE (UNINSU L A T E O )

II

Step Two: Unwrap the Tape

Unwrap the aluminumlmylar tape, but d o not remove it. The tape will be used to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splices have been made. M Y L A R TAPE

Step Three: Prepare the Splice

Untwist the conductors. Then, prepare the splice by following the splicing instructions for copper wire presented earlier. Remember t o stagger splices to avoid shorts (see Figure 17).

I

The Petroleum Jelly To Seal And Insulate

TWlSTE D CONDUCTORS

Figure 16 - TwistedIShielded Cable

I

w REPAIR PROCEDURES

REPAIRING CONNECTORS

Step Two: Re-Form the Locking Tang

(Except Weather PackB and MetriPack Series 150 Pull-to-Seat Type)

If the lead and terminal are in good condition, reform the locking tang:

The following general repair procedures can be used for High Density, Printed Circuit Type, Bulkhead Type, and connector. Prior to starting any repairs, separate connector halves and remove any terminal covers or retainers. Figure 17 - The Untwisted Conductors

w DRAIN WIRE

Figure 18 - The Re-Assembled Cable

Figure 19 - Proper Taping

-

Instruction in the disassembly, repair, and assembly of connectors follows. Consult the figures for details on each specific type of connector. The instruction is divided into steps. Only perform those steps necessary to make the repair. Step One: Remove the Lead ~ e ~ r ethe s s terminal locking tang using the proper size pick. CAUTION: Do not place fingers or other parts of the body next to or around the back of the connector. If too much force is used, the pick and terminal both could be pushed out the back of the connector and cause injury. -Place the pick between the locking tang of the terminal and the plastic of the connector body. - E a s e t h e lead back e n o u g h t o release the locking tang. -Pull the pick out. -Gently pull the lead out of the back of the connector body.

-Hold the lead firmly t o prevent the splice between the terminal and the wire from flexing. -Use the pick t o bend the locking tang back into its original shape. Also check to see that the remainder of the terminal is still in its original shape. Step Three: Make the Repair When you make a repair, use the correct types of terminals and wires. -Attach a new wire or a new terminal using the procedures in Splicing Copper Wire or Splicing Aluminum Wire. Step Four: Insert the Lead Before inserting the lead, make certain that the t e r m i ~ a is l correctly shaped. Be careful to insert terminals in their proper locations. -Gently insert the lead from the back. The terminal should stop or "catch" about halfway through the connector body. Note: With bulkhead connectors. in many cavities it is possible for the terminal to be inserted in two ways. Be sure it is inserted in the same direction as it was removed, or to mate correctly with the facing terminal.

REPAIR PROCEDURES -Push hack and forth gently on the lead to be sure the terminal is held in place in both directions. I f t h e terminal easily pushes or pulls o u t , review S t e p Two; "He-Form the Locking 'I'ang. " Before mating the connector halves replace a n y terminal covers or retainers t h a t were removed. and apply grease to prevent corrosion.

N A R R O W PICK

DEPRESSING T H E LOCKING T A N G

REMOVING TERMINAL RETAINERS

RE-FORMING T H E LOCKING T A N G Figure 20 - High Density Connectors

-

w

REPAIR PROCEDURES

w

TWIST W I D E PICK T O RE-FORM T A N G

-

PUSH I N A N D D O W N O N T E R M I N A L N O T C H

R E - F O R M I N G T H E LOCKING T A N G ( M A L E T E R M I N A L ) LOCKING TANG

I

DEPRESSING T H E LOCKING T A N G ( M A L E T E R M I N A L )

I

R E - F O R M I N G T H E LOCKING T A N G ( F E M A L E T E R M I N A L )

I

I

I

Figure 21 - Bulkhead Type Connectors

REPAIR PROCEDURES

LOCKING TANG

RELEASE PARTS OF CONNECTOR FIRST I F NEEDED

REMOVING T E R M I N A L RETAINERS (MALE TERMINALS)

REMOVING T E R M I N A L RETAINERS (FEMALE TERMINALS)

I

RE-FORMING T H E LOCKING TANG (MALE T E R M I N A L )

RE-FORMING THE LOCKING TANG (FEMALE TERMINAL)

Figure 22 - Metri-pack Type Connectors - Push-To-Seat Type

REPAIR PROCEDURES - -

-

-

REPAIRING WEATHER PACK@ (Environmental) CONNECTORS

PICK BETWEEN TERMINAL AND CONNECTOR BODY

Weather Pack "or weatherproof-connectors provide environmental protection on certain electrical circuits. This protection consists of a moisture-proof rubber flexible seal between t h e two connector halves and rubber cable seals attached to each terminal. The terminals and the cable seals are secured by a hinged seco n d a r y lock on small Weather P a c k ' connectors and by plastic terminal retainers on large Weather Pack "onnectors. If a Weather P a c k " connector requires repair. d o n o t replace t h e Weather P a c k " parts with other types of connectors and terminals. Also, do not omit either the large seal or the cable seals when making a repair. Instruction in the disassemly, repair, and assembly of both small and large Weather Pack "onnectors follows. The instruction is divided into steps. Only perform those steps necessary to make the repair. Step One: Separate the Connector Halves

To separate a large connector, unscrew the bolt in the center of the connector body. Then pull the two halves apart. To separate a small connector, simply pull up on the primary lock and simultaneously pull the two halves apart.

RE-FORM LOCKING T A N G RE-FORMING T H E LOCKING T A N G Figure 23 - Printed Circuit Type Connectors

REPAIR PROCEDURES Step Two: Remove the Terminal Retainer(s) (Large Connectors)lOpen the Secondary Locks (Small Connectors)

To remove a terminal retainer. press a wide pick at a 45" angle against the locking nib (see Figure 24). Push the nib up a s far a s possible. Then, pull the retainer out. To open the secondary locks on small connectors, flip down the loclt hinges a s shown in Figure 25. Step Three: Remove the Lead

Depress the terminal locking tangs using a CC'eather Pack' pick(J28742-A or the equivalent): -Push the hollow cylinder of the pick into the terminal cavity from the front until it s t o p s (see Figures 26 and 27).The pick should surround the terminal (see Figure 28 for drawings of locking tangs). -Pull the pick out. -Gently pull t h e lead out of the back of the connector body. Note t h a t the male connector body half cont a i n s female terminals and t h e female half houses male terminals.

(NOTE: T H E R E ARE TWO RETAINERS) Figure 24 - Releasing the Terminal Retainers (Large Connectors)

I

I

I

-

SECONDARY LOCKS CLOSED

SECONDARY LOCKS OPEN

Figure 25 - Opening the Secondary Locks (Small Connectors)

I

REPAIR PROCEDURES Step Four: Re-Form the Locking Tang

If the lead and terminal are in good condition, re-form the locking tang.

I

I

WEATHER PACK 03 PICK

-Hold the lead firmly to prevent tk-le splice between the terminal and the wire from flexing. -Use the pick (528742-Aor the equivalent) t o bend the locking t a n g back into i t s original s h a p e ( s e e F i g u r e 28). Also, check to see that the remainder of the terminal is still in i t s original shape. (See Step Six for instruction in inserting the lead.) Step Five: Make the Repair

When you make a repair, use the correct types of terminals, wires, and seals.

Figure 26 - Releasing The Terminal Locking Tangs (Large Connector)

To add a new lead, cut the wire and crimp and solder on the weather-pack lead assembly (see Figure 29) using rosin core solder. (Follow the instructions for splicing wire outlined earlier in this secton for a review of splicing procedures.)

-

MALE

J

If Weather P a c k q e a d assemblies are not available, splice a new terminal and cable seal onto the existing wire. -Cut t h e wire immediately behind the cable seal. -Slip the new cable seal onto the wire and push it back out of the way. -Strip 5.0mm (3116") of insulation from the wire.

WEATHER PACK 03 PlCK

h

GENTLY REMOVE LEAD Figure 27 - Releasing The Terminal Locking Tangs (Small Connectors)

Figure 28 - ReForming The Locking Tang

REPAIR PROCEDURES -Crimp the new terminal over the copper strands (core crimp) a s shown in Figure 30. ( U s e a s t a n d a r d crimping toolnumber 525563 in the Kent-Moore catalog. 1 -Solder with rosin core solder. -hlove the cable seal t o edge of the insulation. -Crimp the grips a t the end of the terminal around the cable seal and insulated wire as shown in Figure 30 (insulation crimp). Apply light pressure for this crimp.

OPPOSE T E R M I N A L R E T A I N E R S WHEN REPLACING

FEMALE

3

J - n

c

I-tl

MALE

Remember to use the proper types of termi. nals and seals for this repair. Step Six: Insert the Lead

Before inserting the lead, make certain t h a l the terminal is correctly shaped (see Figure 28). Then, gently insert the lead from the back. T h e terminal should s t o p or "catch" about halfway through the connector body. Gently push back and forth on the lead to be sure the terminal is held in place in both directions. If the terminal easily pushes or pulls out. review Step Four: "Re-Form the Locking Tang. "

Figure 2 9 - Lead Assemblies

SEAL

Figure 31 - Replacing The Terminal Retainers (Large Connectors)

CORE CRIMP

Be careful to insert leads in their proper locations. Step Seven: Replace the Terminal Retainer(s1, (Large Connectors)/Secondary Locks (Small Connectors)

IMP A N D SOLDER

Replace the terminal retainers by slipping the retainer halves into the connector body ( a s shown in Figure 31). To close the secondary locks on small connectors, flip the hinges back t o their original positions (see Figure 32).

SECONDARY LOCK HINGES CLOSED O N CONNECTOR BODY SEAL Figure 3 0 - Replacing The Terminal

Figure 3 2 - Closing The Secondary Locks

REPAIRING METRI-PACK SERIES 150 CONNECTORS REPAIRING METRI-PACK SERIES 150 CONNECTORS (Pull-to-Seat Type)

Metri-Pack connectors are used t o connect various sensors such as the cam, crankshaft and coolant sensors to primary harnesses in the engine compartment. The Metri-Pack connector consists of three parts (see Figure 29): a Pull to Seat type terminal, a connector body and a rubber seal which is inserted in the back of the connector body to provide environmental protection. Do nct, replace the Metri-Pack parts with parts of other types of connectors and terminals or omit the environmental seals when repairing Metri-Pack connectors. Repair instructions are divided into two steps, connector disassembly and terminal removal and connector assembly and terminal insertion. (Refer to figures 33 t o 36)

Step 2: Connector Assembly and Terminal Insertion STRIPPED WIRE

Insert the wire through the seal and the connector body (Figure 35). Crimp the terminal to the stripped wire. Pull the wire and the terminal back through the connector body until it locks in place (Figure 36).

I

CONNECTOR

TERMINAL

I CONNECTOR BODY Figure 35 - Connector Reassembly

I

1 TERMINAL

1

I IFigure 33 - Terminal 535689 Removal From Connector Body

Step One: Connector Disassembly and Terminal Removal

Insert tool BT-8446 or 535689 into the connector (Figure 33). Pull back on the wire slightly, pry up the locking tang and then push the wire through the front of the connector. If the terminal will be reused, reshape the locking tang.

TOOL BT8446 OR 535689

CTO R

I

TAB Figure 36 - Terminal Reinsertion

LOCKING TANG

m Figure 34 - Reforming The Locking Tang

I

SECTION 8A

ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS REGAL Cell 1 10 11 12 13 14 20

Index Power Distribution Fuse Block Details Light Switch Details Accessory Panel Details Ground Distribution Engine: Computer Command Control (VIN A) Engine: Multiport Injection (VIN 7) Engine: Computer Command Control (VIN Y) Starter and Charging System Coolant Fans Choke Heater Vehicle Speed Sensor Cruise Control Horns Brake Warning System Power Master Brake System Heater Defoggers Air Conditioning: System Check Air Conditioning: Blower Controls (C60) Air Conditioning: Compressor Controls (C60) Air Conditioning: Air Delivery (C60)

Cell 66

Air Conditioning: Blower Controls (C68) Air Conditioning: Compressor Controls (C68) Air Conditioning: Air Delivery (C68) Warnings and Alarms: Chime Instrument Panel: Indicators Cluster Instrument Panel: Digital Cluster WiperlWasher WiperlWasher: Pulse Headlights Headlights with Sentinel Exterior Lights Back Up Lights Cornering Lights Interior Lights Interior Lights Dimming Power Windows Sunroof Power Door Locks Theft Deterrent System Trunk Release Power Seats Radio Power Antenna Component Location Views Harness Connector Faces Harness Routing Views

INDEX

. Page

Page

Accessory Panel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-0 Air Conditioning Air Delivery Controls C6O. Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65-0 C68. Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68-0 Blower Controls C60. Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63-0 C68. Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66-0 Compressor Controls C60. Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64-0 C68. Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67-0 System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62-0 Alarms (Audible) Chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77-0 Antenna(Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151-0 Brakes Power Master Brake System . . . . . . 46-0 Brake Warning System . . . . . . . . . . 41-0 Charging System V6 VIN A and V8 VIN Y . . . . . . . . . . 30-0 Turbo VIN 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1 Choke Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-0 Circuit Breaker Details PWRIACC Circuit Breaker . . . 10-1& 11-8 WDO Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Connectors (Harness Connector Faces) 202-0 ClOO Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-0 Junction Block (C453)Details . . . . . 202-1 Component Location Views . . . . . . . . . 20 1-0 Coolant Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-0 Cruisecontrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-0 Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-0 Door Locks (Power). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130-0 Engine Control

Computer Command Control (V6VIN A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-0 (V8VIN Y). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-0 Multi-Port Fuel Injection (VIN 7) . . 21-0 Fuse Block Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-0 Ground Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-0 Harness Routing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . 203-0 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-0 Horns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-0 Indicators Digital Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-0 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-0 Cruise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-2 Fasten Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-1 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-1 OillCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-3 Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-2 Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . 82-2 Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-1 Water Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-3 Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-3 Instrument Panel Digital Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-0 Indicators Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-0 Interior Lights Dimming . . . . . . . . . 117-0 Lights (Exterior) Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112-0 Coach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-11 Cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113-0 Front Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-5 Front Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-5 Hazard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-0 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100-0 With Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . 101-0

Page

Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park .......................... Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lights (Interior) Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . GloveBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Quarter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Switch Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Speaker System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seats (Power) Three Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V6 VIN A and V8 VIN Y . . . . . . . . . Turbo VIN 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tailgate Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft Deterrent System . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows (Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WiperIWasher With Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Without Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

110-5 110-5 110-0 110-8 110-0 114-2 114-0 114-0 114-2 114-2 114-2 114-0 114-2 114-2 114-2 12-0 10-0 150-0 150-2 140-0 30-0 30-0 30-1 122-0 134-0 133-0 134-0 33-0 120-0 123-0 91-0 90-0

POWER DISTRIBUTION

3 RED COOLANT FAN (TURBO V I N .7)

3REo 1 RED

2

I

I I I

I

44

3 RED

POWER DISTRIBUTION CIRCUIT OPERATION

COMPONENT LOCATION

Electrical power for the car is provided by the Generator when the engine is running. The schematic diagram shows how each circuit gets its power . For more detail about the generator. and connections to the Battery and Starter. see Starter and Charging System. The car's Power Distribution system consists of Fusible Links. Fuses. Circuit Breakers. the Light Switch. and the Ignition Switch. Fusible Links are short pieces of wire several times smaller than the circuit wire to which they supply power .They are covered with a special hightemperature insulation . When conduction too high a current. they will melt and stop current flow. They are designed to protect the car's electrical system from electrical shorts that are not protected by the circuit breakers and fuses. See Fuse Block Details and Light Switch Details for complete wiring to first component in each circuit . The Ignition Switch has six positions. five of which have detents. The BULB TEST position is after the RUN position and just before the START position . BULB TEST does not have a detent .

Blower Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. on AIC accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convenience Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. left of radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Control Module (ECM) . RH shroud. near lower access hole . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fusible Link A (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Fusible Link A (VIN A) . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Fusible Link A (VIN Y). . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Fusible Link B (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Fusible Link B (VIN A). . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Fusible Link B (VIN Y). . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Fusible Link E (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . RH side of engine. near starter solenoid . . . . . . . Fusible Link J (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . RH front of engine compartment. behind battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base of steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-Line Fuse A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Taped to IIP harness. behind RH side of cluster In-Line Fuse B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Taped to IIP harness. behind RH side of cluster Power Master Brake Relay . . . . . . . LH front of dash. below brake master cylinder . Sentinel Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. right of radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter Solenoid (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . Lower RH side of engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter Solenoid (VIN A) . . . . . . . . Lower RH side of engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter Solenoid (VIN Y) . . . . . . . . Lower LH side of engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft Deterrent Controller . . . . . . . Behind IIP. near LH shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft Deterrent Relay . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. left of steering column . . . . . . . . . . . ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . C114 (VIN 7) (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . . RH front of engine compartment. behind battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C497 (VIN 7) (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. near blower motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C497 (VIN A) (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. below valve cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C497 (VIN Y) (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . Behind RH side of IIP. right of radio . . . . . . . . . C815 (7 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. on RH side of steering column . . . . GlOO (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH front of engine. on cylinder head . . . . . . . . . GlOO (VIN A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front of engine. below generator . . . . . . . . . . . . GI00 (VIN Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On LH cylinder head. behind generator . . . . . . .

As shown in the schematic. circuits which are supplied from the Ignition Switch are ON (hot) for different switch positions .The hot bar at the top of each schematic states when the fuse is hot according to the position of the Ignition Switch.

Page-Figure 201-19-B 201-15-A 201-17-B 201-12-A 201- 6-B 201- 0-A 201- 5-A 201- 6-B 201- 0-A 201- 5-A 201- 6-B 201- 5-F 201-13-A 201-11-A 201-11-A 201- 9-A 201-13-D 201- 6-B 201- 0-A 201- 5-A 201-11-A 201-11-A 201- 9-B 201- 5-F 201- 7-C 201- 2-A 201-16-B 201-13-A 201- 5-E 201- 0-B 201- 3-B

m

FUSE BLOCK DE' ,ILS C/H (20 AMP) 0, (V6 VIN A, V8 VIN Y )

R LYS ( 5 AMP) (Turbo VIN 7 ) CIRCUIT BREAKER (30 AMP) Power Windows

ECMIBAT ( 10 AMP) (V6 VIN A, V 8 V I N Y ) ECM-SOL (10 AMP)

FPIINJ (15 AM (Turbo VI N 7)

EAKER (30 AMP) heft Deterrent

DOME CTSY (20 AMP) (V6 VIN A, V8 VIN Y )

-

PWR BRK (30 AMP) (Turbo VIN 7 )

-

-

FUSE BLOCK DETAILS: INST LPS FUSE @

w

LIGHT SWITCH DETAILS PAGE 12.0

v FUSE BLOCK

(NOT USED)

.5 GRY

I 8

FUSE BLOCK DETAILS: CIG-CLK FUSE cu

I

.8 ORN (40

WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS

,

A

WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS \

FUSE BLOCK DETAILS: ST BLTIACC FUSE. TURN BIU FUSE

IF

v

rn

K DETAILS: ECMIIGN FUSE AND FPIINJ FUSE - URBO VIN 7

FUSE BL

I

1 PNKIBLK

Slll -

C

6

COMPUTER CONTROLLEO COIL IGNITION (CCCI) MODULE

-

PAGES 21-0 A N 0 21-2

FUEL -

MASS

AIR FLOW -

SENSOR PAGE 21-2

CONTROL MODULE (ECM) PAGES 21-1 A N D 21-2

SPA!& CONTROL (ESC) MOOULE

E L PRESSURE

PAGE 212

PAGE 21-1

S X WH

\

V

PUMP

F U E L INJECTORS

RELAY PAGE 21-1

PAGE 21-1

-

I

FUSE BLOCK DETAILS: ECM-IGN FUSE - V 6 VIN A AND V 8 VIN Y CO

1 PNKIBLK

I

439

Mid67

V6 V I N A

HEATER

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING

ELECTRONIC AIR CONOITIOflING

'a

FUSE BLOCK DETAILS: PWR ACC CIRCUIT BREAKER, ECM-BAT FUSE, AND STOP-HAZ FUSE

i I I

r

I

\

sTOP.HAZ

FUSE 10 AMP

20 AMP

'

i BLOCK PWR ACC CIRCUIT BREAKER 30 AMP

f

LOCK RELAY

AND 22-0

ASSEMBLY PAGES 130-0 AND 133-1

II I 1

BAT1

SEAT -S PAGE 140.0

I

-

FUSE BLOTK DETAILS: CCCl FUSE, ECMISOL FUSE AND RLYS FUSE

1Z

U]

TURBO VIN 7

PAGE 31-0

u

M

---1 I

I

I

!

;

L--J

COMPUTER CONTROLLEO IGNITION

.8 PNKIBLK

B

7--7

I I

L---J

5p

H4

.5 PNKIBLK

N

K

I---l

I

:

BRAKE

S Z W PAGES 21 3. 31 0 A N 0 67 2

PAGE 31-0

I I

I '

L---J

I I I

WASTE

cnTE

SOLENOIO PAGE 21 3

/

B

~

r---I I t

I

I

I

I f I

L,- J CANISTER PU RG E SOLENOID -

-

PAGE 21 3

~

AND 46-0

S112

L

:

r---I

l

,

I

II L---J I

COOLANT FAN DELAY RELAY PAGE 31 0

5p N K 33gI B L ~ pNK/BL:133g ~

r--1

f I L--a

I

I

L-,,A

I i

-ELECTRONIC VAGUUM

AIC CUTOUT

REGULATOR -

RELAY -

VALVE (EVRV) ii-3

PAGES 21 3. 64-1 AND 67.1

P~GE PAGE 21-0

r---I

:I

FUSE BLOCK DETAILS: CRUISE FUSE AND GAGES FUSE Ig

SEE INSTRUMENT PANEL FOR PIN

iNSTRUMENT (CHECK ENGINE PAGE 34-0

82 2

rn

LIGHT SWITCH DETAILS

-

PAGE 110-11

MARKER

LIGHT

STOPRURN

STOPITURN

PAGE 110-9 PAGE 110-9

PAGE 110-9 PAGE 110-9

PAGE 110-9

STOPRURN

STOPITURN

LIGHT PAGE 110-9

PAGE 110-9

LIGHT PAGE 110-9

MARKER PAGE 110-9

GROUND DISTRIBUTION: G 177 REAR LIGHTS GROUND

@

G R O U N ~-S T R I B U T I O N :G102, AND G I 0 3

I3 "-I

FRONT LIGHTS: DUAL HEADLIGHTS

LH -

CORNERING LIGHT

-

LH

PARK

LIGHT

LH -

FRONT PARK/TURN TE

LH -

HI BEAM HEADLIGHT

LH -

DUAL BEAM HEADLIGHT

B

INSTRUMENT PANEL GROUND

SEE INSTRUMENT PAWEL FOR PIN NUMBERS

rn

G R O U N ~ S T R I B U T I O NG : I20 ENGINE GROUND: TURBO VIN 7

0

m

GROUND DISTRIBUTION: G I 20 ENGINE GROUND: V6 VIM A

!E I 2

P

GROUND DISTRIBUTION: G 120 b

3

6

ENGINE GROUND:V8 VIN Y

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DIGITAL CLUSTER

C O M P U COMMAND CONTROL: V 6 VIN A @ d

VEHICLE SENSORS AND TRANSMISSION CONVERTER CLUTCH 1 FUSE

I I

I

I PNKIBLK SEE FUSE BLOCK DETAILS

--='

1

8 PNKIBLK

h Sm!

239

239

VEHICLE S E SENSOR BUFFER SOLID STATE 0 0 NOT YEASURE RESISTANCE

COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL: V 6 VIN A IGNITION AND SERVICE ENGINE SOON LIGHT

DlSTRIBUTlDN SEE GROtlNO OlSTRlBUTf ON

+-

ELECTRONIC

(EST1 OlSTRlEUTOR

-

b

COMP

COMMAND CONTROL: V 6 VIN A

SPARK CONTROL ' -"T"-"' I

ECM.IGN

&

9 FUSE

!

'--i---------,I I

lo AMP

1

6 PNKIBLK

439

COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL: V6 VIN A HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

1

WHT

/

I 1 I

/I I

BLK12020043 ALDL Connector

.

COMPONENT LOCATION

i

I

-

AIR Diverter Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . AIR Select Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Line Diagnostic Link (ALDL)Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barometric Pressure Sensor . . . . . . Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Temperature Sensor . . . . . Diagnostic Dwell Meter Connector . Early Fuel Evaporation (EFE) Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Early Fuel Evaporation (EFE) Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Control Module (ECM) . Electronic Spark Control (ESC) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Spark Timing (EST) Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Vacuum Regulator Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fusible Link D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear Selector Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . Idle Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Knock Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Driver Module . . . . . . . . . . . . Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oxygen Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Throttle Position Sensor (TPS). . . . Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer . . . . . . ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CllO (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C433 (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C437 (15 cavities)

..............

Page-Figure LH side of engine. behind AIR pump . . . . . . . . . 201- 1-A LH side of engine. behind AIR pump . . . . . . . . . 201- 1-A

On bottom of IIP. below radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. right of glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top of brake pedal support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front of engine. right of distributor . . . . . . . . . . Front of throttle body. on engine harness . . . . .

201-14-B 201-17-B 201-12-A 201- 2-B 201- 2-B

Top RH side of engine. below throttle body . . . . 201- 2-B Top of RH front wheel well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 0-C RH shroud. near lower access hole . . . . . . . . . . . 201-17-B

........

201- 0-C

................

201- 1-B

Top center of RH valve cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH front of engine. next to generator . . . . . . . . Attached to base of steering column . . . . . . . . . Front LH side of throttle body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base of steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top LH rear of engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. above LH side of glove box . . . . . . .

20 1- 1-A 201-12-A 201- 2-A 201-13-A 201- 2-B 201-13-A 201- 1-A 201-15-A

On top of RH front wheel well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear of RH exhaust manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front of throttle body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. left of radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front of engine. behind distributor . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. in front of blower motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind RH side of IIP. behind glove box . . . . . .

201- 0-C 201- 1-C 201- 2-B 201-16-A 201- 9-B 201- 1-B

On RH front fender. above wheel well Top front LH side of engine

201-10-B 201-17-B

-

COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL: V6 VIN A HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

BLK 12015 9 7 5 Air Diverter Valve

-

-

G104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, top left of steering column. . . . . . . . 201-15-A GI20 (VIN A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine, on cylinder head . . . . . . . . . . 201- 1-A S201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-16-A S203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above steering column . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-B S213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-16-A S219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, behind I/P, above radio. . . . . . . . . . 201-16-A S457. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCC harness, behind RH side of generator . . . . 201- 1-A S458. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCC harness, near blower motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-20-B S460. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCC harness, near blower motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-20-B S461. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCC harness, near barometric pressure sensor . 201-17-B S663. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCC harness, near barometric pressure sensor . 201-17-B S668 (VIN A ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCC harness, near blower motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-20-B S826. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I / P harness, near brake pedal arm . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A

BLU 12020325

BLK 1 2 0 4 0 7 5 3

Barometric Pressure Sensor

Coolant Temperature Sensor

GRY 12015977 Air Select Valve

WHT 12010649 Brake Switch

BLK 12 0 2 0 0 15 Early Fuel Evaporation Relay

COMPUTER COMMAND CONTRPL: V6 VIN A

-

HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

~1

BLK 1201 5982 Electronic Spark Control Module

C1 ELK

C2 ELK

V00033.0 Electronic Control Module (ECM)

BLK 12015797 Electronic Spark Timing Distributor

BLK 12015 0 3 4 Gear Selector Switch

BLK 1 2 0 4 7 9 5 0 BLK 1 2 0 3 4 2 6 9

Electronic Vacuum Regulator Valve

EFE Heater GRY 1201 5387 Idle Speed Control

TR COMMAND CONTROL

COMPU


or'

BLK 1 2 0 1 5 7 9 3 Throttle Position Sensor

C1 BLK

C2 BLU

RED 12015795 V00019.0

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

Ignition Switch

BLU 1 2 0 1 5 3 9 0 Transmission Converter Clutch Solenoid

BLK 1 2 0 2 0 1 3 2 Mixture Control Solenoid BLK 1201 0 4 8 8 Light Driver Module

BLK 12015 6 8 6 Vehicle Speed Sensor

m

1:

MULTI-PORT FUEL INJECTION: TUFtBO VIN 7 IGNITION

TO SPARK

PLUGS

FUEL CONTROL AND INJECTORS

MULTI-PORT FUEL INJECTION: TURBO VIN 7 SPARK CONTROL, AIR FLOW SENSOR, AND SERVICE ENGINE SOON INDICATOR

---------

1 FUSE I

L

1I

8 PNKIBLK

---------J

239

"03 e--", .8 PNKIBLK

239

SEE FUSE BLOCK OETAlLS

.Iw

.5 PNKIBLK

439

m

v!

MULTI-P

T FUEL INJECTION: TURBO VIN 7

-

TRANSMISSION CONVERTER CLUTCH, AIC CONTROLS, AND EMISSION CONTROLS

w

-

MULTI-PORT FUEL INJECTION: TURBO VIN 7

ELECTRONIC CONTROL

TEMFERATURE

-

MULTI-PORT FUEL INJECTION: TURBO VIN 7 HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure On RH front fender, above wheel well . . . . . . . . 201- 8-C

AIC Cut-Out Relay (VIN 7 ) . . . . . . . Assembly Line Diagnostic Link (ALDL) Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . On bottom of IIP, below radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-14-B Brake Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top of brake pedal support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A Camshaft Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH front of engine, near water pump. . . . . . . . . 201- 6-A Canister Purge Solenoid . . . . . . . . . LH front of engine compartment, behind headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 1-10-A Computer Controlled Coil Ignition (CCCI)Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear of engine, above intake manifold . . . . . . . . 201- 7-A Coolant Temperature Sensor . . . . . Front of engine, left of coolant outlet. . . . . . . . . 201- 6-A Crankshaft Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH side of engine, behind harmonic balancer. . . 201- 6-C Electronic Control Module (ECM) . RH shroud, near lower access hole. . . . . . . . . . . 201-17-B Electronic Spark Control (ESC) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On RH front fender, above wheel well . . . . . . . . 201- 8-C Electronic Vacuum Regulator Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine, above valve cover. . . . . . . . . 201- 7-A Engine Oil Pressure Switch (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..RH front of engine, below turbocharger. . . . . . . 201- 5-D Fuel Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . At each intake manifold port Fuel Pump Prime Connector. . . . . . LH front of engine, below generator. . . . . . . . . . 201- 8-A Fuel Pump Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On RH front fender, above wheel well . . . . . . . . 201- 8-C Fuel Tank Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside fuel tank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201-22-D Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A Fusible Link J (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . RH front of engine compartment, behind battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201- 5-F Gear Selector Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . Attached to base of steering column . . . . . . . . . 201-13-A Idle Air Control Valve. . . . . . . . . . . Front of engine, on bottom of throttle body. . . . 201- 6-A Knock Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear of engine, near top of bell housing. . . . . . . 201- 7-A Manifold Air Temperature (MAT) Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH front of engine compartment, in intake hose 201-10-A Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor. . . . . LH front of engine compartment, on air intake duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201-10-A Oxygen Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In exhaust manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 1- 6-A Throttle Position Sensor (TPS). . . . Front of engine, on RH side of throttle body . . . 201- 6-A Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer. . . . . . Behind IIP, left of radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-16-A

C100,See Page 202-0

ELK

I

(Continued on next page)

MULTI-PORT FUEL INJECTION: TURBO VIN 7 HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Waste Gate Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C l l l ( 7 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C114 (VIN 7) (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . .

BLK

BLK 1202001 5

AIC Cutout Relay

RH side of engine. top of valve cover . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top rear of engine. above bell housing . . . . . . . . RH front of engine compartment. behind battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C209 (11cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attached to LH side of fuse block . . . . . . . . . . . C312 ( 3 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind center of rear bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C320 (6 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear LH corner of trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C433 (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front of engine. left of throttle body . . . . . . . . . C437 (15 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind RH side of IIP. behind glove box . . . . . . G104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. to left of steering column . . . . . . . . . GI20 (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine. on cylinder head . . . . . . . . . . GI77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear LH corner of trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Injector harness. top of engine S112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near rear of RH cylinder head . S115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near rear of LH valve cover . . . S185 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. behind IIP. near ECM . . . . . . . S201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. above radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. above steering column . . . . . . . . . . S213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. above radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near rear of LH valve cover . . . S219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. behind IIP. above radio . . . . . . . . . . S457 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near relay bracket . . . . . . . . . . S462 (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near rear of LH valve cover . . . S666. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near front of LH valve cover . . S668 (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near relay bracket . . . . . . . . . . S807 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. behind RH side of IIP . . . . . . . .

BLK 12015798

Air Control Valve

G R Y 1204141 1

BLK 12020043

Air Temperature Sensor

Assembly Line Diagnostic Link

'L

201- 5-D 201- 9-B 201- 7-A 201- 5-F 201-13-C 201-21-B 201-22-A 201- 6-A 201-17-B 201-15-A 201- 7-A 201-22-A 201- 7-A 201- 7-A 201-17-C 201-16-A 201-13-B 201-16-A 201- 7-A 201-16-A 201- 8-B 201- 7-A 201- 6-A 201- 8-B 201-17-C

w


-

w


GRY WHT

CRY

V08001 .O Clll

BLK 12034 163 BLK 12020829

Computer Controlled Ignition Module

Camshaft Sensor

N A T 1 20 10649 Brake S w i t c h

BLK 12040753

RED 12015978 Canister Purge Solenoid


I

z Fl


-


BLK12047909 Crankshaft Sensor

C2 ELK

V00017.1

C1 ELK

Digital Cluster

BLK 12015982 Electronic Spark Control Module

BLK12020585 Engine Oil Pressure Switch

BLK 12040977 Mass Flow Sensor

BLK 12015797 Electronic Vacuum Regulator Valve

-


-

w


C1 BLK

BLK 12015793 Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)

Electronic Control Module (ECM)

BLK 12015798 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Automatic Transmission

BLK 12015686 Transmission Converter Clutch Solenoid Automatic Transmission

BLK12015686 Vehicle Speed Sensor

COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL: V 8 VIN Y lGNtTlON AND SERVICE ENGINE SOON INDICATOR

I?

IN I

COMPU

COMMAND CONTROL: V8 VIN Y

ENGINE DATA SENSORS AND EMISSION CONTROLS

--------I

ASSEMBLY LINE DIAGNOSTIC L I N K (ALDL) CONNECTOR

AIR CONDITIONING

8 PNKIBLK

T

SOLENOID CONTROL CONTROL

CONTROL

CONTROL

CONTROL

5 VOLT

THROTTLE

COOLANT

8 BLK

452

8BLK

452

-

m

COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL: V 8 VIN Y

II

1

VEHICLE SENSORS AND TRANSMISSION CONVERTER CLUTCH

8 PNKIBLK

BLOCK DETAILS

BRAKE SWITCH OPEN WITH BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED A I R CONDITIONING

TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY L I N E

TRANSMISSION CONTRDL OUTPUT

PARKtWEUTRAL

CRUISE CONTROL

-

N

.

COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL: V8 VIN Y

.

COMPONENT LOCATION


C100. See Page 202-0

BLK

, h BLK

I

Page-Figure

AIR Diverter Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH side of engine. behind AIR pump . . . . . . . . . 201- 4-A AIR Select Switching Valve . . . . . . RH side of engine. behind AIR pump . . . . . . . . . 201- 4-A Anti-Diesel Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . Front of engine compartment. above LH valve cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 3-A Assembly Line Diagnostic Link (ALDL)Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . On bottom of IIP. below radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-14-B Barometric Pressure Sensor . . . . . . Behind IIP. right of glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-17-B Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top of brake pedal support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A Coolant Temperature Sensor . . . . . LH front of engine. behind generator . . . . . . . . . 201- 3-A Diagnostic Dwell Meter Connector . Top front of engine. front of carburetor . . . . . . . 201- 3-A EGRlRVBlILC Solenoid Assembly LH rear of engine compartment. above valve cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 3-A Electronic Control Module (ECM) . RH shroud. near lower access hole . . . . . . . . . . . 201-17-B Electronic Spark Timing (EST) Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top rear of engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 2-C Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of 1IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A Gear Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . Attached to base of steering column . . . . . . . . . 20 1-13-A Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base of steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-A Light Driver Module . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. above LH side of glove box . . . . . . . 201-15-A Manifold Differential Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine compartment. top of RH front wheel well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 4-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine compartment. below RH valve cover . . . 201- 4-A Oxygen Sensor Throttle Position Sensor (TPS). . . . Front of engine. LH front of carburetor . . . . . . . 201- 3-A Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer . . . . . . Behind IIP. left of radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-16-A ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 9-B CllO (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front of engine. near electronic spark timing distributor C433 (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. below RH valve cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 4-A C437 (15 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind RH side of IIP. behind glove box . . . . . . 201-17-B GI04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. to left of steering column . . . . . . . . . 201-15-A G120 (VIN Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine. near distributor . . . . . . . . . . 201- 4-A S201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IIP harness. above radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-16-A S203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. above steering column . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-B S213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. above radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-16-A S219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. behind IIP. above radio . . . . . . . . . . 201-16-A

COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCC harness, above RH valve cover. . . . . . . . . . 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCC harness, near manifold differential pressure sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201S460. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCC harness, near manifold differential S457. S458.

BLK 1201 5975 Air Diverter Valve

GRY 12015977

4-A 4-A

pressure sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 4-A S663. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCC harness, near barometric pressure sensor . 201-17-B S668 (VIN Y ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCC harness, near barometric pressure sensor . 201-17-B S826. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, near brake pedal arm . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A

RED 1201 5380

WHT 12010649

Anti-Diesel Solenoid

Brake Switch

Air Select Switching Valve

BLK 12020043

BLU 12020325

BLK 12040735

ALDL Connector

Barometric Pressure Sensor


-

COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL: V 8 VIN Y

-

-

%

G)

?

I


BLK 12 0 1 5 0 3 4

C1 BLK

C2 BLK

Gear Selector Switch V00033.0 Electronic Control Module (ECM)

C2 BLU

C1 BLK

BLK 12034455

BLK12015797

V00019.0

EGRIRVBIILC Solenoid Assembly

Electronic Spark Timing Distributor (C 1 10)

Ignition Switch

1e

COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL: V 8 VIN Y HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

BLK 1 2 0 10488

BLK 12020132

WHT 12010503

Light Driver Module

Mixture Control Solenoid

Transmission Ccnverter Clutch Solenoid

GRY 12015 3 8 4

BLK 1201 5 7 9 3

BLK 1201 5 6 8 6

Manifold Differential Pressure Sensor

Throttle Position Sensor

Vehicle Speed Sensor

STARTER AND CHARGING SYSTEM: V 6 VIN A AND V 8 VIN Y WJ

3 RED

2

3 RED

DISTRIBUTION

BLOCK DETAILS

DISTRIBUTION

3RED

FUSIBLE LINK A

RED

C - t 2 -

2

RED

AIR

FOR ClOOTERMlNAL

CONDITIONING

CONNECTOR PAGE

*

STARTEa

D CHARGING SYSTEM: TURBO "IN 7 3 RED 2

3 RED

DISTRIBUTION

BLOCK DETAILS

PIN NUMBERS

CONDITIONING

DISTRIBUTION FOR ClOO TERMINAL CONNECTOR PAGE

(TURBO V I N 7)

STARTER AND CHARGING SYSTEM HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES C100. See Page 202-0

BLK

V00039.0 Generator (Turbo VIN 7)

WHT 6294493

Generator (V6VIN A. V8 VIN Y )

C2 BLU

C1 ELK

V00019.0 Ignition Switch

. COMPONENT LOCATION Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fusible Link A (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . Fusible Link A (VIN A) . . . . . . . . . Fusible Link A (VIN Y). . . . . . . . . . Fusible Link B (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . Fusible Link B (VIN A). . . . . . . . . . Fusible Link B (VIN Y). . . . . . . . . . Fusible Link D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fusible Link E (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . Fusible Link J (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter Interrupt Relay . . . . . . . . . Starter Solenoid (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . Starter Solenoid (VIN A) . . . . . . . . Starter Solenoid (VIN Y) . . . . . . . . Theft Deterrent Controller . . . . . . . ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C114 (VIN 7) (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . . GlOO (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GlOO (VIN A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GlOO (VIN Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GlOl (Except VIN Y) . . . . . . . . . . . GlOl (VIN Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S102 (VIN A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S102 (VIN Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S826. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page-Figure Under LH side of IIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . RH front of engine. next to generator . . . . . . . . RH side of engine. near starter solenoid . . . . . . . RH front of engine compartment. behind battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base of steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Taped to IIP harness. near fuse block . . . . . . . . . Lower RH side of engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower RH side of engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower LH side of engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. near LH shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH front of engine compartment. behind battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH front of engine. on cylinder head . . . . . . . . . Front of engine. below generator . . . . . . . . . . . . On LH cylinder head. behind generator . . . . . . . On RH front fender. near battery . . . . . . . . . . . . On LH front fender. behind headlights . . . . . . . Engine harness. near front of RH valve cover .. Engine harness. rear of LH valve cover . . . . . . . IIP harness. to left of steering column . . . . . . . . IIP harness. above steering column . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. near brake pedal arm . . . . . . . . . . .

Y

ELK

Starter Interrupt Relay

Theft Controller

201-12-A 201- 6-B 201- 0-A 201- 5-A 201- 6-B 201- 0-A 201- 5-A 201- 2-A 201- 6-B 201- 5-F 201-13-A 201-11-A 201- 6-B 201- 0-A 201- 5-A 201-11-A 201- 9-B 201- 5-F 201- 5-E 201- 0-B 201- 3-B 201- 5-F 201-20-E 201- 2-A 201- 2-C 201-13-B 201-13-B 201-12-A

K

STARTE AND CHARGING SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

3. Check the Generator belt.

STARTER

4. Check that the Starter Solenoid terminal B

Try the following checks before doing the System Diagnosis.

1. Check the hydrometer eye that is built into

and battery connections are clean and tight. 5. Check the vehicle voltmeter (if equipped) to assure accurate voltage readings.

the vehicle Battery before troubleshooting the Starter System. Green eye - Battery is charged. - Dark eye - Battery is discharged. Recharge Battery. - Clear or yellow eye - Battery fluid is low. Replace Battery. 2. Check that the Starter Solenoid terminals S and B and battery connections are clean and tight. 3. Check that ground GlOO is clean and tight. -

CHARGING

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS STARTER Diagnostic steps for the symptoms listed in the following table are listed after the table.

SYMPTOM TABLE Solenoid does not click B: Engine does not crank or cranks slowly, but the Starter Solenoid clicks

A: ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK AND THE STARTER SOLENOID DOES NOT CLICK (TABLE 1)


Measure: VOLTAGE At: STARTER SOLENOID Condition: Ignition Switch: START

1. Check the hydrometer eye that is built into

the vehicle Battery before troubleshooting the Charging System. Green eye - Battery is charged. - Dark eye - Battery is discharged. Recharge Battery. - Clear or yellow eye - Battery fluid is low. Replace Battery. 2. Check Gages Fuse.

H CONNECTORS C 1 &

Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.


TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS


Measure Between

-

-

Correct Voltage

With Theft Deterrent, go to Table 3. - Without Theft Deterrent, checklrepair PPL ( 6 )wire for an open. 1. Checklrepair RED (2) wire and Fusible Link A (see schematic).

-

For Diagnosis

(PPL)& Battery See 1 Ground If all the voltages are correct, replace the Starter Solenoid. 1. Go to Table 2.


STARTER AND CHARGING SYSTEM (Continued from previous page)

Disconnect: CONNECTOR At: THEFT DETERRENT CONTROLLER Condition: Ianition Switch: START Disconnect

Correct Result

Theft Engine Deterrent See 1 Cranks Controller Connector If the engine cranks, go to 8A-133 for Theft Deterrent Controller Diagnosis. 1. Leave connector disconnected and go to Table 4.

Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: STARTER INTERRUPT RELAY CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Condition:

I


I 1

Measure Between

D(PPLIWHT) & Ground

Correct

I 1

Battery

o volts

I I I

For Diagnosis

See 1 See 2

Measure: VOLTAGE At: BATTERY TERMINALS Conditions: Battery fully charged (VIN A & VIN Y) Disconnect PNK wire from BAT terminal of the Electronic Spark Timing (EST) Distributor (Turbo VIN 7) Remove the FPIINJ FUSE lgnition Switch: START Engine being cranked

A: ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK AND THE STARTER SOLENOID DOES NOT CLICK (TABLE 5 )

For Diagnosis

Measure: VOLTAGE At: STARTER INTERRUPT RELAY CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Condition: Theft Deterrent Controller Connector: DISCONNECTED lgnition Switch: START

B: ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK OR CRANKS SLOWLY, BUT THE STARTER SOLENOID CLICKS (TABLE 1)

(Continued from previous column) If all results are correct, go to Table 5. 1. ChecWrepair PPLIWHT (306)wire for an open (see schematic). 2. Checklrepair LT BLU (965) wire for a


I

Jumper Between

D UPE~TL",T)

1

Measure Between

I

(

NOTE: The following tests are designed for

I I I

(Continued in next column)

For Diagnosis

Positive &

Correct Result For Diagnosis

Engine see 1 Cranks If the engine cranks, replace the Starter Interrupt Relay. 1. Checklrepair the PPL (6)wire for an open (see schematic).

I t,":,": I

engines and batteries at normal operating temperatures and assumes that there are no engine symptoms which would cause a no start symptom. To use the tests under other conditions could result in misdiagnosis.

Battery 9.5 volts Terminals If the voltage is correct, go to Table 2. 1. Refer to Section 6D for Battery Load Test. Remove S t a r t e r Assembly for repairs if the Battery is OK.

I

II?

STARl w AND CHARGING SYSTEM

V6 VIN A, V8 VIN Y CHARGING Diagnostic steps for the symptoms listed in the following table are listed after the table.

Measure: VOLTAGE At: BATTERY CABLES Conditions: Battery fully charged (VIN A & VIN Y) Disconnect PNK wire from BAT terminal of the Electronic Spark Timing (EST) Distributor (Turbo VIN 7) Remove the FPIINJ FUSE IgnitCon Switch: START Engine being cranked Measure Between

I

~

~

I

~

~

For Diagnosis

Volts

Less than .5 Volts

SYMPTOM TABLE

,

A: VOLTS Indicator does not light with the Ignition Switch in RUN and the engine stopped. B: VOLTS Indicator stays on when the engine is running. C: Battery is undercharged or overcharged.

"

~

A: VOLTS INDICATOR DOES NOT LIGHT WITH THE IGNITION SWITCH IN RUN AND THE ENGINE STOPPED

Negative Terminal & Engine Block Positive Battery Terminal & Starter Solenoid

(Continued from previous column)

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

B: ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK OR CRANKS SLOWLY. BUT THE STARTER SOLENOID CLICKS (TABLE 2)

See 2

If both voltages are correct, remove the Starter Assembly for repairs. Refer to Section 6D. 1. Replace Negative Battery Cable. 2. Replace Positive Battery Cable.

B: VOLTS INDICATOR STAYS ON WHEN THE ENGINE IS RUNNING (TABLE 1)

Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: GENERATOR CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Condition: lgnition Switch: RUN Jumper Between

B(BRN)& Ground

Correct Result

nector and go to Step 2. 1. Checklrepair the BRN (25)wire, Indicator Bulb or the Instrument Cluster (Printed Circuit) for an open (see schematic). 2. Insert a screwdriver into the test hole in the rear of the Generator making sure the screwdriver is in contact with the bottom and side of the test hole. Turn the Ignition Switch to RUN. If the VOLTS Indicator lights replace the Regulator. Refer to Section 6D. If the VOLTS Indicator does not light, check the brushes, sliprings and rotor winding for an open. Refer to Section 6D.

For Diagnosis

VOLTS See 1 Indicator lights (Continued in next column)

Disconnect: CONNECTOR At: GENERATOR Condition: Ignition Switch: RUN Action

Correct Result

For Diagnosis

Disconnect VOLTS See 1 Generator Indicator does Connector not light If the result is correct, go to Table 2. 1. Checklrepair the BRN (25) wire, and Instrument Cluster (Printed Circuit) for a short to ground (see schematic).


I&

STARTER AND CHARGING SYSTEM

C: BATTERY IS UNDERCHARGED OR OVERCHARGED (TABLE 1)

(Continued from previous page)


B: VOLTS INDICATOR STAYS ON WHEN THE ENGINE IS RUNNING (TABLE 2) Ignition Switch: RUN

Measure: VOLTAGE At: GENERATOR CONNECTOR (Disconnected)

I

I I

Measure Between

I

I

I

Correct Voltage

Battery

I

I

I

I For Diagnosis

See 1

If the voltage is correct, go to Symptom C: Battery is undercharged or overcharged, table 2.

Measure Between

I

Correct Voltage

I For Diagnosis

Battery

I I

I 1. ChecWrepair RED (2) wires for an open I I (see schematic). I

Measure: VOLTAGE At: GENERATOR Conditions: All accessories turned off Engine running at fast idle

connector and go to Table 2. 1. ChecWrepair the RED (2)wire for an open (see schematic). 2. Checklrepair BRN (25) wire, Indicator Bulb, and Instrument Cluster (Printed Circuit) for an open.

Ground If the voltage is correct, perform a Generator Load Test. Refer to Section 6D. Perform a Battery Load Test if the Generator is good. Refer to Section 6D. 1. Remove Generator for repair. Refer to Section 6D.

STAR#AND

CHARGING SYSTEM

TURBO VIN 7

Disconnect: CONNECTOR At: GENERATOR Condition: lgnition Switch: RUN

CHARGING Diagnostic steps for the symptoms listed in the following table are listed after the table.

VOLTS Disconnect See 1 Generator Indicator does not Light Connector If the result is correct, repairlreplace the Generator. Refer to Section 6D. 1. Checklrepair the BRN (25) wire and Instrument Cluster (Printed Circuit) for a short to ground (see schematic).

A. VOLTS Indicator does not light with the Ignition Switch in RUN and the engine stopped B. VOLTS Indicator stays on when the engine is running C. Battery is undercharged or overcharged

A: VOLTS INDICATOR DOES NOT LIGHT WITH THE IGNITION SWITCH IN RUN AND THE ENGINE STOPPED Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: GENERATOR CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Condition: Ignition Switch: RUN Correct Result

C: BATTERY IS UNDERCHARGED OR OVERCHARGED (TABLE 2) Measure: VOLTAGE At: GENERATOR Conditions: All accessories turned off Engine running at fast idle Measure Between


For Diagnosis

Measure Between

I

L(BRN)& Ground Battery terminal & Ground

I

Battery

I

See 1

Voltaae

I

For Diagnosis

Ground If the voltage is correct, perform a Generator Load Test. Refer to Section 6D. Perform a Battery Load Test if the Generator is good. Refer to Section 6D. 1. Repairlreplace the Generator. Refer to Section 6D. -

For Diagnosis

Voltage

I

Battery

Measure: VOLTAGE At: GENERATOR Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Generator Connector: DISCONNECTED

Volts See 1 Indicator Lights If the result is correct, repairlreplace the Generator. Refer to Section 6D. 1. Checklrepair the BRN (25)wire, Indicator Bulb and the Instrument Cluster (Printed Circuit) for an open (see schematic). (BRN)& Ground

For Diagnosis

Correct Result

Action

SYMPTOM TABLE

Connect Between

(Continued from previous column) If all the voltages are correct, reconnect connector and go to Table 2. 1. Checklrepair the BRN (25)wire, Indicator Bulb, and Instrument Cluster (Printed Circuit) for a open (see schematic). 2. Checklrepair RED (2)wire for an open (see schematic).

B: VOLTS INDICATOR STAYS ON WHEN THE ENGINE IS RUNNING

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

I

Battery (Continued in next column)


STARTER AND CHARGING SYSTEM (Continued from previous page) CIRCUIT OPERATION STARTER

When the Ignition Switch is moved to the START position, battery voltage is applied to the Starter Solenoid. Both solenoid windings are energized. The circuit through the Pull-In Winding is completed to ground through the Starter Motor. The windings work together magnetically to pull in and hold in the Plunger. The Plunger moves the Shift Lever. This action causes the Drive Assembly to rotate as it engages the Flywheel ring gear on the engine. At the same time, the Plunger also closes the solenoid switch contacts in the Starter Solenoid. Full battery voltage is applied directly to the Starter Motor and it cranks the engine. As soon as the solenoid switch contacts close, voltage is no longer applied through the Pull-In Winding, since battery voltage is applied to both ends of the windings. The Hold-In Winding remains energized, and its magnetic field is strong enough to hold the Plunger, Shift Lever, and Drive Assembly solenoid switch contacts in place to continue cranking the engine. When the Ignition Switch is released from t h e START position, battery voltage is removed from the PPL wire and the junction of the"two windings. Voltage is applied from the Motor Contacts through both windings to ground a t the end of the Hold-In Winding. However, the voltage applied to the Pull-In Winding is now opposing the voltage applied when the winding was first energized. The magnetic fields of the Pull-In and Hold-In Windings now oppose one another. This action of the windings, with the help of the Return Spring, Assembly to disengage and causes t-ve

the solenoid switch contacts to open simultaneously. As soon as the contacts open, the starter circuit is turned off.

CIRCUIT OPERATION V6 VIN A, V 8 VIN Y CHARGING

The Generator supplies DC voltage to operate the vehicle's electrical systems and to recharge its Battery. The output of the Generator is controlled by the built-in solid-state Regulator. When the Ignition Switch is first moved to RUN or BULB TEST, before the Engine is started, a small current flows through the VOLTS Indicator, the Generator Field winding, and the Regulator. This current lights the VOLTS Indicator. I t also produces a magnetic field around the field winding. As the engine starts, the rotation of this small field produces a voltage in the Stator. The regulator senses this voltage and takes control of the field current. AC voltage is generated in three Stator windings in the Generator. This is charged to DC by the Rectifier Bridge. This DC output is applied to the Battery and the car's circuits at the BAT terminal of the Generator. A separate output voltage is provided by the Diode Trio to the field winding of the Rotor. In this way, some of the output of the Generator is used to supply its field excitation. The field voltage is also applied to the VOLTS Indicator bulb. This causes the bulb to go out after the engine starts and the Generator is operating. With equal voltage a t both sides of the bulb, the bulb goes out.

The Regulator is connected to the battery voltage a t Terminal A of the Generator. When the Battery is fully charged, its voltage is high. The Regulator then decreases the Generator field excitation. This reduces the output of the Generator to prevent overcharging the Battery. When the Battery has been discharged or is loaded heavily, its voltage is lower. The Regulator senses this and increases the output of the Generator.

CIRCUIT OPERATION TURBO VIN 7 CHARGING

The Generator supplies DC voltage to operate the vehicle's electrical systems and to charge its Battery. The output of the Generator is controlled by the built-in digital Regulator. The digital Regulator directly controls the field with a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM)signal, which is valued in duty cycles. When the Ignition Switch is first turned to RUN, before the engine is started, voltage is applied to the Regulator through the VOLTS Indicator bulb. The Regulator, which is in a field strobe function, applies a small percentage of duty cycle to the field windings to produce a magnetic field. As the Generator RPM increases, the field strobe function is disabled and normal regulation occurs.

y

START R AND CHARGING SYSTEM (Continued from previous page) AC voltage is generated in three Stator Windings in the Generator. This is changed to DC voltage by the Rectifier Bridges. This DC output is applied to the Battery and the vehicle's circuits a t the BAT terminal of the Generator. The battery terminal also supplies voltage to the Regulator for field voltage and voltage monitoring. The Regulator can detect a fault within the Generator and ground the VOLTS Indicator light through a lamp driver. The indicator will light in full brilliance when there is an under or over voltage conditioning, a broken drive belt, an open or shorted field circuit, or an open Regulator.

-

COOLANT FANS: TURBO VIN 7 111

'H I G H SPEED I t COOLANT F A N

8 OK G R N I Y E L

COOLANT F A N TEMPERATURE

450

-

6120

COMPONENT LOCATION


Page-Figure

AIC High Pressure Cut-Out Switch In AIC line, below generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top of brake pedal support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Fan Delay Relay . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment, above wheel well . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Fan Temperature Switch. . LH front of engine, left of throttle body . . . . . . Electronic Control Module (ECM) . RH shroud, near lower access hole . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fusible Link E (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . RH side of engine, near starter solenoid. . . . . . . High Speed Coolant Fan Relay. . . . LH side of engine compartment, above wheel well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Speed Coolant Fan Relay . . . . LH side of engine compartment, above wheel well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Master Brake Relay. . . . . . . LH front of dash, below brake master cylinder . ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . GI20 (VIN 7). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine, on cylinder head. . . . . . . . . . S170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near mass air flow sensor. . . . . S175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near brake master cylinder . . . S180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, under brake master cylinder . . S462 (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near rear of LH valve cover. . .

C 100, See Page 202-0

ELK

C1

WHT 12010649

Brake Switch

Electronic Control Module

I

I

COOLANT FANS: TURBO VIN 7 HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

-

BLK 12015 6 6 4

BLK12034003

Coolant Fan

High Speed Coolant Fan Relay

Low Speed Coolant Fan Relay, See High Speed Coolant Fan

V00025.0

Relay

Coolant Fan Delay Relay

V00026.0 High Pressure Cut-Out Switch

BLK 12015797 Power Master Brake Relay

-

v

COOLA T FANS: TURBO VIN 7 TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

SYSTEM CHECK

Try the following checks before doing the System Check.

Use the System Check Table as a guide t o normal operation.

Check the ECMISOL Fuse by operating Brake lights.

Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of symptoms and diagnostic steps.

operation. Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

SYSTEM CHECK TABLE NORMAL OPERATION

With the engine cold and idling, move the AIC Selector Switch to NORM (if equipped with AIC)

The Coolant Fan turns on

With engine coolant below operating temperature, move the AIC Selector Switch to OFF Run the engine at a fast idle for several minutes

The Coolant Fan turns off

Run the engine for a few more minutes, and then turn the engine off

Diagnostic steps for the symptoms listed in the following table are listed after the table.

SYMPTOM TABLE A. B. C. D.

Go to System Check for a guide to normal

ACTION

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

The Coolant Fan turns on and runs at low speed and then the fan will run at high speed before the Coolant Temperature Indicator in the Instrument Panel comes on or before the Coolant Temperature Gage needle reaches H The Coolant Fan continues to run at high speed until the Coolant Temperature lowers (if equipped with Coolant Fan Delay Relay)

Coolant Fan does not run at Low Speed Coolant Fan does not run at High Speed Coolant Fan does not turn off Coolant Fan does not run for a delay period after the Ignition Switch is turned OFF (engine coolant hot) but Fan does run when the Ignition Switch is in RUN

A: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN AT LOW SPEED (TABLE 1) Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: ALDL CONNECTOR Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN Connect Between


Terminal B & Coolant Fan See 1 Ground runs If the Coolant Fan runs, refer to Section 6E for ECM diagnosis. 1. Go to Al.


I

COOLANT FANS: TURBO VIN 7 (Continued from previous page)

-

Al. With the Ignition Switch in RUN, connect a fused jumper between the DK GRN (535) wire and ground at either the ECM connector C1 terminal D2, or the AIC High Pressure Switch terminal A (see schematic). If the fan does not run, go to Table 2. If the fan runs, replace suspect switch or refer to Section 6E for ECM diagnosis as necssary.

A: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN AT LOW SPEED (TABLE 3) Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: COOLANT FAN RELAY CONNECTOR (Disconnected) 'Onnect

I

Connect Between

1 (RED)& 4 Coolant Fan See 1 (BLKIRED) runs If Coolant Fan runs, replace Coolant Fan Relay. 1. Go to Table 4.

I

A: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN AT LOW SPEED (TABLE 4)

I


Test Lamp 5 (BRN)& See 1 Ground lights 5 (BRN)& 2 Test Lamp See (DKGRN) lights 1 (RED)& Test Lamp See 3 Ground lights If all the results are correct, go to Table 3. 1. Check AIC Fuse and BRN (250)wire for an open. 2. Check DK GRN (535)wire for an open. 3. Check Fusible Link E and RED (2) wire for an open.

I

1

nect a fused jumper between DK GRNIYEL (335)wire and ground at either the Coolant Fan Temperature Switch or the AIC High Pressure Switch terminal B (if equipped). If the fan does not run at high speed, go to Table 1. If the fan does run at high speed, replace the suspect switch.


Between

A: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN AT LOW SPEED (TABLE 2) Connect: TEST LAMP At: LOW SPEED COOLANT FAN RELAY (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Fused ium~erin lace from A1

B:COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN AT HIGH SPEED Turn the Ignition Switch to RUN and con-

1

I

Connect: TEST LAMP At: COOLANT FAN CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Fused jumper connected between terminals 1 (RED) and 4 (BLKIRED)of the Low Speed Coolant Fan Relay Connector and ground. 'OnneCt

Between -

- -

I

Correct Result

I

For Diagnosis

A (BLKIRED) Test Lamp See 1 & Ground lights A (BLKIRED) Test Lamp See 2 & C (BLK) lights If above results are correct, replace the Coolant Fan. 1. Check BLKIRED (532)wire for an open. 2. Check BLK (152)wire for an open.

/

B: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN AT HIGH SPEED (TABLE 2)

B: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN AT HlGH SPEED (TABLE 1)

1

Connect: TEST LAMP At: HlGH SPEED COOLANT FAN RELAY CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Fused ium~erin dace from B1.

Test Lamp lights

5 (BRN)& Ground

1

I


Between

(BRN) & (DK GRNl YEL)

Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: HlGH SPEED COOLANT FAN RELAY CONNECTOR (Disconnected)

1I

Test Lamp lights

See 1

1I

l(REDI& TePgLpp See3 Ground If all above results are correct, go to Table 2. 1. Check AIC Fuse and BRN (250)wire for an open. 2. Check DK GRNIYEL (335) wire for an open. 3. Check Fusible Link E and RED (2) wire for an open.

1

Connect Between

Correct Result

For Diagnosis

Coolant Fan (RED)& See 1 runs a t high (BLKIPNK) speed If the above result is correct, replace the High Speed Coolant Fan Relay. 1. Go to Table 3.

B: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN AT HIGH SPEED (TABLE 3) Connect: TEST LAMP At: COOLANT FAN CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Fused jumper connected between terminals 1 (RED) and 4 (BLKIPNK)of the High Speed Coolant Fan Relay Connector. Connect Between

Correct Result

For Diagnosis

B (BLKIPNK) Test Lamp See 1 lights & Ground B (BLKIPNK) Test Lamp See 2 lights & C (BLK) If all results are correct, replace High Speed Coolant Fan. 1. Check BLKIPNK (533)wire for an open. 2. Check BLK (152)wire for an open.

C: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT TURN OFF 1. Disconnect Coolant Fan Temperature Switch. If Fan stops, replace Coolant Fan Switch.

If Fan does not stop, go to step 2. 2. Disconnect AIC High Pressure Switch (AIC only1. If Fan stops, replace AIC High Pressure Switch. If Fan does not stop, go to step 3. 3. With Ignition Switch off, disconnect High Speed Coolant Fan Relay (if equipped). If Fan stops, replace High Speed Coolant Fan Relay. If Fan does not stop, proceed to Step 4. 4. With Ignition Switch off disconnect Low

Speed Coolant Fan Relay. If Fan stops, go to step 5. If Fan does not stop, replace Coolant Fan Delay Relay. 5. Connect a Test Lamp between terminals 5 (BRN) and 2 (DK GRN) of the Low Speed Coolant Fan Relay Connector. If the test lamp lights, check the DK GRN (535) wire for a short to ground. Refer to Section 6E for ECM diagnosis if wire is OK. If the test lamp does not light, replace the Low Speed Coolant Fan Relay.


COOLANT FANS: TURBO VIN 7

-


D: COOLANT FAN DOES NOT RUN FOR A DELAY PERIOD AFTER THE IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED OFF (ENGINE COOLANT HOT) BUT THE FAN DOES RUN WHEN THE IGNITION SWITCH IS IN RUN

Ignition Switch: RUN

(Continued from previous column) 1. Check Fusible Link E and RED (2) wire for an open. 2. Check BLKIWHT (450)wire for an open. 3. Check PWR BRK Fuse and RED (640) wire for an open. 4. Check DK GRNlYEL (335) wire for an open. If wire is OK, replace Coolant Fan Temperature Switch. 5. Check BLKIPNK (533)wire for an open. 6. Check ECMISOL Fuse and PNKIBLK (339)wire for an open.

I

CIRCUIT OPERATION

C2/A (PNKI T~~~L~~~ See 6 BLK) & lights Ground If all results are correct, replace Coolant Fan Delay Relay. (Continued in next column)

The Coolant Fan is electrically operated and is turned on when the engine coolant becomes hot enough to require cooling. The Low Speed Coolant Fan is controlled by the Low Speed Coolant Fan Relay. This relay is controlled by the ECM and the Low Speed contact of the AIC High Pressure Switch. The High Speed Coolant Fan is controlled by the High Speed Coolant Fan Relay. This Relay is controlled by the Coolant Fan Temperature Switch and the Hi Speed contact of the A/C High Pressure Switch. When any one of these components grounds the coil of one of the relays, that particular fan runs. On all cars, the Coolant Fan Delay Relay operates the Coolant Fan for a short period of time after the engine is turned off. A Solid State timer relay removes the path to ground for the Coolant Fan Delay Relay coil to turn off the fan. Refer to Section 6E for conditions that will cause the ECM to turn the fan ON or OFF.

m

CHOKE HEATER: V 6 VIN A

m-

CHOKE HEATER

1Z

CHOKE HEATER: V6 VIN A HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

C100, See Page 202-0

BLK12004275

Engine Oil Pressure Switch

lnstrument Cluster Connector (Digital)See Page 82-5

lnstrument Cluster Connector (Indicators),See Page 80-6

COMPONENT LOCATION Choke Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil Pressure Switch (VIN A) . Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S203.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page-Figure Top of engine, RH side of throttle body. . . . . . . Lower RH front of engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of I/P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/P harness, above steering column . . . . . . . . . . . .

201- 2-A 201- 0-A 201-12-A 201- 9-B 201-13-B

I

CHOKE HEATER: V6 VIN A TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Try the following checks before doing the System Check.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic steps for the symptoms listed in the following table are listed after the table.

1. Check the CIH Fuse if the OILICHOKE Indicator stays on with the engine running.

2. Check the Gages Fuse and PNKIBLK (239) wire circuit by observing other indicators in the Instrument Panel with the Ignition Switch in RUN, if the OILICHOKE Indicator does not light with the Ignition Switch in RUN and the engine off. Go to System Check for a guide to normal operation. Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

SYSTEM CHECK Use the System Check Table as a guide t o normal operation. Refer t o System Diagnosis for a list of symptoms and diagnostic steps.

SYSTEM CHECK TABLE ACTION

NORMAL RESULT

1. Turn the Ignition Switch to RUN 2. Start the engine

OILICHOKE Indicator lights OILICHOKE Indicator goes OFF

Refer to System Diagnosis when a result is not normal.

A: OILICHOKE INDICATOR IS ON WlTH THE ENGINE RUNNING, OIL PRESSURE IS OK (TABLE 2) Disconnect: CONNECTOR At: CHOKE HEATER Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Engine Oil Pressure Switch Connector (Disconnected1

SYMPTOM TABLE engine running, Oil Pressure is OK B: OILICHOKE Indicator does not light with the Ignition Switch in RUN and the

A: OlLlCHOKE INDICATOR IS ON WlTH THE ENGINE RUNNING, OIL PRESSURE IS OK (TABLE 1) Measure: VOLTAGE At: ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Condition: Measure Between

A (BRNI Battery WHT) & See 1 Ground If the voltage is correct, go to table 2. 1. ChecWrepair BRNIWHT (250) wire and

I

Disconnect

I Correct Result I For Diagnosis I

OILICHOKE Choke Heater Indicator does See 1 connector not light If the result is correct, reconnect the Choke Heater connector and go to table 3. 1. ChecWrepair LT BLU (78) wire, TAN (31) wire and Instrument Cluster Printed Circuit for a short to ground.

-

-

CHOKE HEATER: V6 VIN A A: OILICHOKE INDICATOR IS ON WlTH THE ENGINE RUNNING, OIL PRESSURE IS OK (TABLE 3)

B: OILICHOKE INDICATOR DOES NOT

Measure Between

Correct Result

Measure: VOLTAGE At: ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Condition: lgnition Switch: RUN

For Diagnosis

Engine Oil OILICHOKE Pressure See 1 Indicator Switch lights Connector If the result is correct, replace the Engine Oil Pressure Switch. 1. Go to table 2.

For Diagnosis

B: OILICHOKE INDICATOR DOES NOT LIGHT WlTH THE IGNITION SWITCH IN RUN AND THE ENGINE OFF (TABLE 3)

Disconnect: CONNECTOR At: ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Condition: lgnition Switch: RUN Disconnect

Correct Voltage

Choke Heater Battery See 1 Connector & Ground If the voltage is correct, replace the Choke Heater. 1. Go to table 3.

A (BRN1 WHT) & (LTBLU)' (TAN)

B: OILICHOKE INDICATOR DOES NOT LIGHT WITH THE IGNITION SWITCH IN RUN AND THE ENGINE OFF (TABLE 1)

When starting the engine, the OiUChoke Indicator comes on as a bulb test. The bulb circuit is grounded through the Choke Heater. After the engine starts and the oil pressure comes up above 27 kPa (4 psi) the Engine Oil Pressure Switch closes. This applies battery voltage to the Choke Heater and also to the indicator bulb. The bulb goes out with battery voltage on both sides of it. If the oil pressure drops, the Engine Oil Pressure Switch opens. The OillChoke Indicator lights since one side is again grounded through the Choke Heater.

Measure: VOLTAGE At: CHOKE HEATER CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Condition: lgnition Switch: RUN


OILICHOKE Indicator does not light, CIH See 1 Fuse does not blow If the result is correct, replace the Engine Oil Pressure Switch. 1. Replace Choke Heater.

CIRCUIT OPERATION

LIGHT WlTH THE IGNITION SWITCH IN RUN AND THE ENGINE OFF (TABLE 2)

Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN CIH Fuse OK Connect Between

w

I

Measure Between

I

ILTGround BLU)&

Correct Voltage

Battery

For Diagnosis

I

See 1

If the voltage is correct, checklrepair LT BLU (78)wire for an open. 1. Checklrepair TAN (31) wire, Indicator Bulb, and Instrument Cluster Printed Circuit for an open.

I

u,

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR: OPTICAL TYPE

INSTRUMENT PANEL:

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR BUFFER

Y

~201 -

SEE GROUND DlSTRlBUTlON

b-

o

-

-@

1 BLKNVHT

-v--4

SEE GROUNO DISTRIBUTION

U

I

450

-L

-4

SEE GROUND UISTRI8UTlON

-- 6120

a

a

-

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR: OPTICAL HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Cruise Control Module . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, above accelerator pedal . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Control Module (ECM) . RH shroud, near lower access hole . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Speed Sensor (Optical Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .In back of instrument cluster Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer. . . . . . Behind IIP, left of radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C437 (15 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind RH side of IIP, behind glove box . . . . . . GI20 (VIN 7 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine, on cylinder head. . . . . . . . . . GI20 (VIN A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine, on cylinder head . . . . . . . . . . G120 (VIN Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine, near distributor . . . . . . . . . . S201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above steering column . . . . . . . . . . S219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, behind IIP, above radio. . . . . . . . . . S668 (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near relay bracket . . . . . . . . . . S668 (VIN A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCC harness, near blower motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . S668 (VIN Y ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCC harness, near barometric pressure sensor .

n n

n L r u n run

C1 ELK

Electronic Control Module (ECM) Connector, See Pages 20-6 and 21 -9

BLK 12034125

V00028.0

Cruise Control Module


201-12-A 201-17-B 201-12-A

201-16-A 201-17-B 201- 7-A 201- 1-A 201- 4-A 201-16-A 201-13-B 201-16-A 201- 8-B 201-20-B 201-17-B

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR: OPTICAL TYPE TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Try the following checks before doing the System Diagnosis.

1. Check GAGES Fuse by observing the SER-

VICE ENGINE SOON Indicator with the Ignition Switch in RUN (engine not running). 2. If the Speedometer does not operate, there is a mechanical problem with the Speedometer cable system. See Section 7 of the Service Manual for procedures. 3. Check that ground GI20 is clean and tight.

-

A: VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR BUFFER TEST At: VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR BUFFER (Disconnected)


SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Do the tests listed for your symptom in the Symptom Table below. Tests follow the Symptom Table.

SYMPTOM TABLE SYMPTOM

Speedometer works properly, other speed functions do not work Speedometer a n d Odometer d o n o t workproperly,other speed functions do not work

FOR DIAGNOSIS

Do Test A

See Section 7 of the Service Manual for diagnostic procedures

1. ChecWrepair PNKIBLK (239)wire for an open (see schematic). 2. ChecWrepair BLKIWHT (450)wire for an open (see schematic). 3. ChecWrepair BRN (437)wire for an open (see schematic). Replace Electronic Control Module if the BRN wire is OK. 4. ChecWrepair RED (381) wire for an open (see schematic). Replace Cruise Control Module if the RED wire is OK.

CIRCUIT OPERATION The Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) generates a signal that indicates the speed of the vehicle. This signal is processed by the solid-state Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer to supply inputs to the Electronic Control Module (ECM) and the Cruise Control Module. The Vehicle Speed Sensor is mounted in the back of the Speedometer. The speedometer cable rotates a disk in the Speedometer. The disk has two reflecting surfaces. Light from an infra-red source in the sensor reflects back to a solid-state detector there. As the speedometer cable turns, pulses of light are returned to the detector and electrical pulses are sent by the sensor to the buffer. The frequency of these pulses depends on the speed of the vehicle. As the speed increases, so does the number of voltage pulses produced each second. There are 2000 pulses for each mile that the car travels. The Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer takes the voltage pulses from the sensor, and uses them to close two solid-state switches. Each sensor pulse closes these switches once. The output terminals are switched to ground at a rate that indicates the speed of the vehicle. The output switches in the Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer are solid-state switches, not mechanical ones. Selfpowered test lights or ohmmeters should not be used t o t e s t them. Do not measure t h e resistance at the outputs of the buffer.

CRUISE CONTROL I m

I

Cr3 P 0

BLOCK DETAILS

CRUISE RELEASE

BRAKE PEDAL

rn

rn GI

F

CRUISE CONTROL HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

COMPONENT LOCATION

1

Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Control Module . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Control Servo (VIN 7) . . . . . Cruise Control Servo (VIN A) . . . . .

BLK 12020651 C235

BLK

BLK

Page-Figure Top of brake pedal support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Above rear of engine. near plenum . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. above accelerator pedal . . . . . . . . . . LH front of engine compartment. on inner fender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment. right of brake master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front of engine. right of generator . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upper LH side of steering column . . . . . . . . . . . Top of brake pedal assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cruise Control Servo (VIN Y) . . . . . Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Function Lever . . . . . . . . . . . Vacuum Release Valve . . . . . . . . . . Vacuum Tank (VIN 7) (Electronic AIC Or Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . LH front of engine compartment. below battery Vacuum Tank (VIN A) (With Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH front of engine compartment. on radiator support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vacuum Tank (VIN Y) (With Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH front of engine compartment. below battery Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer . . . . . . Behind IIP. left of radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C235 (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Middle of steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C372 (5 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. near steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . C437 (15 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind RH side of IIP. behind glove box . . . . . . G120 (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine. on cylinder head . . . . . . . . . . G120 (VIN A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine. on cylinder head . . . . . . . . . . G120 (VIN Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine. near distributor . . . . . . . . . . G121 (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH side of inner fender. behind cruise control servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GI21 (VIN A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear of engine compartment. right of cruise control servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G121 (VIN Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front of engine. on generator bracket . . . . . . . . S201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. above radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. above steering column . . . . . . . . . . S205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. above brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S208 (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control engine harness. behind servo . . . S208 (VIN A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control engine harness. left of servo . . . . S208 (VIN Y). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control engine harness. left of servo . . . .

201-12-A 201-18-B 201-12-A 201-18-C 201-18-B 201- 5-B 201-12-A 201-11-C 201-12-A 201-18-D

201-18-B 201-18-D 201-16-A 201-11-C 201-12-A 201-17-B 201- 7-A 201- 1-A 201- 4-A 201-18-C 201-18-A 201- 5-B 201-16-A 201-13-B 201-12-A 201-18-C 201-18-A 201- 5-B

F

CRUISE ONTROL HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

S668 (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near relay bracket . . . . . . . . . . 201- 8-B S668 (VIN A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCC harness, near blower motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-20-B S668 (VIN Y ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCC harness, near barometric pressure sensor . 201-17-B

BLK 12034125

Cruise Control Module

C2 BLK

Instrument Panel

CI

GRY 12020646

Cruise Control Servo

C1

ELK

C2

WHT

V00028.0 BLU12015197

Cruise Release Switch


ELK

SYSTEM CHECK TABLE

TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Try the following checks before doing the System Check.

1. Check Vacuum Hose for leaks, kinks, andlor

restrictions. Also check Cruise Control Servo linkage. Refer to Section 9 for vacuum hose routing and servo linkage adjustments. 2. If the system works except for the Tap-Up and Tap-Down functions, replace the Cruise Control Module. Go to System Check for a guide to normal operation.

ACTION

Drive car faster than 25 mph Turn Cruise Switch ON Depress Set button at the end of the MultiFunction Lever Hold Set button in, foot off accelerator Release Set button Slide Cruise Switch to RIA and hold it there Release Cruise Switch back to ON Tap brake pedal


SYSTEM CHECK (ROAD TEST) Use the System Check Table as a guide to normal operation. Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of symptoms and diagnostic steps.

Slide Cruise Switch momentarily to RIA While cruising, accelerate, then remove foot from accelerator While cruising, tap Cruise Switch to RIA

While cruising, tap Set button

Slide Cruise Switch to OFF

NORMAL RESULT

Cruise Indicator should light Car should maintain speed

Car should coast to a slower speed Cruise Control should engage and hold a slower speed, if the new speed remains above 25 mph Car should accelerate Car should hold new faster speed Car should coast slower Cruise Indicator should go out Cruise Indicator should light Car should accelerate to former set speed Car should coast back to set speed Car speed should increase 1mph for each tap, up to ten taps, then system must be reset to a new speed Car speed decreases 1mph for each tap, until 25 mph is reached when Cruise Control will not operate Cruise Control turns off - Cruise Indicator goes out


(Continued on facin page)

4

-

CRUISE CONTROL (Continued from facing page)

Do not press both the SET and RIA Switches at the same time while the engine is running.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

If the Quick Checker displays a SHORT light, release the switches immediately. Shorts can damage the Quick Checker.

Make each of the measurements listed in the Test Directory in the order shown. Use either a Cruise Control Quick Checker (J-34185, Spemco QC-3 or equivalent) or a Digital Volt-Ohmmeter, but not both. If the response is not correct, go to the Repair Action shown. Repair Actions follow the Test Directory.

TEST DIRECTORY Connect: QUICK CHECKER or VOLT-OHMMETER At: CRUISE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN Test with Quick Checker or Digital Meter

Test

1

Action

Cruise Switch OFF

With Quick Checker, Correct Response

LAMP light on All other Lights off

2

Cruise Switch ON

ONIOFF light on BRK light on VENT light on VAC light on SPS light on RIA light off SC light off

Without Quick Checker, Using a Digital Meter Meter Range

Connector Terminals

200 VDC

B&J A&J M&J A&J G&J C&J K&J F&H M&J L&J

200 VDC 200 VDC 200 VDC 200 VDC 200 ohms 200 ohms 200 ohms 200 VDC 200 VDC

Correct Response

For Different Response, do Repair Action

Battery voltage Q 0 volts A 0 volts Battery voltage B Battery voltage C 30 to 55 ohms D 30 to 55 ohms E 15 to 25 ohms F A 0 volts A 0 volts (Continued on next page)

CRUISE CONTROL W (Continued from previous page)

Action

Test

3 4

Cruise Switch ON, Set Switch pressed Cruise Switch in RIA

SC light on VAC & SHORT lights off ONIOFF light on RIA light on VENT & SHORT lights off

5

6

Cruise Switch ON, drive wheels turned by hand

Run engine for one minute, then turn it off With Ignition Switch in RUN and holding Cruise Switch in RIA, press and release Set Switch Quick Checker not connected

7 8 Quick Checker not connected If all results are correct, do Repair Action P. REPAIR ACTION A: CRUISE SWITCH SHORT

Check for shorts to voltage in the wires to terminals G, A, M and L of the Module (see schematic). If the wires are good, replace the MultiFunction Lever. REPAIR ACTION B: POWER CIRCUIT OPEN

1. Check the Cruise Fuse.

2. Check that terminal J is grounded.

Without Quick Checker, Using a Digital Meter

With Quick Checker, Correct Response

VSS light flashes on and off

Vacuum holds the servo a t wide open throttle position

Meter Range

Connector Terminals

Correct Response

200 VDC 200 ohms

L&J

Battery voltage 30 to 55 ohms

200 VDC 200 VDC 200 ohms

K&J A&J M&J C&J

200 VDC

A&D

Battery voltage Battery voltage 30 to 55 ohms Pulses between approximately battery voltage and less than 7 volts

Connect fused jumper from CtoMandfromKtoL before operating switches 200 ohms 200 ohms

F&J F&H

3. Disconnect connector C235 and check for battery voltage a t terminal A of the socket half with the Ignition in RUN. If battery voltage is missing, checklrepair PNKIBLK (139)wire. 4. Check continuity between terminals A and B of the pin half of connector C235 with the Cruise Switch ON. If the Switch is open, replace the MultiFunction Lever.

-

Vacuum holds the servo a t wide open throttle position Over range 15 to 25 ohms

For Different Response, do Repair Action

G H A I

J K, L

M

N

0

5. Check for an open in GRY (397)wire between terminal I3 of connector C235 and terminal A of the module connector. REPAIR ACTION C: BRAKE CIRCUIT OPEN

1. Check for an open Brake Switch (see sche-

matic). 2. Check for an open in the BRN (86) wire to terminal G of the Module.

(Continued on facin page)

S

-

CRUISE CONTROL I (Continued from facing page) REPAIR ACTION D: VENT CIRCUIT OPEN

If you measured less than 30 ohms, perform Repair Action J. Otherwise, proceed to the following action. Remove the connector from the Cruise Control Servo. Measure the resistance between terminals A and C of the Servo. If it is greater than 55 ohms, replace the Cruise Control Servo. If it is 55 ohms or less, check for an open DK BLU or DK BLUIWHT (403)wire between terminal C of the Module and terminal A of the Cruise Control Servo. Check that terminal C of the Servo connector is grounded (see schematic). REPAIR ACTION E: VAC CIRCUIT OPEN

If you measured less than 30 ohms, perform Repair Action H. Otherwise, proceed to the following action. Remove the connector from the Cruise Control Servo. Measure the resistance between terminals E and C of the Servo. If it is more than 55 ohms, replace the Servo. If it is 55 ohms or less, check for an open in the LT GRN (402)wire between terminal K of the Module and terminal E of the Servo. Check that terminal C of the Servo connector is grounded (see schematic).

Remove the connector from the Cruise Control Servo. Measure the resistance between terminals B and D of the Servo. If it is more that 25 ohms, replace the Cruise Control Servo. If it is 25 ohms or less, check for an open in the LT BLUIBLK (399)wire between terminal H of the Module and terminal D of the Servo. Check for an open in the TAN (398) wire between terminal F of the Module and terminal B of the Servo.

REPAIR ACTION I: RIA CIRCUIT OPEN

Disconnect C235 and check Switch continuity between terminals A and C of the pin half with the Cruise Switch in RIA. If the Switch is open, replace the MultiFunction Lever. If the Switch is not open, check for an open in the GRYIBLK (87)wire between terminal C of connector C235 and terminal M of the Module. REPAIR ACTION J: VENT CIRCUIT SHORT

REPAIR ACTION G: SC CIRCUIT OPEN

Disconnect C235 and check the switch continuity between terminals B and D of the pin half with the Set Switch pressed. If the Switch is open, replace the MultiFunction Lever. If the Switch is not open, check for an open in the DK BLU (84)wire between terminal D of connector C235 and terminal L of the Module. REPAIR ACTION H: VAC CIRCUIT SHORT

Remove the connector from the Cruise Control Servo and measure the resistance between terminals C and E of the Servo. If it is less than 30 ohms, replace the Servo. If it is 30 ohms or more, check for a short to ground in the wire from terminal K of the Module to terminal E of the Servo.

Remove the connector from the Servo and measure resistance between terminals A and C of the Servo. If it is less than 30 ohms, replace the Servo. If it is 30 ohms or more, check for a short, to ground in the wire from terminal C of the Module to terminal A of the Servo. REPAIR ACTION K: VSS CIRCUIT OPEN

If the VSS light does not come on, or the voltage between terminals A and D remains less than 7 volts, check for an open in the RED (381) wire from the Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer. Refer to page 33-0 for diagnosis of the Vehicle Speed Sensor.

REPAIR ACTION F: SPS CIRCUIT OPEN

If you measured less than 15 ohms, perform Repair Action N. Otherwise, proceed to the following action. (Continuedon next page)

CRUISE CONTROL I (Continued from previous page) REPAIR ACTION L: VSS CIRCUIT SHORT

If the VSS light does not go off or battery voltage remains between terminals A and D, check for a short to ground on the RED (381) wire from the Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer. Refer to page 33-0 for diagnosis of the Vehicle Speed Sensor. REPAIR ACTION M: VACUUM SYSTEM

Check for a blocked or leaking Vacuum Source. If the vacuum source is good, plug the Vacuum Release Port and repeat Test 6 of the Test Directory. If the Vacuum now holds the throttle wide open, repair or replace the Vacuum Release Valve or the hose to it. 8 If the test still fails, replace the Cruise Control Servo. REPAIR ACTION N: SPS CIRCUIT SHORT

Disconnect the Cruise Control Servo connector and repeat Test 7 of the Test Directory. If the resistance is now over range, replace the Cruise Control Servo. If the resistance is still low, find and repair the short in the wire from terminal F of the Cruise Control Module to terminal B of the Cruise Control Servo. REPAIR ACTION 0 : SPS SHORT

If all other tests were OK, replace the Cruise Control Servo.

REPAIR ACTION P: CRUISE MODULE

CIRCUIT OPERATION

1. Check the resistance between GlOO and Gl2l. If it is more than 0.1 ohm, clean and tighten both grounds and the negative battery cable. In cases where the ground circuit is suspect, add a ground strap between the engine block and the bulkhead. 2. Connect a new Cruise Control Module and check for normal operation. If the Cruise Control operates normally, leave the new Module in permanently. If the Cruise Control still does not operate normally, refer to the AC Custom Cruise 3 Systems Service Manual for further .diagnostic procedures.

The Cruise Control System operates a mechanical linkage to the throttle by means of a Vacuum Motor. This is a diaphragm moved by a vacuum applied to one side. A solenoid operated valve connects the Vacuum Motor to a Vacuum Tank. Another solenoid valve vents the vacuum to reduce the suction. The Cruise Control Module controls the vaccum motor and the throttle by pulsing these solenoid valves on and off. One input to the Module is the vehicle speed. This input comes from the Vehicle Speed Sensor and Buffer Amplifier. If the actual speed signal is different from the speed that was set into and remembered by the module, the module generates pulses to change the vacuum and return the vehicle to the set speed. Other inputs to the Module are from the Cruise Switch and the Set Switch. A disconnect input to the Module comes from a switch on the brake pedal. A separate vacuum shut-down of the Cruise Control comes from the Vacuum Release Valve on the brake pedal. The two outputs of the Module operate the coils of the Vacuum Valve and the Vent Valve. Both valves are located in the Cruise Control Servo. These valves move the Throttle by means of the Vacuum Motor. The Servo Position Sensor coil senses the position and motion of the Vacuum Motor. I t feeds this information back to the module to provide smooth acceleration while the vehicle is in Cruise Control.

REPAIR ACTION Q: CRUISE INDICATOR OPEN

1. Check the GAGES Fuse.

2. Check the Cruise Indicator bulb. 3. Check the connections and wiring to the indicator for an open. 4. Check that terminal J of the Cruise Control Module connector is grounded.

F

CRUISE ONTROL (Continued from facing page) REPAIR ACTION D: VENT CIRCUIT OPEN

If you measured less than 30 ohms, perform Repair Action J. Otherwise, proceed to the following action. Remove the connector from the Cruise Control Servo. Measure the resistance between terminals A and C of the Servo. If it is greater than 55 ohms, replace the Cruise Control Servo. If it is 55 ohms or less, check for an open DK BLU or DK BLUIWHT (403) wire between terminal C of the Module and terminal A of the Cruise Control Servo. Check that terminal C of the Servo connector is grounded (see schematic). REPAIR ACTION E: VAC CIRCUIT OPEN

If you measured less than 30 ohms, perform Repair Action H. Otherwise, proceed to the following action. Remove the connector from the Cruise Control Servo. Measure the resistance between terminals E and C of the Servo. If it is more than 55 ohms, replace the Servo. If it is 55 ohms or less, check for an open in the LT GRN (402)wire between terminal K of the Module and terminal E of the Servo. Check that terminal C of the Servo connector is grounded (see schematic).

Remove the connector from the Cruise Control Servo. Measure the resistance between terminals B and D of the Servo. If it is more that 25 ohms, replace the Cruise Control Servo. If it is 25 ohms or less, check for an open in the LT BLUIBLK (399)wire between terminal H of the Module and terminal D of the Servo. Check for an open in the TAN (398) wire between terminal F of the Module and terminal B of the Servo.

REPAIR ACTION I: RIA CIRCUIT OPEN

Disconnect C235 and check Switch continuity between terminals A and C of the pin half with the Cruise Switch in RIA. If the Switch is open, replace the MultiFunction Lever. If the Switch is not open, check for an open in the GRYIBLK (87)wire between terminal C of connector C235 and terminal M of the Module. REPAIR ACTION J: VENT CIRCUIT SHORT

REPAIR ACTION G: SC CIRCUIT OPEN

Disconnect C235 and check the switch continuity between terminals B and D of the pin half with the Set Switch pressed. If the Switch is open, replace the MultiFunction Lever. If the Switch is not open, check for an open in the DK BLU (84)wire between terminal D of connector C235 and terminal L of the Module. REPAIR ACTION H: VAC CIRCUIT SHORT

Remove the connector from the Cruise Control Servo and measure the resistance between terminals C and E of the Servo. If it is less than 30 ohms, replace the Servo. If it is 30 ohms or more, check for a short to ground in the wire from terminal K of the Module to terminal E of the Servo.

Remove the connector from the Servo and measure resistance between terminals A and C of the Servo. If it is less than 30 ohms, replace the Servo. If it is 30 ohms or more, check for a short to ground in the wire from terminal C of the Module to terminal A of the Servo. REPAIR ACTION K: VSS CIRCUIT OPEN

If the VSS light does not come on, or the voltage between terminals A and D remains less than 7 volts, check for an open in the RED (381) wire from the Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer. Refer to page 33-0 for diagnosis of the Vehicle Speed Sensor.

REPAIR ACTION F: SPS CIRCUIT OPEN

If you measured less than 15 ohms, perform Repair Action N. Otherwise, proceed to the following action. (Continued on next page)

HORNS

(V8 VIN Y )

SEE POWER DISTRtBUTlON (VIN 7) SEE POWER DISTRIBUTION

V6 VIN A Y8 VlN Y

TURBO Vt@ 7 1 B5w

C m

(V8 VIN Y) SEE POWER DISTRIBUTION ( v i a 7)

3 RED

3 RED 2

TURBO VlN 7

,

V6 VIN A V8 VIN Y

/

~ 2 0 0.

-

S

SEE POWER DISTRIBUTION

E

E

I

POWER DISTRIBUTION CONVENIENCE

I

---------------

I I

I WITHOUT THEFT

I

WITH THEFT

r----

3 DKGRN

29 GRN

2g

L----J -

THEFT DETERRENT RELAY

SLIP RING

.5 BLK

1

28

RH HORN -


C 100, See Page 202-0

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Convenience Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, left of radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fusible Link A (VIN 7 ) . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Fusible Link A (VIN A) . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Fusible Link A (VIN Y). . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Horn BrushISlip Ring. . . . . . . . . . . Under hub of steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft Deterrent Relay. . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, left of steering column. . . . . . . . . . . ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . C104 (11cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attached to RH side of steering column . . . . . . S102 (VIN A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near front of RH valve cover. . S102 (VIN Y). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, rear of LH valve cover. . . . . . . S200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, to left of steering column . . . . . . . .

BLK 1 2 0 0 4 14 7 C104 BLK 1 2 0 3 4 2 9 9 Convenience Center (Horn Relay)

-

BLK8917540 Theft Deterrent Relay

201-15-A 201- 6-B 201- 0-A 201- 5-A 201-11-C 201-11-A 201- 9-B 201-13-A 201- 2-A 201- 2-C 201-13-B

HORNS

-

TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Try the following check before doing the System Diagnosis.

Connect: TEST LAMP At: HORN RELAY CONNECTOR (Disconnected1

If the Horns do not sound at all, check Fusible Link A by operating the Wipers.

Do the tests listed for your symptom in the Symptom Table below. Tests follow the Symptom Table.

SYMPTOM TABLE FOR DIAGNOSIS

Do Test A Do Test B

Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: HORN RELAY CONNECTOR (Disconnected) For Diagnosis

Connect Between

Test Lamp RED (2)& See 1 BLK (28) OFF DK GRN (29) Test Lamp See 2 & Ground OFF If all results are correct, replace the Horn Relay. 1. Check BLK (28)wire and Horn Switch for a short (see schematic). 2. Refer to Cell 133 (Theft Deterrent only).

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

Horns sound continuously None of the Horns sound One of the Horns does not sound

Correct Display

Connect Between


SYMPTOM

B: NONE OF THE HORNS SOUND (TABLE 2)

A: HORN RELAY SHORT TEST

(RED)& lo Horns Sound (DK GRN)

B: NONE OF THE HORNS SOUND (TABLE 3) Connect: TEST LAMP At: HORN CONNECTORS (Disconnected) Condition: Fused Jumper from Table 2 connected Connect Between

At: CONVIENENCE CENTER Conditions: Connect Between

II

I I I

Correct Display

RED@)& Testgnp Ground Horn Switch: ON

I 1 I

For Diagnosis

Seel

RED@)& Tes;pp See2 BLK (28) Ifallresultsarecorrect,gotoTable2. 1. Check the RED (2) wire for an open (see schematic). 2. Check the BLK (28) wire and the Horn Switch for an open (see schematic).

See 1

If the test is good, replace the Horn Relay. 1. Go To Table 3

B: NONE OF THE HORNS SOUND (TABLE 1)

Check the Horn and t h e DK GRN (29) wire for an open (see schematic)


I I I


LH Horn Connector & Lamp ON See 1 Ground RH Horn Connector & See 1 Lamp ON Ground If all the results are correct, replace the suspect Horn(& 1. Check DK GRN (29)wire for an open (see schematic).

CIRCUIT OPERATION When the Horn Switch is depressed, one side of the coil of the Horn Relay is grounded. The Relay is energized. I t contacts close and battery is applied to the Horns.

*

rn

BRAKE WARNING SYSTEM

FUSE BLOCK

"03 .8 PNKIBLK

SEE INSTRUMENT PANEL FOR PIN NORBEUS

1 '--*


El

239

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PRINTED CIRCUIT

BRAK

MARNING SYSTEM



COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Brake Accumulator Pressure Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment, on brake master cylinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . Lower LH rear of engine compartment, on frame rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base of steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . On park brake pedal support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . GI09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear of engine compartment, right of brake master cylinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, left of brake master cylinder . . S203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above steering column . . . . . . . . . . S801. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above fuse block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BLK 12015793

Brake Accumulator Switch

C2 ELK

C1 ELK

C2 ELU

C1 ELK

VOOOI 9.0

VOOOI 7.0

Ignition Switch

Instrument Panel

201- 9-A 201- 9-B 201-12-A 20 1-13-A 201-12-C 201- 9-B 201- 9-A 201- 9-A 201-13-B 201-12-A


.TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Try the following check before doing the Sys-


tern Check. -

Check the Gages ..., Fuse and PNWBLK (239) . . wire by observing other indicators in the Instrument Cluster with the Ignition switch in RUN. Go to System Check for a guide to normal operation. Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

SYSTEM CHECK Use the System Check Table as a guide to normal operation. Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of symptoms and diagnostic steps.


With the Park Brake released, turn the Ignition Switch slowly past the RUN position Release the Ignition Switch to the RUN position With the Ignition Switch in RUN, apply the Park Brake Release the Park Brake

NORMAL RESULT

BRAKE Indicator lights

BRAKE Indicator does not light BRAKE Indicator lights

BRAKE Indicator does not light


SYMPTOM TABLE A. BRAKE Indicator remains on with the Ignition Switch in RUN and the Park Brake off B. BRAKE Indicator does not light at all C. BRAKE Indicator does not operate for one or more warning functions (see sche matic and System Check) but does operate for at least one warning function

A: BRAKE INDICATOR REMAINS ON WITH THE IGNITION SWITCH IN RUN AND THE PARK BRAKE OFF (TABLE 1) At: BRAKE PRESSURE SWITCH Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN Park Brake: OFF Disconnect

I Correct Result I For Diagnosis

Brake BRAKE Pressure Indicator does See 1 Switch not light connector If the result is correct, refer to Section 5 of the Chassis Service Manual to test the Brake Hydraulic System. Replace the Brake Pressure Switch if the Brake Hydraulic System is OK. 1. Go to Table 2 (Turbo Vin 7); Go to Table 3 (Except Turbo Vin 7).

-

-

BRAKE WARNING SYSTEM A: BRAKE INDICATOR REMAINS ON WITH THE IGNITION SWITCH IN RUN AND THE PARK BRAKE OFF (TABLE 2) Disconnect: CONNECTOR At: BRAKE ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE SWITCH Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Park Brake: OFF Disconnect

Correct Result

For Diagnosis

Brake BRAKE Accumulator Indicator does See 1 Pressure not light Switch connector If the result is correct, refer to Section 5 of the Chassis Service Manual to test the Brake Hydraulic System and the Brake Accumulator Pressure Switch. 1. Go toTable3.

A: BRAKE INDICATOR REMAINS ON WITH THE IGNITION SWITCH IN RUN AND THE PARK BRAKE OFF (TABLE 3) Disconnect: CONNECTOR At: PARK BRAKE SWITCH Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Park Brake: OFF Disconnect

Correct Result

For Diagnosis

A: BRAKE INDICATOR REMAINS ON WITH THE IGNITION SWITCH IN RUN AND THE PARK BRAKE OFF (TABLE 4) Measure: RESISTANCE At: IGNITION SWITCH (Disconnected) Condition: lgnition Switch: RUN Correct Resistance

Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: CONNECTOR C l 00 Condition: lgnition Switch: RUN Connect Between

Park Brake BRAKE See 1 Switch Indicator does connector not light If the result is correct, replace the Park Brake Switch. 1. Go to Table 4.

Measure Between

B: BRAKE INDICATOR DOES NOT LIGHT AT ALL

For Diagnosis

See 1 G2 & Ground Infinite Ohms If the result is correct, checklrepair TANI WHT (33) wires and Instrument Cluster Printed Circuit for a short to ground. 1. Replace the Ignition Switch.

Correct Result

For Diagnosis

BRAKE C4 (TAN1 See 1 Indicator WHT) & lights Ground If the result is correct, perform test for Symptom C. 1. Check Indicator bulb, TANIWHT (33) wire(s) and the I n s t r u m e n t Cluster Printed Circuit for an open.

C: BRAKE INDICATOR DOES NOT OPERATE FOR ONE OR MORE WARNING FUNCTIONS (SEE SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM CHECK) BUT DOES OPERATE FOR AT LEAST ONE WARNING FUNCTION Turn the Ignition Switch to RUN. Connect a fused jumper to ground at the connector of the suspect switch. If the BRAKE Indicator comes on, replace the suspect switch. If the BRAKE Indicator doesn't come on, check the TANIWHT (33) wire and associated connector for an open.



CIRCUIT OPERATION Battery voltage is applied to the BRAKE Indicator when the Ignition Switch is in RUN, BULB TEST, or START. Four switches are connected to the BRAKE Indicator. When any one of these switches closes, ground is provided and the Indicator lights. The Ignition Switch provides a ground when it is in the BULB TEST and START positions. The BRAKE Indicator lights. The Park Brake Switch provides a ground when the Park Brake is applied. The BRAKE Indicator lights to alert the driver. The Brake Pressure Switch closes to light the BRAKE Indicator when there is low brake fluid in one of the two hydraulic brake systems. This could be caused by a leak in one of the brake lines. The Fluid Level Switch remains closed so that the Indicator comes on in the event of a hydraulic leak. The switch can be reset to an open condition by refilling the reservoir. This can only be accomplished after the faulty system has been repaired. The Brake Accumulator Pressure Switch (TurboVin 7) closes to ground when the hydraulic pressure in the Power Master Brake System is low. The BRAKE Indicator lights to alert the driver.

POWER MASTER BRAKE SYSTEM: TURBO VIN 7 fa

PUMP MOTOR

-- Gl09

v!

POWER

ASTER BRAKE SYSTEM: 'URBO VIN 7


C 100, See Page 202-0

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Brake Accumulator Pressure Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment, on brake master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Reservoir Pump Motor (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH front of dash, below brake master cylinder. . . Coolant Fan Delay Relay. . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment, above wheel well Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Master Brake Relay . . . . . . . . LH front of dash, below brake master cylinder. . . ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GI09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear of engine compartment, right of brake master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, left of brake master cylinder. . S180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, under brake master cylinder. . S203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . S801. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above fuse block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

201- 9-A 201- 9-A 201- 9-A 201-12-A 201- 9-A 201- 9-B 201- 9-A 201- 9-A 201- 9-A 201-13-B 201-12-A

lnstrument Cluster Connector (Digital), See Page 82-5

BLK 1 2 0 1 5 7 9 7 BLK 1 2 0 1 5 7 9 3

Power Master Brake Relay

Brake Accumulator S w i t c h

lnstrument Cluster Connector (Indicators), See Page 80-6

POWER MASTER BRAKE SYSTEM: TURBO VIN 7 TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Try the following checks before doing the System Check.

1. Check the RLYS Fuse. 2. Check the PWR BRK Fuse.

3. Check the Brake Indicator bulb by turning

the Ignition Switch to BULB TEST.

SYSTEM CHECK

Go to System Check for a guide to normal

Use the System Check Table as a guide to normal operation. Refer to the diagnosis given

operation. Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

if other results occur. Tests follow in System Diagnosis.


With the Ignition Switch OFF, apply and release the Brake several times pedal resistance increases (Park Brake OFF) Turn the Ignition Switch to RUN If all results are normal, the system is OK.

NORMAL RESULT

The BRAKE Indicator Light comes on The BRAKE Reservoir Pump Motor operates The BRAKE Indicator light goes out The Brake Reservoir Pump Motor shuts off

FOR DIAGNOSIS

Do Test A Do Test B Do Test C Do Test D

POWE

#ASTER BRAKE SYSTEM: TURBO VIN 7

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Do the tests below when directed by the System Check

A: BRAKE INDICATOR OPEN CIRCUIT TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: BRAKE ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Park Brake: RELEASED Measure Between

Correct Voltage

For Diagnosis

B (TAN/ WHT) & Battery See 1 Ground B (TANIWHT Battery See 2 & C (BLK) If the voltages are correct, replace the Brake Accumulator Pressure Switch. 1. Check TANIWHT (33) wire for an open (see schematic). 2. Check BLK (150) wire for an open to ground (see schematic).

B: POWER MASTER BRAKE RELAY TEST (TABLE 1) Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: BRAKE ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Power Master Brake System: DEPRESSURIZED (See System Check Table) CAUTION: Do not allow the Brake Pump Motor t o run for more than 20 seconds. Jumper Between

Correct Results

For Diagnosis

Brake

B: POWER MASTER BRAKE RELAY TEST (TABLE 2) Measure: VOLTAGE At: POWER MASTER BRAKE RELAY CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Fused Jumper from Table 1 still connected Measure Between

I

(BRN)& Ground

I

Ground

Pump Motor operates If the result is correct, replace the Brake Accumulator Pressure Switch.

1. 2.

3. 4.

I

I

Correct Voltage

Battery Battery

For Diagnosis

I

I

See 1 See 2

I

I

If all voltages are correct, remove Power Master Brake RelaylBrake Reservoir Pump Motor for repair. Check BRN (250)wire for an open. Check RED (640)wire for an open. Check WHT (641)wire for an open. Check BLK (150) for an open to ground (see schematic).


POWER MASTER BRAKE SYSTEM: TURBO VIN 7

=

D: POWER MASTER BRAKE CIRCUIT TEST


C: BRAKE INDICATOR SHORT CIRCUIT TEST Separate: CONNECTOR At: BRAKE ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE SWITCH Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Park Brake: RELEASED Action

Correct Result

For Diagnosis

Remove Connector

BRAKE Indicator light shuts off

See 1

If the result is correct, refer to Section 5D4 of the Chassis Service Manual for Power Master diagnosis. 1. Check TANIWHT (33)wire for a short to ground. Refer to Brake Warning System for futher diagnosis (see index).

Remove: CONNECTOR At: BRAKE ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE SWITCH Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN Action

Correct Result

For Diagnosis

Brake Reservoir Remove See 1 Pump Motor Connector shuts off If the result is correct, refer to Section 5D4 of the Chassis Service Manual for Power Master diagnosis. 1. Check WHT (641) wire for a short to ground. Remove the Power Master Brake RelayfBrake Reservoir Pump Motor for repair if the WHT (641)wire is OK.

CIRCUIT OPERATION The Power Master Brake System provides proper fluid pressure for the brake fluid accumulator. When t h e b r a k e pedal i s depressed, fluid from the accumulator acts on the booster power piston to apply the master cylinder. With the Ignition Switch in RUN, voltage is applied to the Power Master Brake RelaylPump Motor Assembly. When t h e Brake Accumulator Pressure Switch senses accumulator pressure below 510 psi, switch B closes providing a path to ground for the Power Master Brake Relay. The relay contacts close, and the Brake Reservior Pump Motor operates to increase the accumulator fluid pressure. If the accumulator pressure drops below 400 psi, the Brake Accumulator Pressure Switch (switch A) closes providing a path to ground for the Brake Warning Light. The Brake Warning Light comes on.

HEATER: WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING

SEE FUSE

-1

I BtDCF. DETdlLSl

-

HEATER


I BLK

WHT 08905646

Blower Resistors

I

BLK 12004067

Blower Switch

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Blower Motor (VIN 7 ) . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-19-B Blower Motor (VIN A) (VIN Y). . . . RH rear of engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-20-A Blower Resistors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIC module, left of blower motor . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-19-B Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A C218 (3 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under far RH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-17-A C219 (1cavity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, near control head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-17-A C220 (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment, near blower motor.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-20-A G130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind RH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-20-A

HEATER

-


1. If the Blower Motor does not operate a t all,

check the AIC Fuse. 2. If the Blower Motor does not operate at all, check that G130 is clean and tight. 3. If the Blower Motor does not turn off, install a new Blower Swtich. Go to System Check for a guide to normal operation. Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

SYSTEM CHECK Use the System Check Table as a guide to normal operation. Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of Symptoms and Diagnostic Steps.

-

SYSTEM CHECK TABLE -

ACTION

NORMAL RESULT

1. With the Ignition

Blower Motor does Switch in Run, set not operate. the Blower Switch to OFF. 2. Set the Blower Blower Motor Switch to LO. operates at low speed. Blower Motor 3. Set the Blower operates faster at Switch to MED. Medium speed. 4. Set the Blower Blower Motor Switch to HI. operates faster at High speed. Refer t o System Diagnosis when a result is not normal.

A: BLOWER SWITCH TEST

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Do the tests listed for your symptom in the Symptom Table below.

H CONNECTOR

Tests follow the Symptom Table.


FOR DIAGNOSIS

Blower Motor operates with the Blower Switch in OFF Blower Motor does not operate at all Blower Motor does not operate in HI but operates in LO andl or MED Blower Motor does not operate in LO andlor MED b u t operates in HI

Replace Blower Switch. Test A Do Test C Do Test A check ORN (52) wire for an open (see schematic) Do Test A DoTestB

.

If your symptom does not appear in the Symptom Table perform all of the Tests.

1. Checklrepair BRN (50) wire for an open (see schematic).

--

HEATER

B: BLOWER RESISTORS TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: BLOWER RESISTORS CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN Blower Switch: LO Measure Between

Correct Voltage

C: BLOWER MOTOR TEST R CONNECTOR

Ignition Switch: RUN

For Diagnosis

Battery See 1 Ground Blower Switch: MED A (LT BLU) & Battery See 2 Ground If all results are correct, replace the Blower Resistors. 1. Checklrepair YEL (51) wire for an open (see schematic). 2. Checklrepair LT BLU (72) wire for an open (see schematic).

1. Perform Blower Switch Test. Check1

repair ORN (52)wire for an open if Blower Switch is OK (see schematic). 2. Check BLK (150) wire for an open (see

CIRCUIT OPERATION The Blower Motor delivers air to the interior of the vehicle. Its speed is controlled by the Blower Switch and the Blower Resistors. When the Ignition Switch is in RUN, battery voltage is applied to the Blower Switch. With the Blower Switch in LO, voltage is applied across both Blower Resistors and the Blower Motor. The Blower Motor runs at its slowest speed. With the Blower Switch in MED, one of the Blower Resistors is bypassed and the Blower Motor runs faster. When the Blower Switch is set to HI, battery voltage is applied directly to the Blower Motor, the Blower Motor runs at its fastest speed.

a,

DEFOGGER

Y

3 ORNIBLK

POWER DOOR LOCKS, T H E F T DETERRENT, POWER SEATS

1 clilt4Esd 1 60

.B PNKIBLK

WARNINGS:

39

LIGHTS: INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

PNKIBLK

.35GRY

F

8

B

OEFOGGER CONTROL

OEFOGGER

r GI34

F

DEFOG ER

-


C 100, See Page 202-0

WHT 12020031

Defogger Control

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 9-B C230 (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP, above fuse block . . . . . . . 201-13-C C231(1 cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In LH sail panel, near defogger G104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, to left of steering column. . . . . . . . . 201-15-A G134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Above rear window S213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-16-A

DEFOGGER

-


SYSTEM CHECK


1. Check the PWRIACC Circuit Breaker by operating the Power Seats (if equipped). 2. Check the ST BLTIACC Fuse by operating the Illuminated Entry system.

Use the System Check Table as a guide t o normal operation. Refer t o the diagnosis given if other results occur. Tests follow i n System Diagnosis.

With the Ignition Switch in RUN, depress the Rear Defogger Switch

Depress the Rear Defogger Switch again Turn the Headlight Switch to HEAD or PARK

The switch button returns to the rest position and the ON indicator in the center of the Defogger Control glows The rear window becomes warm The ON Indicator and the Defogger turn off after approximately 10 minutes The ON Indicator and the Defogger turn off after approximately 5 minutes The Panel Light comes on

A: DEFOGGER CONTROL TEST

Measure Between

SYSTEM CHECK TABLE NORMAL RESULT

Do the tests below when directed by the System Check.

Measure: VOLTAGE At: DEFOGGER CONTROL CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Condition: Ignition Switch: RUN

Go t o System Check for a guide t o normal operation.

ACTION

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

FOR DIAGNOSIS OF OTHER RESULTS

Do Test A

Do Test B Replace the Defogger Control

Replace the Defogger Control


F (ORNIBLK) See 1 Battery & Ground D (PNWBLK) Battery See 2 D (PNWBLK) Battery See 3 & C (BLK) If all results are correct, replace the Defogger Control. 1. Check ORNIBLK (60) wire for an open (see schematic). 2. Check PNWBLK (39) wire for an open (see schematic). 3. Check BLK (150) wire for an open to ground (see schematic).

Do Test C

If all results are normal, the system is OK.


--

z DEFOGGER %

Measure: VOLTAGE At: DEFOGGER CONTROL CONNECTOR (Connected) Condition: Headlight Switch: HEAD

B: DEFOGGER TEST (TABLE 1) Measure: VOLTAGE At: DEFOGGER CONTROL CONNECTOR (Connected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Defogger Switch: ON Instrument Panel lights at full brightness Measure Between

'Orrect

Measure Between

'

For Diagnosis

Voltage

Battery See 1 & Ground If the voltage is correct, go to n b l e 2. 1. Replace the Defogger Control.

B: DEFOGGER TEST (TABLE 2) Measure: VOLTAGE At: DEFOGGER CONNECTOR C231 HARNESS HALF (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Defogger Switch: ON Measure Between

(Pzr$

I 'I

Correct ~ohaae

Battery

I I

For Diagnosis

For Diagnosis

If the voltage is correct, repair the Defogger. Refer to section 2 of the Body Service Manual for repair procedures. 1. Check PPL (192) wire and P P L N H T (293) wire for an open (see schematic).

Correct Voltage

For Diagnosis

(GRY) Battery See 1 Ground If the voltage is correct, check bulb. Replace the Defogger Control if the bulb is OK. 1. Check GRY (8) wire for an open (see schematic).

E (PPLNHT)

I I

CIRCUIT OPERATION

C: PANEL LIGHT TEST


I I

With the Ignition Switch in RUN, voltage is applied to the Defogger Control. When the Defogger Control Switch is moved to the ON position, voltage is then applied to the Defogger Timer Relay. The contact closes which provides voltage to the ON Indicator and the Defogger. The rear window will become warm to remove fog from the surface of the window. The contact in the Defogger Control will stay closed until the Defogger Control Switch is turned off, or the timer cycle is complete. The first time the Rear Defogger Switch is pushed in, the Timer-Relay will allow the Defogger to operate 10 minutes. Each time after the Rear Defogger Switch is pushed in, the TimerRelay will allow the Defogger to operate for a maximum of 5 minutes. The Timer-Relay will reset to 10 minutes when the Ignition Switch is turned OFF and then back to the RUN position. The timer also shuts off at any time when the Defogger Control On-Off Switch is depressed OFF. In order to reset the Defogger Timer-Relay for the initial 10 minute time interval, the Ignition Switch must be turned OFF and then back to RUN position before activating the Defogger.

Use the System Check Table as a guide t o normal operation. All of the checks can be performed without the use of tools or disassembly of components. Even though one or more checks may not give the normal result, complete the entire system check t o reveal all symptoms which may exist.

AIR CONDITIONING: C60

-

-

- -

SYSTEM CHECK TABLE

Engine Warm and Running at Idle. Tem~eratureoutside car at 60°F (16°C) or Higher. SET AIC Controls 1. OFF Fan LO 2. Move Temperature lever rapidly back and forth 3. HEATER Temperature lever at HOT

4. Move Fan Switch through MI, M2, to HI 5. DEF

6. VENT

7. BI-LEVEL Set Temperature Lever to "COLD"

8. NORMAL

10. Quickly rotate steering wheel to stop 11. OFF

Refer t o Section

Normal Result

Blower is not running Temperature Door hits stop in each direction Blower runs at low speed Warm air flows from floor outlets Slight air flow at windshield outlets Increased air flow at each step Warm air flows from windshield outlets Compressor turns on and may cycle ON and OFF Engine Idle speed increases Outside air flows from Instrument Panel outlets Com~ressorremains OFF Air flows from Instrument Panel and floor outlets Compressor turns on Engine cooling fan may run Air flow becomes cold Air flows from Instrument Panel outlets Compressor continues to run Blower noise increases as outside air door closes Compressor momentarily turns off Blower and compressor turn off

8A-63 Blower Controls 8A-65 Air Delivery -

-

-

-

-

8A-63 Blower Controls 8A-65 Air Delivery

8A-63 Blower Controls 8A-65 Air Delivery 8A-64 Compressor Controls 6E Driveability and Emissions 8A-65 Air Delivery

8A-65 Air Delivery

I

8A-64 Compressor Controls 8A-31 Cooling Fans 8A-64 Compressor Controls 8A-65 Air Delivery

1

8A-64 Compressor Controls 8A-65 Air Delivery 8A-64 Compressor Controls 8A-63 Blower Controls 8A-64 Compressor Controls

I

-

AIR CONDITIONING: SYSTEM CHECK If all the steps in the previous table can be completed as described, the C60 Air conditioning and heating system is operating normally.

SYSTEM CHECK TABLE

AIR CONDITIONING: C68, ELECTRONIC Conditions: Engine warm and running at idle Temperature outside car at 6 0 O F (16 OC) or higher Set A/C Controls

Normal Result

Refer To Section

1. OFF WARM (Set Temperature)

Blower is not running Temperature display advances one degree at a time to 85 OF

8A-66 Blower Controls 8A-66 Blower Controls

2. HTR

Blower runs and speed increases to maximum Air flows from floor outlets Air flow becomes warm Air flows from windshield outlets AIC compressor turns on

8A-66 Blower Controls 8A-68 Air Delivery and Temperature Controls

3. D E F

4. AUTO

5. LO (Fan) 6. H I (Fan) 7. COOL (Set Temperature)

8. ECON 9. BI-LEV

Compressor turns off Air flows from floor outlets Blower speed reduces to minimum Blower speed increase to maximum Temperature display drops one degree at a time to 65 OF Outside Air Inlet Door closes Air flows from panel outlets Compressor turns on Compressor turns off Outside Air Inlet Door opens Air flows from both panel and floor outlets Compressor turns on

8A-68 Air Delivery and Temperature Controls 8A-67 Compressor Controls 8A-67 Compressor Controls 8A-68 Air Delivery and Temperature Controls 8A-66 Blower Controls 8A-66 Blower Controls 8A-66 Blower Controls 8A-68 Air Delivery and Temperature Controls 8A-68 Air Delivery and Temperature Controls 8A-67 Compressor Controls 8A-67 Compressor Controls 8A-68 Air Delivery and Temperature Controls 8A-68 Air Delivery and Temperature Controls 8A-67 Compressor Controls (SYSTEM CHECK TABLE continued on next page)

:1

AIR CONDITIONING: SYSTEM CHECK

(SYSTEM CHECK TABLE continued from previous page) I

I

10. WARM (Set Temperature to 75 OF) Close car doors and windows

11. Turn Ignition Switch to OFF for several

seconds then return it to RUN 12. R D E F 13. OFF

I

I

Temperature display advances (Stop a t 75 OF) System maintains in-car temperature at approximately 75 OF Blower speed reduces to minimum as temperature nears 75 OF AIC Control Head returns to same setting as before ignition turn-off Rear defrost relay operates and warms rear glass Blower turns off

8A-66 Blower Controls 8A-68 Air Display & Temperature Control 8A-66 Blower Controls 8A-66 Blower Controls 8A-66 Blower Controls 8A-66 Blower Controls

If all the above steps can be completed as described, the C68 electronic Air Conditioning System is operating normally.

AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER CONTROLS C60, MANUAL

mm

gJ CONTROL

g

AIR CONOlTlONlNG COMPRESSOR C O N T R O L S C60. M A N U A L

'L

'L

.8 ORN

52 POWER

3RED

POWER DISTRIBUTION

2 OKBLU I

\

TURBOV~? 3RED

E,

AIR CONDITION COMPRESSOR CONTROLS C60. MANUAL

101

0

150

I

V6 VIM A 2

C n

BLOWER

RELAY -

AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER CONTROLS C60, MANUAL HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Blower Motor (VIN 7 ) . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-19-B Blower Motor (VIN A) (VIN Y). . . . RH rear of engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-20-A Blower Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment, on AIC accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-19-B Blower Resistors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIC module, left of blower motor . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-19-B Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A Fusible Link A (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . 201- 6-B Fusible Link A (VIN A) . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . 201- 0-A Fusible Link A (VIN Y). . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . 201- 5-A C219 (1cavity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, near control head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-17-A C493 (6 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, near middle of radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-15-D C497 (VIN 7) (4 cavities). . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment, near blower motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 7-C C497 (VIN A) (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment, below valve c o v e r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 2-A C497 (VIN Y) (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . Behind RH side of IIP, right of radio . . . . . . . . . 201-16-B GI30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind RH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-20-A S102 (VIN A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near front of RH valve cover . . 201- 2-A S102 (VIN Y). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EEngine harness, rear of LH valve cover. . . . . . 201- 2-C S806 (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIC harness, behind blower motor . . . . . . . . . . . 201-19-B S806 (VIN A) (VIN Y). . . . . . . . . . . AIC harness, forward of blower motor . . . . . . . . 201-19-C BLK

ELK

TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS a

Go t o the AIC System Check i n 8A-62 for a guide t o normal operation. Refer t o the diagnosis if other results occur.

Continued from previous column) No high speed D: Blower Relay Test operation E: Blower Switch Test High speed only D: Blower Relay Test E: Blower Switch Test Blower runs in LO at E: Blower Switch M1 or M2 Test Symptom other than A, B, C, D and E. those listed

Go t o System Diagnosis for blower control diagnostic tests.

A: BLOWER MOTOR TEST

Try the following checks before doing the System Diagnosis

1. Check the A/C Fuse by visual inspection.

2. Check that GI30 is clean and tight. 3. Check that Blower Motor Connectors and Blower Relay are mated correctly and firmly seated. a

a

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS a

Do the Tests listed for your symptom in the Symptom Table below.

a


SYSTEM TABLE SYMPTOM

DO TEST

D: Blower Relay Test B: A/C Mode Selector Test Blower will not run A: Blower Motor in any mode Test B: A/C Mode Selector Test C: Blower Resistors No low speed Test operation (Continued in next column)

Blower runs all the time

B: AIC MODE SELECTOR TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: AIC CONTROL HEAD CONNECTOR (Connected) Conditions: a lgnition Switch: RUN a AIC Mode: OFF

1

Measure: VOLTAGE At: BLOWER MOTOR CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN AIC Mode: VENT Blower Switch: HI

(BRN) & Ground B (BRNI WHT) & Ground

I

'1

Measure Between

Correct Voltage

For Diagnosis

PPL (65)& Ground

Battery

See 1

PPL (65)& See 2 Battery BLK (150) If the voltages are correct but the blower does not run, install a new Blower Motor. 1. Check the PPL (65) wire for an open. If wire is good do Test D and Test E. 2. Check the BLK (150)wire for an open and t h a t GI30 is clean and tight.

I

I

Measure Between

a

Correct Voltage

For Diagnosis

Battery

See 1

0 Volts

See 2

A/C Mode: All ~ositionse x c e ~OFF t

1

I

(&BGround R N ~ ~ H T ) Battery See 3 a If all voltages are correct, AIC Mode Selector is operating normally. Return to Symptom Table. 1. Check BRN (50) wire for an open back to A/C Fuse. 2. Replace A/C Control Head. 3. If battery voltage is present at terminal E but is not present at terminal B, replace the A/C Control Head.

I

(


AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER CONTROLS (Continued from previous column)


(ORN) & Battery See 3 Ground If voltages are correct, proceed to Table 2. 1. Check RED (2) wire for an open back to Fusible Link A. 2. Check DI< BLU (101) wire for an open. If wire is good, do Test C. 3. Check ORN (52) wire for an open. If wire is good do Test E.

C: BLOWER RESISTORS TEST At: BLOWER RESISTORS CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Condition:

1

I

Measure Between

'Orrect

Resistance

I

For Diagnosis

I

1.5+ 1 ohm See 1 A&C 0.72.5 ohm See 1 C&D 0.2k.1 ohm See 1 D&B If resistances are correct, Blower Resistors are operating normally. Return to Symptom Table. 1. Install new Blower Resistors.

1

IC

I ",:t

Measure Between

(RED) & Ground (DK BLU) Ground

I

Battery

1'

Battery

For Diagnosis

I I I

See 1

1

See 2

Measure: VOLTAGE At: BLOWER RESISTOR CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN A/C Mode: VENT Blower Switch: LO

I

D: BLOWER RELAY TEST (TABLE 21

D: BLOWER RELAY TEST (TABLE 1) Measure: VOLTAGE At: BLOWER RELAY CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN A/C Mode: VENT Blower Switch: HI

E: BLOWER SWITCH TEST (TABLE 1)

I


Measure: RESISTANCE At: BLOWER RELAY CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: OFF Negative Battery Terminal Disconnected

I 'I

Measure Between

'Orrect

Resistance

I

I

For Diagnosis

(BLK) 0 ohms See 1 Ground Less than 3 A (PPL) & See 2 Ground ohms If voltages in Table 1 and resistances in Table 2 are correct, but Blower Relay does not operate, replace the Blower Relay. 1. Check the BLK (150) wire for an open. 2. Check the P P L (65) wire for an open. If wire is good, recheck measurements made in Test A.

I

Measure Between

I

Correct Voltage

A (BRN) Battery Ground C (TAN) & 0 Volts Ground Blower Switch: M1 (TAN) Ground

For Diagnosis

I

Battery

See 1

I

See 2

I See 3 & 5 i

I ID (gz) I I I Blower Switch: M2 &

Battery

See 4 & 5

1

If all voltages are correct go to Table 2. 1. Check BRN (64) wire for an open. If wire is good do Test R. 2. If battery voltage is present, check for a wire to wire short to voltage. If wire is good, replace the Blower Switch.

-


rn

AIR CO

ITIONING: BLOWER CONTROLS CIRCUIT OPERATION


The Blower Motor speed is controlled by the Blower Switch in the A/C Control Head. With the switch in the LO position all of the blower resistors are in the circuit with the motor so that it runs slowly. In the M1 and M2 position the Blower Switch bypasses some of the resistors, increasing the motor speed. The Blower Motor is fed through the contacts of the Blower Relay. When the Blower Switch is in the H I position, battery voltage is supplied through the ORN wire to the coil of the Blower Relay. The relay is energized and its contacts supply battery voltage directly to the Blower Motor from Fusible Link A. When the Mode Selector is in the OFF position, no voltage is applied to the Blower Switch and motor so the blower does not run. In all other positions the blower will operate a s described.

3. Check TAN (63) wire for an open. 4. Check LT BLU (72) wire for an open. 5. If voltage is present at terminal A but is not present at either terminal C or D, check the BRNtWHT (64) wire for an open between the A/C Control Head terminal B and the Blower Switch terminal D.

E: BLOWER SWITCH TEST (TABLE 2) Measure: VOLTAGE At: BLOWER RELAY CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN AIC Mode: VENT Blower Switch: M 2 Correct Voltage

Measure Between

1

I

1

Blower Switch: H I

For Diagnosis

I

E (ORN) & Battery See 2 Ground If voltages are correct, Blower Switch is operating normally. Return to Symptom Table. 1. Check ORN (52) wire for an open or wire to wire short to voltage. If wire is good, replace the Blower Switch. 2. Check ORN (52) wire for an open. If wire is good, replace the Blower Switch.

I

/

AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS m

C60, MANUAL, V6 VIN A, TURBO VIN 7

-

A/C CONTROL HEAD

C60, MANUAL

TURBO VIN 7

V§ V1#

4

HIGH PRESSURE

CUTOUT SWITCH

.BBLK S170

1'

152

-- GI20

COOLANT FAN

AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER CONTROLS C60. MANUAL

1

m

AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS C60, MANUAL, V8 VIN Y

TRUNK/ TAILGATE RELEASE

yJ CONTROL

HEAO

AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER CONTROLS CGO, MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER CONTROLS C60, MANUAL

I

rn

AIR CO

ITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS

C60, MANUAL HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES C100, See Page 202-0

BLK

ELK

V 0 3 0 0 1.2

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

LH front of engine, part of AIC compressor. . . . 201- 7-B RH front of engine, part of AIC compressor. . . . 201- 2-A RH front of engine, part of AIC compressor. . . . 201- 5-C On RH front fender, above wheel well . . . . . . . . 201- 8-C RH rear of engine compartment, below AIC Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201- 3-C AIC High Pressure Cut-Out Switch In AIC line, below generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 8-A Brake Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top of brake pedal support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A Diode (AIC Clutch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Taped inside AIC compressor clutch connector Electronic Control Module (ECM) . RH shroud, near lower access hole. . . . . . . . . . . 201-17-B Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A Pressure Cycling Switch (VIN 7) . . RH rear of engine compartment, on AIC accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-19-B Pressure Cycling Switch (VIN A) (VIN Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment, on AIC accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-19-C ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 9-B C219 (1cavity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, near control head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-17-A C493 (6 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, near middle of radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-15-D C497 (VIN 7) (4 cavities). . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment, near blower motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201- 7-C C497 (VIN A) (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment, below valve cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 2-A C661 (VIN A) (1cavity). . . . . . . . . . RH side of engine, behind AIC compressor . . . . 201- 2-A C661 (VIN Y) ( 3 cavities) . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment, above valve c o v e r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 4-A G120 (VIN 7 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine, on cylinder head. . . . . . . . . . 201- 7-A G130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind RH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-20-A S101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 2-A S107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near AlC cut-out relay . . . . . . . 201- 5-C S112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near rear of RH cylinder head . 201- 7-A S170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near mass air flow sensor. . . . . 201-10-A S806 (VIN A) (VIN Y). . . . . . . . . . . A/C harness, forward of blower motor . . . . . . . . 201-19-C AIC Compressor Clutch (VIN 7) . . . AIC Compressor Clutch (VIN A). . . AIC Compressor Clutch (VIN Y). . . AIC Cut-Out Relay (VIN 7 ) . . . . . . . AIC Cut-Out Relay (VIN Y) . . . . . .

AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS C60, MANUAL

INFORMATION ON AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS IS CONTINUED ON THE FOLLOWING PAGE (8A-64-5)

. I

AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Try the following checks before doing the System Check.

1. Check the A/C Fuse by visual inspection. 2. Check that A/C Compressor Clutch Connector is firmly seated.


1.Turn Ignition Switch to RUN and start engine

Put A/C Mode Selector to OFF then to MAX 2. Move Mode Selector between OFF and MAX several times

3. Check that ground GI20 (or G130) is clean and tight. Go t o System Check for a guide t o normal compressor control operation. Go t o System Diagnosis for Compressor Controls diagnostic tests.

3. Put Mode Selector in MAX to engage clutch

SYSTEM CHECK Complete the A/C System Check in 8A-62 as a guide t o normal operation of the entire A/C System. Refer t o the diagnosis given if other results occur. Tests for Compressor Controls follow in System Diagnosis.

4. Turn off ignition Check refrigerant charge according to procedure in Section 1B

EXPECTED RESULT

A click can be heard when clutch engages. Verify that clutch engages in MAX position Clutch plate movement can be seen on the front of the compressor pulley. If clutch does not engage proceed to step 4. If clutch operates as expected continue to step 3. Check that air from coolant fan can move freely through condenser. Feel the input (cool)and output (warm)pipes to the AIC Compressor. If there is not a wide temperature difference after the compressor has run for several seconds, see Section 1B for refrigerant and compressor diagnostics. If refrigerant charge is low, follow procedures in Section 1B for refrigerant diagnosis. If refrigerant charge is normal, isolate conditions using the procedures which follow in System Diagnosis. (Continued on next page)

AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS

ISOLATION TEST (TABLE 2)


SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: AIC Cutout Relay (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN (Engine need not be running) AIC Mode: NORM Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16°C)

TURBO VIN 7 Use t h e Isolation Test below t o choose the proper diagnostic test. Tests follow the Isolation Test.

ISOLATION TEST (TABLE 1) Measure: VOLTAGE At: AIC CUTOUT RELAY (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN (Engine need not be running) A/C Mode: NORM Temperature Outside Car: Above 60" F (16°C) Measure Between

1

C (PNKIBLK) & Ground

1

Jumper Between

Correct Action

B (DK GRN) & Clutch engages D (LT BLU)

Correct Voltage

For Diagnosis

Battery

Check ECM-SOL Fuse and PNKI BLK (339) wire for a n open.

Battery

1.Check LT BLU (67) wire for an open back to Pressure Cycling Switch. 2. Check that Pressure Cycling Switch is closed. If switch is open refer to Section 1for procedure to check for low refrigerant pressure. If refrigerant pressure is normal replace the Pressure Cycling Switch 3. Do Test C.

If voltages are correct, leave AIC Cutout Relay disconnected and go t o Table 2.

I

1

For Diagnosis

Do Test B

1 I

If action is correct, do Test A.

A: ECM COMPRESSOR CONTROL TEST (TABLE 1) Measure: VOLTAGE Less than 1 At: ECM (Disconnected) Volt Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN (Engine not running) AIC Mode: NORM AIC Cutout Relay Reconnected Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (ISOC) Measure Between

Correct Voltage

For Diagnosis

B8 on Conn C2 (LT BLU) & Ground

Battery

See 1

A2 on Conn C2 (DK GRNIYEL) & Ground

Battery

See 2

A: ECM COMPRESSOR CONTROL TEST (TABLE 1)(Continued on facing page)

l!! ITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS

z

II

AIR CO

A: ECM COMPRESSOR CONTROL TEST (TABLE 1)(Continued from facing page) If voltages are correct, proceed to G b l e 2. 1. Check for an open in the LT BLU (67) wire. 2. Check for a n open in the DK GRNIYEL wire (959). If wire is good, replace A/C Cutout Relay.

B: AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH TEST

C: AIC COMPRESSOR FUNCTION CONTROL TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: A/C CONTROL HEAD Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN A/C Mode: NORM Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16' C)

(Disconnected)

Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F

A: ECM COMPRESSOR CONTROL TEST (TABLE 2)

Measure Between

Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: ECM (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN (Engine not running) A/C Mode: NORM Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16°C)

(BRN) Ground C (LT GRN) & Ground

Jumper Between

Correct Action

A2 on Conn C2 A/C Cutout (DK GRNI Relay operates YEL) and and AIC Clutch engages Ground

For Diagnosis

See 1

If action is correct but A/C system does not operate normally, condition is due to ECM. Refer to Section 6E for ECM diagnostics. 1. Replace A/C Cutout Relay.

For Diagnosis

Correct Voltage

I

I

I

Battery

Battery

I

See 1 Replace A/C Control Head

I

If voltages are correct, check for a n open in the LT GRN (66) wire. 1. Check for an open AIC Fuse or open BRN (50) wire. engage, replace the Compressor Clutch. 1. Check for an open in the DK GRN (59) wire. 2. Check for an open in the BLK (151) wire and BLK (152) wire to ground. The High

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS V6 VIN A Use the Isolation Tests below t o choose the proper diagnostic test. Tests follow the Isolation Tests.


I

AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS A: N C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH TEST



Measure: VOLTAGE At: COMPRESSOR CLUTCH (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN (Engine not running) A/C Mode: NORM Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (6°C) I

Measure: VOLTAGE At: PRESSURE CYCLING SWITCH CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN (Engine need not be running) A/C Mode: NORM Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16°C) Measure Between

I 1

I (Ez) a1 A

Correct Voltage

Battery

1

I

For Diagnosis

Do Test B

(

If voltage is correct, leave Pressure Cycling Switch disconnected and go to Table 2.

Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: PRESSURE CYCLING SWITCH CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN (Engine need not be running) A/C Mode: NORM Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16°C) Jumper Between

I I

Correct Action

A (LT GRN) Clutch engages B (DK GRN)

(

I

For Diagnosis

Do Test A

If action is correct, refer to Section 1B for procedure to check refrigerant pressure. If refrigerant pressure is normal, replace the Pressure Cycling Switch.

Correct Voltage

For Diagnosis

A (DK GRN) & Ground

Battery

See 1

A (DK GRN) &. B (BLK)

Measure: VOLTAGE At: A/C CONTROL HEAD Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN A/C Mode: NORM Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16°C)

(

Measure Between

1 1

Correct Voltage

I EgE)d& /

Battery

Battery

See 2

If voltages are correct but clutch does not engage, replace the Compressor Clutch. 1. Check for an open in the DK GRN (59) wire. 2. Check for an open in the BLK (151) wire.


I I

Measure Between

B: N C COMPRESSOR FUNCTION CONTROL TEST

C (LT GRN) & Ground

Battery

I

For Diagnosis

(

I

See 1

I

1

Replace A/C Control Head

If voltages are correct, check for a n open in the LT GRN (60) wire. 1. Check for a n open A/C Fuse or open BRN (50) wire.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS V8 VIN Y Use the Isolation Tests below t o choose the proper diagnostic tests. Tests follow the Isolation Tests.

I I



Measure: VOLTAGE At: A/C CUTOUT RELAY (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN (Engine need not be running) A/C Mode: NORM Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16°C)

I

1 1

Measure Between

Correct Voltage

/ (gz) I I (Ez)I A

(

I

&

Battery

I

&

Battery

(

For Diagnosis

See 1 See 1

If voltages are correct, have A/C Cutout Relay disconnected and go to Table 2. 1. If voltage is incorrect at only one terminal, check for a n open in the LT GRN (66) wire to the terminal affected. If voltage is incorrect at both terminals do Test C.

Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: A/C CUTOUT RELAY (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN (Engine need not be running) A/C Mode: NORM Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16°C)

I

1 I

(Continued from ~ r e v i o u scolumn)

Jumper Between

I

Correct Action

B (LT GRN) & D (LT GRNI Clutch engages BLK)

If voltages are correct, check that A/C Compressor Clutch is engaged. If it is, proceed to Table 2. If clutch is not engaged, replace A/C Cutout Relay. 1. Check for a n open in the LT GRN (66) wire. 2. Check for an open in the BRN (449) wire. If the wire is good, replace A/C Cutout Relay.

For Diagnosis

A: ECM COMPRESSOR CONTROL TEST (TABLE 2)

Do Test B

I

If action is correct do Test A.

A: ECM COMPRESSOR CONTROL TEST (TABLE 1) Measure: VOLTAGE At: ECM (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN (Engine not running) A/C Mode: NORM Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16°C) A/C Cutout Relav reconnected

1

Measure Between

Correct Voltage

For Diagnosis

J on Conn C2 (LT GRN)

Battery

See 1

Battery

See 2

& Ground 19 on Conn C1 (BRN) & Ground


Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: ECM (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN (Engine not running) A/C Mode: NORM Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16°C) Jumper Between

Correct Action

19 on Conn C1 A/C Cutout (BRN) & Relay operates Ground and disengages A/C Compressor Clutch

For Diagnosis

See 1

If action is correct but the Compressor Clutch does not operate normally, condition is due to ECM. Refer to Section 6E for ECM diagnostic procedures. 1. Replace the A/C Cutout Relay (Continued on next page)

AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS (Continued from previous page)

B: N C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: COMPRESSOR CLUTCH (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN (Engine not running) A/C Mode: NORM Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (1soC) A/C Cutout Relay disconnected A/C Cutout Relay Terminals B and D ium~ered Measure Between

Correct Voltage

For Diagnosis

A (LT GRNI BLK) & Ground

Battery

See 1

A (LT GRNI BLK) & B (BLK)

Battery

See 2

If voltages are correct but clutch does not engage, replace the Compressor Clutch. 1. Check for an open in the LT GRNIBLK wire (966). 2. Check for an open in the BLK (152) wire and BLK (150)wire to ground. The Pressure Cycling Switch should be closed. If the Pressure Cycling Switch is open, check for low refrigerant charge according to procedures in Section 1B. If refrigerant charge is normal, replace the Pressure Cycling Switch.

=

C: N C COMPRESSOR FUNCTION CONTROL TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: AIC CONTROL HEAD Conditions: Ignition Switch: Run A/C Mode: NORM Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (1soC) Measure Between

Correct Voltage

For Diagnosis

E (BRN) & Ground

Battery

See 1

C (LT GRN) Ground

Battery

Replace A/C Control Head

If voltages are correct, check for an open in the LT GRN (66) wire. 1. Check for an open A/C Fuse or open BRN (50) wire.

CIRCUIT OPERATION The compressor for the air conditioning system is belt driven by the engine through the Compressor Clutch. The clutch allows the compressor to be disengaged when air conditioning is not required or to remove the air conditioning load from the engine when needed. Operation of the compressor depends on the particular A/C mode selected by the driver. When the A/C Mode Selector Switch is in MAX, NORM, BI-LEVEL or DEF, battery voltage is applied through the A/C Fuse and A/C Control Head Selector Switch.

TURBO VIN 7

From the A/C Control Head voltage is applied to the A/C Cutout Relay through the Pressure Cycling Switch which is normally closed. The Pressure Cycling Switch opens when refrigerant pressure drops below 172 kPa (25 psi). It closes again when refrigerant pressure rises enough so that additional cooling is required. This action causes A/C Compressor to cycle on and off so that the evaporator temperature does not drop low enough to cause icing. The A/C Cutout Relay is operated by the ECM. When the ECM receives the A/C ON input at Terminal B8, it grounds Terminal A2 energizing the A/C Cutout Relay. When the relay is energized, voltage is applied to the A/C Compressor Clutch through the contacts of the relay and the normally closed contact of the High Pressure Cutout Switch. If the ECM determines that engine load should be reduced such as during full throttle, the A/C Cutout Relay is de-energized to remove voltage from the compressor clutch thus removing the air conditioning load from the engine. The normally closed A/C High Pressure Cutout Switch opens if refrigerant pressure becomes too high for normal operation. V6 VIN A

From the A/C Control Head voltage is applied to the A/C Compressor Clutch through the Pressure Cycling Switch. The Pressure Cycling Switch is normally closed but opens when refrigerant pressure drops below 172 kPa (25 psi). It closes again when refrigerant pressure rises enough so that additional cooling is required. This action causes the A/C Compressor to cycle on and off so that the evaporator temperature does not drop low enough to causing icing. L

When voltage is applied to the compressor clutch it is also applied to the ECM at Terminal J on Connector C2. The ECM will then increase the engine idle speed while t h e A/C Compressor Clutch is engaged. V8 VIN Y

From the A/C Control Head, voltage is applied to the A/C Cutout Relay and Terminal B8 on Connector C2 of the ECM. The ECM will then increase the engine idle speed to compensate for the additional load of the A/C Compressor. Battery voltage at the A/C Cutout Relay is applied to the A/C Compressor Clutch through the normally closed contacts of the A/C Cutout Relay to ground through the normally closed Pressure Cycling Switch. The Pressure Cycling Switch opens when refrigerant pressure drops below 172 kPa (25 psi). It closes again when refrigerant pressure rises enough so that additional cooling is required. This action causes the A/C Compressor to cycle on and off so that evaporator temperature does not drop low enough to cause icing.

If the ECM determines that the engine load should be reduced, such as during wide open throttle, the A/C Cutoff Relay is energized which opens the relay contacts removing voltage from the A/C Compressor Clutch.

b

AIR CONDITIONING: AIR DELIVERY CONTROLS C60, MANUAL TO ENGINE VACUUM SOURCE

AIC CONTROL VACUUMVALVE SEQUENCE CHART 1

OFF

2

MAX

3

NORMAL

4

BLLEVEL

5

VENT

6

HEATER

7

DEFROST

-

w

i

BLACK VACUUM T A N K

VACUUM

EE

CONNECTOR

1 - 1

'

CHECKVALVE IN TANK

a

TEMPERATURE

I LEVER V A L V E

-

C60, MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Try the following checks before doing the System Diagnosis.

1. If air flow does not come from the proper

outlets under one or more operating modes, at least one of the air doors is not moving to the proper position. Check for manifold vacuum to the vacuum tank at the BLACK hose from the engine. If a vacuum is not present, check the hose back to the engine vacuum source. If a vacuum is present at the vacuum tank, check for a vacuum at the VIOLET hose at the A/C Control Head. If there is no vacuum, check the VIOLET hose. If the hose is OK, replace the Vacuum Tank. 2. Check the operation of the Temperature Door by moving the Temperature Lever rapidly back and forth several times. Listen for the door to strike the stop at each end of its travel. If the sound indicates that the door is not fully closing or opening, check the mechanical linkage between the door and the Temperature Lever.

-

-

AIR CONDITIONING: AIR DELIVERY CONTROLS

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Bi-Directional Lower & Upper Mode Vacuum Motor . . . . . . . . . . LH side of AIC module Heater Water Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear part of engine, on heater line hose . . . . 201-18-E Heater Water Valve Vacuum Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RH rear of engine compartment, under heater h o s e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-18-E RecirculatinglOutside Air Vacuum Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under IIP, top RH side of AIC module Temperature Lever Valve. . . . . . . . LH rear of AIC control head Upper Mode Vacuum Motor. . . . . . Behind IIP, on RH front of AIC plenum Vacuum Line Connector . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, near center of AIC plenum. . . . . . . . 201-19-D Vacuum Tank (VIN 7) (Manual AIC, Without Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment, ahead of blower motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-19-B Vacuum Tank (VIN A) (VIN Y) (Without Cruise Control). . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment, ahead of blower motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-19-C

AIR DOOR POSITIONS

CIRCUIT OPERATION

Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN (Engine Running) Blower Switch: HI

Go to the A/C System Check in 8A-62 for a guide to normal operation and diagnostic references. a

Go to System Diagnosis to isolate Air Delivery conditions.

MAX

B

A

B

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Check the operation of the air doors using the following chart. Put Blower Switch in HI for strong air flow.

VENT HEATER DEF

B A A

C A

A A

Detailed tests of the A/C Vacuum Systems are given in Section IB.

The air doors and vents in the air conditioning system are operated by mechanical and vacuum controls. There are no electrical circuits. The functions of the air doors, Heater Water Valve, and A/C Evaporator Core are described below. Temperature Door

The Temperature Door is controlled by the temperature selector in the A/C Control Hezd. With the selector in COLD, the door is in the COOL position. This prevents air from blowing across the Heater Core. With the selector in any position but COLD, the Temperature Door is open. According to the selector position, some or all of the air blows across the Heater Core.

AIR CONDITIONING: AIR DELIVERY CONTROLS C60, MANUAL Heater Water Valve

Recirculating/Outside Air Door

The Heater Water Valve is controlled by the Heater Water Valve Vacuum Motor. With the temperature selector in COLD, the Temperature Lever Valve closes and connects the PURPLE hose to the WHITE hose. This applies vacuum from the Vacuum Tank to the motor. The motor operates, closing the valve. The closed valve blocks hot water from flowing to the Heater Core.

T h e Recirculating/Outside Air Vacuum Motor has no vacuum applied for any Selector Switch position except MAX (position 2). The motor bellows are expanded. When the Mode Selector is moved to MAX, vacuum is applied to the Recirculating/Outside Air Vacuum Motor. The bellows are drawn in and the door is moved to position B. Air from inside the car is pulled into the plenum.

HeatlDefrost Door

With the Selector Switch in Bi-Level (position 4), no vaccum is applied to either side of t h e Bi-Directional Lower Mode Vacuum Motor. Both bellows extend part way. The Heat/Defrost Door moves to position B. Part of the air flows out of the Heat Outlets. The rest of the air flows out the A/C Outlets. A/C Defrost Door

The A/C Defrost Door is controlled by the Upper Mode Vacuum Motor. With the Selector Switch is any position but HEATER and DEF (position 6 and 7), vacuum is applied to the motor. The bellows contracts and the A/C Defrost Door is pulled to position B. All air flows out the A/C Outlets. No vacuum is applied to the A/C Defrost Vacuum Motor with the Selector Switch in DEF or HEATER. The bellows extends and the A/C Defrost Door moves to position A. All air passes out the Defrost Outlets.

AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER CONTROLS

h

@

HI

AUTO

e3 *

.................. 1+ w 65

ELECTRONIC TOUCH CLIMATE CONTROL 70 75 80

85

WARMER

COOLER

J

@

HEATER

ECON

AUTO -

BI L E V E L

-

-

DEF

-

I

OFF

@

AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER CONTROLS m

-4

SEE FUSE BLOCK D E T A I L S

-

A/C CONTROL HEAD SOLID STATE 0 0 NOT MEASURE RESISTANCE

AIR D E L I V E R Y A N D TEMPERATURE C68, ELECTRONIC AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS C68, ELECTRONIC

b-•

AIR CONDITI0NING:BLOWER CONTROLS C68. ELECTRONIC HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

COMPONENT LOCATION AIC Compressor Clutch (VIN 7) . . . AIC Compressor Clutch (VIN A). . . AIC Compressor Clutch (VIN Y). . . Ambient Sensor (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . .

) I I

Ambient Sensor (VIN A) (VIN Y). .

BLK

BLK

V04000.0 C497

BLK 12010717

C661

Page-Figure LH front of engine. part of AIC compressor . . . . RH front of engine. part of AIC compressor . . . . RH front of engine. part of AIC compressor . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. right of blower motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. above blower motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Blower and AIC Clutch Control Module (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. left of blower motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blower and AIC Clutch Control Module (VIN A)(VIN Y) . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. left of blower motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blower Motor (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blower Motor (VIN A) (VIN Y). . . . RH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Control Module (ECM) . RH shroud. near lower access hole . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fusible Link A (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Fusible Link A (VIN A) . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Fusible Link A (VIN Y). . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . In-Car Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top of IIP. in RH speaker grill assembly . . . . . . Radio Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower LH corner of fuse block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C219 (1cavity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. near control head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C369 (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. near RH shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C497 (VIN 7) (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. near blower motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C497 (VIN A) (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. below valve cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C497 (VIN Y) (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . Behind RH side of IIP. right of radio . . . . . . . . . C661 (VIN Y) ( 3 cavities) . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. above valve cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C892 (15 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. center of glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GI07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Below RH side of IIP. near shroud . . . . . . . . . . . G130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On RH front fender. near blower motor . . . . . . . S103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIC harness. behind glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. above steering column . . . . . . . . . .

201- 7-B 201- 2-A 201- 5-C 201-19-A 201-19-C

201-19-A

201-19-C 201-19-B 201-20-A 201-17-B 201-12-A 201- 6-B 201- 0-A 201- 5-A 201-15-C 201-13-C 201-17-A 201-16-C 201- 7-C 201- 2-A 201-16-B 201- 4-A 201-17-A 201-17-A 201-19-C 201-17-A 201-15-A

-

w

AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER CONTROLS C68, ELECTRONIC HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

BLK

-

I

AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER CONTROLS C68, ELECTRONIC TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

A: BLOWER MOTOR TEST -

1. Check the A/C Fuse and CIG-CLK Fuse by visual inspection.

2. Check that GI07 and GI30 are clean and tight. 3. Check that Blower Motor connectors are mated correctly and h l y seated.


Measure Between

I ELyfit (

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS


SYSTEM TABLE

speed only

Battery

-

I

See 2

1

-

If the voltages are correct but the blower does not run, install a new Blower Motor 1. Check the P P L (65) wire for an open. If wire is good do Test B. 2. Check the BLK (150) wire for an open and that GI30 is clean and tight.

Do the test listed for your symptom in the Symptom Table below.

Blower runs all the time

For Diagnosis

Voltage

Ground

-

SYMPTOM

(LT GRN' Greater than BLK) Corm C1 Volts & Ground E (RED) Conn Battery C1 & B (BLK) Conn C2 A (PPL) Conn Greater than 10 Volts C2 & Ground Blower Mode: LO

Measure: VOLTAGE At: BLOWER MOTOR CONNECTORS (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN A/C Mode: VENT Blower Switch: HI


Go t o the A/C System Check in 8A-62 for a guide to normal operation. Refer to the diagnosis if other results occur.


DO TEST

B: Blower and A/C Clutch Control Module Voltage Test C: A/C Control Head Blower Test

Clutch Control Module Voltage

B: BLOWER AND A/C CLUTCH CONTROL MODULE VOLTAGE TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: BLOWER AND A/C CLUTCH MODULE CONNECTORS (Connected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN A/C Mode: ECON Blower Mode: HI

I

Measure Between

E (RED) Conn C 1 & Ground

I

~~~~~~ Battery

1

For Diagnosis

See

See 3

See

(LT GRN1 Less than 7 See 4 BLK & Volts Ground A (PPL) Conn Less than 7 See 5 Volts C2 & Ground If voltages are correct but blower does not run, check that connectors are properly mated. Check for an open in PPL (65) wire. 1. Check RED (2) wire and Fusible Link A for an open. 2. Check LT GRNIBLK wire (900) for an open or short to ground. If wire is good do Test C. 3. Check BLK (151) wire for an open. 4. Do Test C. 5. Replace Blower and AIC Clutch Control Module.

I

See 1

(Continued in next column) those l i s t e r i

,

-


-

w

AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER CONTROLS C68, ELECTRONIC

C: A/C CONTROL HEAD BLOWER VOLTAGE TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: A/C CONTROL HEAD CONNECTORS C1, C2 and C3 (Connected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN A/C Mode: ECON Blower Mode: HI

I 1'

I

Measure Between

con l Con I

I

tz:."

(BRN) C1 & Ground

Battery

(ORN) C3 & Ground B (BRN) Conn C1 & E (BLK) Conn C2 B (BRN) Conn C1 & D (BLK) Conn C2

Battery Battery

Battery

(LT GRN' Greater than BLK) Corm C2 Volts & Ground I Blower Mode: LO

1

I I

For Diagnosis

See 1 See 2

CIRCUIT OPERATION

(Continued from ~reviouscolumn) 2. Check ORN (40) wire for an open. 3. Check BLK (152) wire for an open. 4. Check LT GRNIBLK (900) wire for a short to ground. If wire is good, replace the A/C Control Head.


D: A/C CONTROL HEAD PANEL LIGHT TEST

I I

1

I

I

See 3

See 3

See

I

(LT GRN1 Less than 7 See 4 BLK) & Volts Ground If voltages are correct but blower does not run, check for an open in LT GRNIBLK (900) wire. If wire is good, recheck measurements made in Tests A and B. 1. Check BRN (50) wire for an open. (Continued in next column)

Measure: VOLTAGE At: A/C CONTROL HEAD CONNECTORS C2 and C3 (Connected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN A/C Mode: ECON Light Switch: PARK ~ i g hDimmer t Setting: FULL Measure Between

I :::::t

1

For Diagnosis

D (GRY) Corm Battery See 1 C3 & Ground D (GRY) Conn Battery See 2 C3 & D (BLK) Conn C2 Light Dimmer: Minimum Brightness Minimum D (GRY) Conn C3 & D (BLK) Panel Lamp See 3 Voltage Conn C2 If voltages are correct but Panel indicators do not light or dim, replace the A/C Control Head. 1. Check for open in GRY (8) wire. 2. Check for open in RLK (152) wire. 3. Go to 8A-12, Light Switch Details, for diagnostics.

I

I

The Blower Motor speed is determined by the voltage level at terminal B of connector C2 on the A/C Control Head. The voltage at terminal B is a h l s e Width Modulated Signal (PWM) with a duty cycle proportional to the blower speed. When the average voltage at terminal B is high (greater than 10 volts), the blower runs at maximum speed. When the voltage is low (less than 7 volts), the blower runs at low speed. The particular speed of the blower is determined by the A/C Mode selected and the A/C Temperature Setting of the Control Head. The voltage from terminal B of the A/C Control Head is applied to terminal D of connector C1 on the Blower and A/C Clutch Control Module. This module contains circuits for averaging the PWM input at terminal B, and a current amplifier for supplying voltage to run the blower motor The voltage to run the blower motor is applied to the motor through the PPL (65) wire. At maximum blower speed, the voltage applied to the blower motor is approximately 12 volts and at minimum blower speed the voltage is approximately 4 volts.

AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS Q

C68, ELECTRONIC, V8 VIN Y

BLOCK DETAILS

TRUNK RELEASE

2 BRN CAPACITOR

8 ORN

POWER ANTENNA

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LIGHTS

POWER

I I I I I

SOLIOSTATE VOLTAGE REGULATOR

I

I I I 1 I

I CONTROL

-

HEAD I I I SOLID STATE I DO NOTMEASURE

r

I

I

INPUT

IGM 4

-1ZVOLTS

RESISTANCE

-

6

IGN

I

I 1 I I

I I

COMPRESSOR POWER

I II I I

COMPRESSOR

I

8BLK

152

A I R CONDITIONING

C68, ELECTRONIC A I R DELIVERY A N 0 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS C68, ELECTRONIC .8 E L K 152 AIR CONDITIONING BLOWER CONTROLS C68, ELECTRONIC

1 ELK

I

152

1 6107

-

152

.8 LT GRN

( 66

AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER CONTROLS C68, ELECTRONIC

AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS 0,

C68, ELECTRONIC, V6 VtN A AND TURBO VIN 7

A C -

CONTROL

HEAD SO Ll D STATE DO NOTMEASURE RESISTANCE

CONTINUED ON FOLLOWING PAGE

- AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS

m

C68, ELECTRONIC CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

.5 CAP./OIOOE LEAD TURBO VIN 7

CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

I-4I 899

V6 VIX A

I

.8 BLK

D

@ 9 J

3 BLK

COOLANT FAN

AIR CONDITIONING: BLOWER CONTROLS C68. ELECTRONIC

3 BLK

151

1

151

I

151

- Le

AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS C68, ELECTRONIC

@

HI

AUTO

e

'O

@

ELECTRONIC TOUCH CLIMATE CONTROL

1+ J

65

70

75

80

.................a

85 WARMER

COOLER

HEATER

OFF

ECON

AUTO

BI L E V E L

w DEF

@

AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS C68. ELECTRONIC HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

COMPONENT LOCATION AIC Compressor Clutch (VIN 7) . . . AIC Compressor Clutch (VIN A). . . AIC Compressor Clutch (VIN Y). . . AIC Cut-Out Relay (VIN 7) . . . . . . . AIC High Pressure Cut-Out Switch Ambient Sensor (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . .

C 100. See Page 202-0

Ambient Sensor (VIN A) (VIN Y). .

BLK

BLK

V04000.0

C497

Page-Figure LH frant of engine. part of AIC compressor . . . . RH front of engine. part of AIC compressor . . . . RH front of engine. part of AIC compressor . . . . On RH front fender. above wheel well . . . . . . . . In AIC line. below generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. right of blower motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. above blower motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Blower and AIC Clutch Control Module (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. left of blower motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blower and AIC Clutch Control Module (VIN A)(VINY) . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. left of blower motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blower Motor (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blower Motor (VIN A) (VIN Y). . . . RH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top of brake pedal support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diode (AIC Clutch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Taped inside AIC compressor clutch connector Electronic Control Module (ECM) . RH shroud. near lower access hole . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-Car Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top of IIP. in RH speaker grill assembly . . . . . . Pressure Cycling Switch (VIN 7) . . RH rear of engine compartment. on AIC accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Cycling Switch (VIN A) (VIN Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. on AIC accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower LH corner of fuse block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . C219 (1 cavity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. near control head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C369 (1 cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. near RH shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C497 (VIN 7) (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. near blower motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C497 (VIN A) (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment. below valve cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

201201201201201-

7-B 2-A 5-C 8-C 8-A

201-19-A 201-19-C

201-19-A

201-19-C 201-19-B 201-20-A 20 1-12-A 201-17-B 201-12-A 201-15-C 201-19-B

20 1-19-C 201-13-C 201- 9-B 201-17-A 201-16-C 201- 7-C 201- 2-A

AIR

c~ I T I O N I N G :COMPRESSOR CONTROLS

C68, ELECTRONIC COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

C497 (VIN Y) (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . Behind RH side of IIP, right of radio . . . . . . . . . C892 (15 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, center of glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . GI07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Below RH side of IIP, near shroud . . . . . . . . . . . GI20 (VIN 7). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine, on cylinder head. . . . . . . . . . GI30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On RH front fender, near blower motor . . . . . . . S103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIC harness, behind glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . S112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near rear of RH cylinder head . S170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near mass air flow sensor. . . . . S290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above steering column . . . . . . . . . . S806 (VIN A) (VIN Y). . . . . . . . . . . AIC harness, forward of blower motor . . . . . . . . S848. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIC harness, right of radio

201-16-B 201-17-A 201-17-A 201- 7-A 201-19-C 201-17-A 201- 7-A 201-10-A 201-15-A 201-19-C


ELK

WHT

'wV 15003.0

C892

ELK

AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS C68, ELECTRONIC TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

=

SYSTEM CHECK

Try the following checks before doing System Check.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

Complete the AIC System Check in 8A-62 as a guide to normal operation of the entire AIC System. Refer to the diagnostics given if other results occur.

1. Check ECM-SOL Fuse and A/C Fuse by visual inspection. 2. Check that A/C Compressor Clutch connector is firmly seated.

TURBO VIN 7 Use the Isolation Test below to choose the proper diagnostic test. Tests follow the Isolation Test.

Tests for Compressor Controls follow i n System Diagnosis.

ISOLATION TEST (TABLE I)

3. Check that ground G130 is clean and tight.

Measure: VOLTAGE At: AIC CUTOUT RELAY (Disconnected) Conditions Ignition Switch: RUN (Engine need not be running) AIC Mode: AUTO AIC Temperature Setting: 6 5 Temperature Outside Car: Above 60 O F

Go t o System Check for a guide to normal compressor control operation. Go t o System Diagnosis for compressor controls diagnostic tests.

SYSTEM CHECK TABLE

I

ACTION -

-

-

-

1. Turn Ignition Switch to RUN and start

I

-

-

-

EXPECTED RESULT -

A click can be heard when clutch engages

engine. Press AUTO and set Temperature to

I

65 2. Move Mode Selector between AUTO and

Verify that clutch engages in AUTO

ECON several times

3. Press AUTO to engage clutch

1

Clutch plate movement can be seen on the front of the compressor pulley If clutch does not engage proceed to step 4. If clutch operates as expected continue to step 3 Check that air from cooling fan can move freely through condenser Feel the input (cool)and output (warm)pipes to the compressor. If there is not a wide temperature difference after the compressor has run for several seconds see Section 1B

If refrigerant charge is normal, isolate conditions using the procedures which follow in system ~ia-gnosis

I

Measure Between

C (PNWBLK) & Ground

I

Correct voltaae

I

For Diagnosis

Check ECM SOL Fuse and PNW BLK (339) wire for an open. (Continued on facing page)

Battery

rn

AIR CO

TIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS

C68, ELECTRONIC

ISOLATION TEST (TABLE 2) Connect: JUMPER At: AIC CUT-OUT RELAY (Disconnected) Conditions lgnition Switch: RUN (Engine need not be running) A/C Mode: AUTO AIC Temperature Setting: 65 Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16°C)

1. Check LT BLU (67)

D (LTIBLU) &

Ground

Battev

wire for an open back to Pressure Cycling Switch. 2. Check that Pressure Cycling Switch is closed. If switch is open refer to Section 1B for procedure to check for low refrigerant pressure. If refrigerant pressure is normal, replace the Pressure Cycling Switch. 3. Do Test C.

If voltages are correct, leave A/C Cut-Out Relay disconnected and go to Table 2.


1

Jumper Between

B (DK GRN)

I

1


Clutch

I

Measure Between

I ::z:t

I

For Diagnosis

I

B8 (LT BLU) See 1 Battery & Ground A2 (DK GRNI See 2 Battery YEL) & Ground If voltages are correct proceed to Bble 2. 1. Check for open in LT BLU (67) wire. 2. Check for open in DK GRNNEL wire (959). If wire is good, replace A/C Cut-Out Relay.

1

Do Test B

A: ECM COMPRESSOR CONTROL TEST (TABLE 2) Connect: JUMPER At: ECM (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN (Engine not running) A/C Mode: AUTO Temperature Setting: 65 Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F

A: ECM COMPRESSOR CONTROL TEST (TABLE 1) Measure: VOLTAGE At: ECM (Disconnected) Conditions lgnition Switch: RUN (Engine not running) AIC Cut-Out Relay Reconnected. A/C Mode: AUTO Temperature Setting: 65 A/C Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16°C)


1

Jumper Between

/ I

Correct Result

I

For Diagnosis

I

I

A/C Cut-Out Relay A2 (DK GRN1 Operates and See 1 & Compressor Ground Clutch I I engages I I If action is correct but AIC System does not operate under normal conditions, condition is due t o ECM. Refer t o Section 6E. 1. Replace A/C Cut-Out Relay. (Continued on next page)

AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS I C68, ELECTRONIC (Continued from previous page)

B: A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: COMPRESSOR CLUTCH (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN (Engine not running) AIC Mode: AUTO AIC Temperature Setting: 65 Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16°C) AIC Cut-Out Relay disconnected A/C Cut-Out Relay terminals D and B jumpered.

t: BLOWER AND AIC CLUTCH CONTROL

MODULE CONNECTORS (Connected) lgnition Switch: RUN AIC Mode: AUTO AIC Temperature Setting: 65 Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F

Measure the voltage at terminal F of the A1 C Cut-Out Relay with a fused jumper connected across the terminals of the Pressure Cycling Switch connector (disconnected). If battery voltage is not present, check the LT GRN (66)wire and LT BLU (67) wire for an open. Pressure Cycling Switch. If battery voltage is not present, check the LT GRN (66)wire and LT BLU (67) wire for an open.

D: CONTROL HEAD COMPRESSOR CONTROL TEST

I

I

Measure Between

C: BLOWER AND AIC CLUTCH CONTROL MODULE CLUTCH VOLTAGE TEST

Correct Voltage

Measure: VOLTAGE At: A/C CONTROL HEAD CONNECTORS C1, C2, AND C3 (Connected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN AIC Mode: ECON AIC Temperature Setting: 65 Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F ( I6°C)

For Diagnosis

A (DK GRN) See 1 Battery & Ground A (DK GRN) See 2 Battery & B (BLK) If voltages are correct but clutch does not engage, replace the Compressor Clutch. 1. Check for open in DK GRN (59) wire. 2. Check for an open in the BLK (151)wire and BLK (152)wire to ground. AIC High Pressure Cut-Out Switch should be closed. If the Switch is open, replace it.

(Continued on facing page)

1. Check BRNJWHT (50) wire for an open. If wire is good do test D.

Blower and AIC Clutch Control

!BITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS

AIR CO

C68, ELECTRONIC (Continued from facing page)

ISOLATION TEST (TABLE 1) Measure: VOLTAGE At: PRESSURE CYCLING SWITCH CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN (Engine need not be running) A/C Mode: AUTO N C Temperature Setting: 65 Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16%) Measure Between

Correct Voltage

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS V6 VIN A Use the Isolation Test below to choose the proper diagnostic tests. Tests follow the Test Directory.

I

Jumper Between

I

/


I

Clutch A (LT GRN) & See 1 B (DK GRN) Engages If action is correct, refer to Section 1B for procedure to check refrigerant pressure. If refrigerant pressure is normal, replace the Pressure Cycling Switch. 1. Do Test B.

For Diagnosis

A (LT GRN) Battery See 1 Ground If voltage is correct, leave Pressure Cycling Switch disconnected and go to 'Ihble 2. 1. Do test A. Head and Blower and AIC Clutch Control Module are mated correctly. 1. Check BRN (50)wire and AIC Fuse for an


ISOLATION TEST (TABLE 2) Connect: JUMPER At: PRESSURE CYCLING SWITCH CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN (Engine need not be running) N C Mode: NORM Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F


A: BLOWER AND AIC CLUTCH CONTROL MODULE CLUTCH VOLTAGE TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: BLOWER AND A/C CLUTCH CONTROL MODULE CONNECTORS (Connected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN N C Mode: AUTO N C Temperature Setting: 65 Temperature Outside Car: (Above 60°F ( I6OC)

(A: BLOWER AND AIC CLUTCH CONTROL MODULE CLUTCH VOLTAGE TEST continued on next page)


=

C68, ELECTRONIC A: (BLOWER AND AIC CLUTCH CONTROL MODULE CLUTCH VOLTAGE TEST continued from previous page)

I

Measure: VOLTAGE At: COMPRESSOR CLUTCH (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN (engine need not be running) A/C Mode: AUTO AIC Temperature Setting: 65 Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16°C) Pressure Cycling Switch Connector Terminals jumpered

I

I

LT GRN (68) wire. 1. Check BRNIWHT (50) wire for an open. If wire is good, do Test C. 2. Check PPL (966) wire for an open. If wire is good, do Test C. 3. Replace Blower and AIC Clutch Control


B: AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH TEST

1 ~:t: I

Measure Between

I

1

I

For Diagnosis

I

A (DK GRN) Battery See 1 & Ground A (DK GRN) See 2 Battery & B (BLK) If voltages are correct but clutch does not engage, replace the Compressor Clutch. 1. Check for open in DK GRN (59) wire. 2. Check for open in BLK (151) wire.

Measure Between

B (BRN) Corm C1 & Ground A (BRNI WHT) Conn C 1 & Ground

/

I

Battery

See 1

Battery

See 2

/

I

I I C,,'",:,"::: (

I

/

I

C: AIC CONTROL HEAD COMPRESSOR CONTROL TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: A/C CONTROL HEAD CONNECTORS C1, C2 AND C3 (Connected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN A/C Mode: ECON A/C Temperature Setting: 65 Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (ISOC)


For Diagnosis

(PPL) Corm Battery C2 & Ground A/C Mode: AUTO

See 2

see 2 5 to 7 volts If voltages are correct but were not correct in Test A, check the PPL (966) wire and BRNtWHT (50) wire for an open. Check that connectors on AIC Control Head and Blower and A/C Clutch Control Module are mated correctly. 1. Check BRN (50) wire and A/C Fuse for an open. 2. Replace A/C Control Head.

I I I

rn

AIR CO

TIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS

4

C68, ELECTRONIC


SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS V8 VIN Y Use the Isolation Test below t o choose the proper diagnostic tests. Tests follow the Isolation Test.

ISOLATION TEST (TABLE 1) Measure: VOLTAGE At: A/C CUT-OUT RELAY (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN (Engine need not be running) AIC Mode: AUTO AIC Temperature Setting : 65 Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (I 6OC)

Connect: JUMPER At: AIC CUT-OUT RELAY (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN (Engine need not be running) A/C Mode: AUTO A/C Temperature Setting: 65 Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16°C) Jumper Between


B (LT GRN) & Clutch Do Test B D(LTGRN' Engages BLK) If action is correct, do Test A.

I

I*

Measure Between

(LT GRN) Ground (

For Diagnosis

Voltage

)

1'

1

Battery Battery

I

I

See 1 See 1

If voltages are correct, leave AIC Cut-Out Relay disconnected and go t o Table 2. 1. If voltage is incorrect a t only one terminal, check for an open in the LT GRN (66) wire to the terminal affected. If voltage is incorrect a t both terminals, do Test C.

(Continued from previous column) I

I

I

I

Measure Between

Voltage

For Diagnosis

J on Conn C2 See 1 Battery (LT GRN) & Ground 19 on Conn C1 See 2 Battery (BRN) & Ground If voltages are correct, leave AIC Cut-Out Relay disconnected and go to Table 2. 1. If voltage is incorrect a t only one terminal, check for an open in the LT GRN (66) wire to the terminal affected. If voltage is incorrect a t both terminals, do Test C. 2. Check for open in BRN (449)wire. If wire is good, replace AIC Cut-Out Relay. L

I

A: ECM COMPRESSOR CONTROL TEST (TABLE 1) Measure: VOLTAGE At: ECM (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN (Engine not running) AIC Mode: AUTO AIC Temperature Setting: 65 Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F ( I6OC) A/C Cut-Out Relay: Reconnected


A: ECM COMPRESSOR CONTROL TEST (TABLE 2) Connect: JUMPER At: ECM (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN (Engine not running) AIC Mode: AUTO AIC Temperature Setting: 65 Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16°C) Jumper Between


AIC Cut-Out Relay l9 On Corm operates and See 1 (BRN) & disengages AIC Compressor Clutch (A: ECM COMPRESSOR CONTROL TEST (TABLE 2) continued on next page)

AIR CONDITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS C68, ELECTRONIC (A: ECM COMPRESSOR CONTROL TEST (TABLE 2) continued from previous page) If action is correct but air conditioning system does not operate normally, condition is due to ECM. Refer to Section 6E for ECM diagnostic procedures. 1. Replace AIC Cut-Out Relay.

B: A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: COMPRESSOR CLUTCH (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN (Engine not running) A/C Mode: AUTO A/CTemperature Setting: 65 A/C Cut-Out Relay disconnected A/C Cut-Out Relay terminals B and D jumpered Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16°C) Measure Between

A (LT GRNI BLK) & Ground A (LT GRN/ BLK) & B (BLK)

Voltage

For Diagnosis

Battery

See 1

Battery

See 2

(Continued from previous column) If voltages are correct but clutch does not engage replace the Compressor Clutch. 1. Check for open in LT GRNIBLK (966) wire. 2. Check for an open in the BLK (152) wire and BLK (151) wire t o ground. Pressure Cycling Switch should be closed. If Pressure Cycling Switch is open check for low refrigerant charge according t o procedures in Section 1B. If refrigerant charge is normal replace the Pressure Cycling Switch.

C: BLOWER AND A/C CLUTCH CONTROL MODULE CLUTCH VOLTAGE TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: BLOWER AND A/C CLUTCH CONTROL MODULE CONNECTORS (Connected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN A/C Mode: AUTO A/C Temperature Setting: 65 Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16°C)


(Continued from previous column) Measure Between

1

'OrreCt

Voltage

For Diagnosis

C (BRNlWHT) Conn C1 & Ground

Battery

See 1

A (PPL) Corm C1 & Ground

5 to 7 Volts

See 2

1

I

) Battery Ground A/C Mode: ECON

AC1(PPL) & Ground Corm

11 to 13 Volts

See 2

Conn C 1 & Ground If voltages are correct but were incorrect a t AIC Cut-Out Relay in Table 1 of Isolation Test, check for an open in LT GRN (66)wire. 1. Check BRNIWHT (50)wire for an open. If wire is good, do Test D. 2. Check PPL (966)wire for an open. If wire is good, do Test D. 3. Replace Blower and AIC Clutch Control Module.



m

ma

AIR CO

ITIONING: COMPRESSOR CONTROLS I

C68, ELECTRONIC

D: N C CONTROL HEAD COMPRESSOR CONTROL TEST EAD CONNECTORS C1,

Ignition Switch: RUN A/C Mode: ECON A/C Temperature Setting: 65 Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F

that connectors on A/C Control Head and Blower and A/C Clutch Control Module are mated correctly. 1. Check BRN (50) wire and A/C Fuse for an open.

-

CIRCUIT OPERATION

TURBO VIN 7

The compressor for the air conditioning system is belt driven by the engine through the Compressor Clutch. The clutch allows the compressor to be disengaged when air conditioning is not required and also to remove the air conditioning load from the engine when needed. The AIC Control Head determines when the compressor is to be operating. Operation of the compressor depends on the particular mode selected by the driver and the temperature setting. When the compressor is not required, the Compressor Clutch Signal at terminal C on connector C2 of the AIC Control Head is at 12 volts. When the Compressor Clutch is to be engaged, the voltage drops to approximately 6 volts. The Compressor Clutch Signal is applied to terminal A of the Blower and AIC Clutch Control Module where i t controls an electronic switch which powers the clutch. Voltage for the switch is supplied from the AIC Control Head through the BRNIWHT (50)wire to terminal C of connector C1 of the Blower and AIC Clutch Control Module. The output of the Blower and A/C Clutch Control Module is at 12 volts when the clutch is engaged and approximately zero volts when the clutch is disengaged.

From the Blower and AIC Clutch Control Module, voltage is applied to the AIC Cut-Out Relay through the Pressure Cycling Switch which is normally closed. The Pressure Cycling Switch opens when refrigerant pressure drops below 172 kPa (25 psi). I t closes again when refrigerant pressure rises enough that additional cooling is required. This action causes the AIC compressor to cycle on and off so.that the evaporator temperature does not drop low enough to cause icing. The AIC Cut-Out Relay is operated by the ECM. When the ECM receives the AIC ON input at terminal B8, it grounds terminal A2 energizing, the A/C Cut-Out Relay. When the relay is energized voltage is applied to the AIC Compressor Clutch through the contacts of the relay and the normally closed contacts of the High Pressure Cut-Out Switch. If the ECM determines that engine load should be reduced such as during full throttle, the AIC Cut-Out Relay is de-energized to remove voltage from the Compressor Clutch thus removing the air conditioning load from the engine. The normally closed A/C High Pressure CutOut Switch opens if refrigerant pressure becomes too high for normal operation.



=

C68, ELECTRONIC (Continued from previous page) V 6 VIN A

From the Blower and AIC Clutch Control Module voltage is applied to the AIC Compressor Clutch through the Pressure Cycling Switch. The Pressure Cycling Switch is normally closed but opens when refrigerant pressure drops below 172 kPa (25 psi). I t closes again when refrigerant pressure rises enough that additional cooling is required. This action causes the AIC Compressor to cycle on and off so that the evaporator temperature does not drop low enough to cause icing. V8 VIN Y

From the Blower and AIC Clutch Control Module, voltage is applied to the AIC Cut-Out Relay and terminal J on connector C2 of the ECM. The ECM will then increase the engine idle speed to compensate for the additional load of the AIC Compressor. Battery voltage at the AIC Cut-Out Relay is applied to the AIC Compressor Clutch through the normally closed contacts of the AIC Cut-Out Relay and to ground through the normally closed Pressure Cycling Switch. The Pressure Cycling Switch opens when refrigerant pressure drops below 1 7 2 k P a (25 psi). I t closes again when refrigerant pressure rises enough that additional cooling is required. This action causes the AIC compressor to cycle on and off so that evaporator temperature does not drop low enough to cause icing.

If the ECM determines that the engine load should be reduced, such as during wide open throttle, the ECM grounds terminal 19 which energizes the AIC Cut-Out Relay. This action opens the relay contacts removing voltage from the A/C Compressor Clutch.

AIR CONDITIONING: C 6 8 ELECTRONIC cu

AIR DELIVERY CONTROL

A/C

I

FUSE

25 AMP

i t.

SEE FUSE BLOCK OETAJLS

TRUNK RELEASE

1 FUSE

II - BLOCK I

1

! AIC -

PARTIALLY OPEN BY DESIGN 20% OUTSIDE AIR 80% INSIDE AIR


=

C68, ELECTRONIC HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

COMPONENT LOCATION Air Inlet Door Vacuum Motor . . . . Defroster Door Vacuum Motor. . . . Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater Water Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater-AIC Mode Vacuum Motor. . Temperature Door Actuator. . . . . . Vacuum Line Connector . . . . . . . . . Vacuum Solenoid Programmer. . . . Vacuum Tank (VIN 7) (Manual AIC, Without Cruise Control) . . . .


Behind IIP, top RH side of AIC plenum . . . . . . . Behind IIP, LH side of AIC plenum . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear part of engine, on heater line hose . . . . Behind IIP, LH side of AIC plenum . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, near glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, near center of AIC plenum. . . . . . . . Behind RH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ELK

ELK

WHT

ELK

201-19-D 201-19-D 201-12-A 201-18-E 201-19-D 201-17-A 201-19-D 201-17-A

RH rear of engine compartment, ahead of blower motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-19-B

Vacuum Tank (VIN A) (VIN Y) (Without Cruise Control). . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment, ahead of blower motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C219 (1cavity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, near control head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C892 (15 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, center of glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . C893 (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, center of glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Below RH side of IIP, near shroud . . . . . . . . . . . S103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIC harness, behind glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S848. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIC harness, right of radio

w

BLK

Page-Figure

201-19-C 201-17-A 201-17-A 201-17-A 201-17-A 201-17-A

AIR

c&IoNING:

AIR DELIVERY CONTROLS

668, ELECTRONIC HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

WHT 1 2 0 1 0 6 4 9 Brake S w i t c h BLK2973407 AIC Compressor Clutch

u

BLK 1 2 0 2 0 0 1 5 A / C Cut-Out Relay

Diode, See AIC Compressor Clutch

Ambient Sensor, See AIC Compressor Clutch C2 BLK

ECM Connectors, See Pages 20-6.21 -9, and 22-5 C3 BLK

C1 B U N

C2 BRN

V00072.0 Slower and A!C Clutch Control Module C 1 BLK

V 0 0 0 7 1 .O A / C Control Head

In Car Sensor, See AIC Compressor Clutch

AIR CONDITIONING: AIR DELIVERY CONTROLS C68, ELECTRONIC HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

BLK 12004827 Pressure Cycling Switch

F E D C B A

BLK 12015487 Temperature Door Actuator

BLK 12004706 Vacuum Solenoid Program

w


-

w

C68, ELECTRONIC TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Try the following checks before doing the System Diagnosis.

1. Check for vacuum at the VIO vacuum hose from the Vacuum Tank where it enters the Vacuum Solenoid Programmer and the BLK hose from the vacuum source where it enters into the Vacuum Tank. 2. Check that the ECC Programmer Connector is mated correctly.

3. Check the operation of the Temperature Door by setting the temperature first to 65" then 85" and back again. The Temperature Door should move through its full travel each time the temperature setting i s changed. Go to the AIC System Check in 8A-62 for a guide to normal operation. Refer to the Diagnosis if other results occur. Go to System Diagnosis for Air Delivery and Temperature Control diagnostic tests.


SYMPTOM TABLE DO TEST

SYMPTOM

No operation of air doors

Temperature always hot or cold System does not hold temperature that has been set Air flow from wrong outlets in one or more operating modes

A: VACUUM SOLENOID PROGRAMMER VOLTAGE TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: VACUUM SOLENOID PROGRAMMER CONTROL (Connected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN AIC Mode: OFF Temperature Outside Car: Above 60°F (16°C) Measure Between

Voltage

A: Vacuum Solenoid Programmer Voltage Test B: Vacuum Solenoid Programmer Control Voltage Test C: Temperature Sensors Resistance Test D: Temperature Door Control Test C: Temperature Sensors Resistance Test B: Vacuum Solenoid Programmer Control Voltage Test

B: VACUUM SOLENOID PROGRAMMER CONTROL VOLTAGE TEST

lgnition Switch: RUN AIC Mode: OFF AIC Temperature Setting: 65 Temperature Outside Car: Above 6 0 OF

For Diagnosis

(BRN)& Battery See 1 Ground If voltage is correct return to Symptom Table. 1. Check BRN (50)wire for an open. If wire is good replace AIC Control Head.

(B: VACUUM SOLENOID PROGRAMMER CONTROL VOLTAGE TEST continued on next page)


=

C68, ELECTRONIC (B: VACUUM SOLENOID PROGRAMMER' CONTROL VOLTAGE TEST continued from ~ r e v i o u~s a e e l 5 (PNK)on C1 Test Lamp See 1 does not light & Ground AIC Mode: ECON Test Lamp lights see 1

Iz~~B~E~I

I

(WHT1 Test Lamp BLK) on C2 & lights Ground 15 (PNK)on C1 Test Lamp & Ground does not light AIC Mode: BI-LEV

I

C1& Ground

Test Lamp C1& Ground does not light

IWHT'

C: TEMPERATURE SENSORS RESISTANCE TEST (TABLE 1)

See 1

I

See

I

Measure: RESISTANCE At: AIC CONTROL HEAD CONNECTOR C3 (Disconnected) Condition: lgnition Switch: OFF Measure Between

lights

4 (LT BLU) on

BLK) on C2 & Ground 5 (PNK)on C1

I

Continued from previous column) If all responses are correct but air does not flow from the correct outlets in all modes, check the wires for opens. Make the check between the terminal at the Control Head and the Vacuum Solenoid Programmer (see schematic). If wires are good, replace the Vacuum Solenoid Programmer. 1. If test lamp gives incorrect response, replace the AIC Control Head.

See 1

Test Lamp lights

See 1

Test Lamp lights

See 1


Resistance

For Diagnosis

ApproxiE (LT GRNl See 1 BLK) & A mately 10,000 ohms (BLK) If resistance is correct, go to Table 2. 1. Check LT GRNIBLK (198)wire and BLK (150) wire for an open. If wires are good replace In-Car Sensor.

C: TEMPERATURE SENSORS RESISTANCE TEST (TABLE 2) Measure: RESISTANCE At: AIC CONTROL HEAD CONNECTOR C2 (Disconnected) Condition: Measure Between

'Orrect

Resistance

1

I

1

For Diagnosis

ApproxiSee 1 'PNKIBLK) mately 5000 & E (BLK) ohms I If resistance is correct but temperature regulation is unstable, replace the AIC Control Head. 1. Check PNKIBLK (918) wire and BLK (150)wire for an open. If wires are good, replace the Ambient Sensor. I

I

AIR CO~DITIONING: AIR DELIVERY CONTROLS

-

-

C68, ELECTRONIC

D: TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL TEST (TABLE 1)

(Continued from previous column) AIC Temperature Setting: 60 (Measure voltage while Temperature Door is changing position) B (TAN1 WHT) & 8 to 9 volts See Table 2 Ground

Measure: VOLTAGE At: TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CONNECTOR (Connected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN AIC Mode: ECON Fan Mode: LO AIC Temperature Setting: 6 0 Temperature Outside Car: Above 6 0 OF (16°C) Measure Between

I I

Correct Voltage

Measure: RESISTANCE At: TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: OFF Temperature moved to COLD position I

I

For Diagnosis

B (TAN1 WHT) & 12 volts See 1 Ground A (LTBLUl See 1 12 volts BLK) & Ground AIC Temperature Setting: 90 (Measure voltage while ~ e m ~ e r a t uDoor r e is changing position)

D: TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL TEST (TABLE 2)

I I

BLK) & Ground If all voltages are correct return to Symptom Table. 1. If voltage is less than 0.5 volts, check the TANIWHT (915) wire (terminal B) or LT BLUIBLK (914) wire (terminal A) for an open or short to ground. If voltage is between 0.5 and 8 volts, check for mechanical binding of Temperature Door. If wire is good and door is not binding, replace the AIC Control Head. 2. Replace AIC Control Head

Measure Between

C&D

Correct Resistance

I

llOOohms

For Diagnosis

I

See 1

Temperature Door moved to HOT position C&F 1000 ohms See 1

I

I

I

If resistance measurements are correct, the actuator feedback resistor is good. If actuator does not move through its full travel, check the wires at terminals C, D, and F on the Temperature Door Actuator for an open or short to ground. If wires are good, replace the AIC Control Head. 1. Replace the Temperature Door Actuator.

Less than 0.5 Ground A (LT BLUl BLK) & Ground

8 to 9 volts

See Table 2



I

AIR CONDITIONING: AIR DELIVERY CONTROLS C68, ELECTRONIC (Continued from previous page)

CIRCUIT OPERATION The air doors that control the heating and air conditioning air flow are operated by vacuum motors. The valves that apply or vent vacuum to these motors are solenoid operated. The valves are located in the Vacuum Solenoid Programmer and are powered by a solid state circuit in the A/C Control Head. Pushbutton switches in the AIC Control Head determine which doors should operate. Two temperature-variable resistors are connected to the control head to provide temperature information. The In-Car Sensor indicates the inside air temperature. Circuits within the AIC Control Head use this information to determine whether the air should be heated or cooled to bring the inside of the car to the selected temperature. The Ambient Sensor indicates the outside are temperature. The voltage signal from this sensor is used to determine how much the air should be heated or cooled to bring the temperature in the car to the selected value as quickly as possible. The functions of the vacuum valves and air doors are described below.

RECIRCULATINGIOUTSIDE AIR DOOR

The RecirculatinglOutside Air Door is open, permitting outside air to enter, in all mode positions except AUTO mode with 60 O temperature setting. The In-Car Inlet is then opened, recirculating the inside air to get maximum cooling. When the RecirculatinglOutside Air Vacuum Valve is energized, vacuum is applied to the Vacuum Motor through a porous plug. This plug has a high resistance to air flow so that the motor and door move slowly. HEATER-AIC DOOR

The Heater-A/C Door is moved by the Heater-AIC Mode Vacuum Motor. This motor has two vacuum chambers and can select three positions. In the BI-LEVEL pushbutton position, neither valve is energized, and the Door is in its middle position, sending air to both the AIC Outlets and the Heater Outlets. If the up valve is operated, the vacuum motor moves the door to position A. This is the position of the door after the HEATER pushbutton has been pressed. In A/C Operation (except BI-LEVEL) the down valve is operated, which moves the door to position B. AIC DEFROST DOOR

TEMPERATURE DOOR

The Air Temperature door is controlled by the Temperature Door Actuator. With the door in the COOL position, air is blocked from passing through the Heater Core. This door can be placed by the motor in any position between COOL and WARM. In the WARM position all air is directed through the Heater Core.

The A/C Defrost Door is in position B for all the cooling functions. In these modes the AIC Defrost Door Vacuum Valve is energized and vacuum is applied to its vacuum motor. When the DEF pushbutton is depressed the valve is de-energized. I t vents vacuum to the atmosphere and the door moves to position A. This directs the air flow to the Defrost outlets and the windshield.

LIGHTSWITCH DETAILS

(NOT USED) DEFOGGER CONTROL

8 IGNITION KEY WARNING SWITCH CLOSED WlTH KEY I N ACCY, LOCK, AND OFF

.8 T A N

.35 BLK

THEFT DETERRENT BELT BUCK1

LH FRONT

SWlTCH

-

Y

OOOROPEN

-- 6151

-

WARNI~G AND ALARMS: CHIME LIGHTS-ON, IGNITION KEY,SEATBELT HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Convenience Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, left of radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-15-A Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of UP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A Ignition Key Warning Switch. . . . . In top of steering column, beside key tumbler. . 201-13-A Seatbelt Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part of driver's seatbelt assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 201-24-B Sentinel Amplifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, right of radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-D ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 9-B C104 (11cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attached to RH side of steering column . . . . . . 201-13-A C209 (11cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attached to LH side of fuse block . . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-C C360 (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On floor pan, near LH front door sill . . . . . . . . . 201-244 C361 (2 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH front s e a t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-2442 C368 (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, right of radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-D GI04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Behind IIP, to left of steering column. . . . . . . . . 201-15-A GI51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Under LH front seat S213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IIP harness, above radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-16-A S290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above steering column . . . . . . . . . . 201-15-A S438. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above fuse block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-15-A


BLK 12004147

BLK

BLK 12034299

-

Convenience Center

WARNINGS AND ALARMS: CHIME LIGHTS-ON, IGNITION KEY, SEATBELT HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

BLK8911773

WHT 1202003 1

Seatbelt Switch

Defogger Control

Instrument Panel Connector (Digital Cluster), See Page 82-5

nlmmD A B C D E F G H J K L M

Instrument Panel Connector (Indicators Cluster), See Page 80-6

1

BLK 89 11258 Sentinel Amplifier

-

-

w

WARNINGS AND ALARMS: CHIME LIGHTS-ON, IGNITION KEY, SEATBELT TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Try the following checks before doing the System Check.

1. Check CIG-CLK Fuse by observing the 2.

3. 4.

5.

Glove Box Light. Check ST BLTlACC Fuse by operating the Defogger, if equipped. Check that grounds GI51 and G104 are clean and tight. Check INST LPS Fuse by observing Instrument Panel illumination. If FASTEN BELTS Indicator lights, but chime alarm does not sound, replace the chime module. Go to System Check for a guide to normal operation. Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

SYSTEM CHECK Use the System Check Table as a guide t o normal operation. Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of symptoms and diagnostic steps.


1. Sit in driver's

seat and close the driver 's door Turn the Ignition Switch to RUN. Do not buckle the seatbelt


Switch in ACCY, LOCK, or OFF and the key still in the ignition, open the LH front door 3. Remove the key from the Ignition Switch 4. With the key removed from the ignition, turn the Light Switch to PARK and if equipped, the Twilight Sentinel OFF 5. TurnLight Switch OFF

NORMAL RESULT


SYMPTOM DIRECTORY

A slow chime alarm sounds FASTEN BELTS Indicator lights in the Instrument Cluster Chime stops and indicator goes out after 4 to 8 seconds

Fast chime alarm sounds (faster than the seatbelt chime)

Alarm stops

Fast pulsed chime alarm sounds (faster than key chime)

Alarm Stops

For complete diagnosis and a list of symptoms, go to System Diagnosis.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

on, but chime is operating properly Only Lights-On reminder does not operate Only Lights-On reminder operates when it should not

Test E: Lights-On Input Test

E: Lights-On Input Test

Do the tests listed for your symptom in the Symptom Table below.


WARNINGS AND ALARMS:CHIME LIGHTS-ON, IGNITION KEY,SEATBELT A: CHIME MODULE TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: CHIME MODULE (Disconnected)

1 (

Measure Between

ORN)& Ground

I

Correct Voltage

Battery

(ORN)& Battery (BLK) Ignition Switch: RUN

I 'EEL,",",") 1

Battery

'

For Diagnosis

I

See 1

1 I

See 2

I

If all three voltages are correct and all chime functions were not working, replace Chime Module. 1. Checklrepair ORN wire (40). 2. Checklrepair BLK wire (150). 3. Checklrepair PNKIBLK wire (39).

Connect: SELF-POWERED TEST LAMP At: CHIME MODULE (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Switch (Key in): ACCY, LOCK, or OFF LH Front Door: OPEN Connect Between

I

Correct Result

I

At: CHIME MODULE (Disconnected)

For Diagnosis

6 (LT GRN) & Test Lamp See 1 lights Ground Ignition Switch (key in): ACCY, LOCK, or OFF LH Front Door: CLOSED

1 See2

C: FASTEN BELTS INPUT TEST

B: KEY IN IGNITION INPUT TEST

1

ILT GRN) & Test Lamp off Ground

/

Ignition Switch: KEY OUT LH Front Door: OPEN

/

1. Check for an open in the Seatbelt Switch or an open in the BLK (238)or BLK (150) wires (see schematic).

See 2

I

(LT GRN) & Test Lamp off See3 Ground If all of the test lamp responses are correct, replace Chime Module. 1. Checklrepair Ignition Key Warning Switch, LH Front Door Jamb Switch, LT GRN (80)and TAN (159)wires for short to ground (see schematic). 2. Checklrepair L H F r o n t Door J a m b Switch and TAN (159) wire for short to ground (see schematic). 3. Checklrepair the LT GRN wire (80) for a short to ground. Replace the Ignition Key Warning Switch if the LT GRN wire is OK.

1

d in the BLK (238) wire (see

-

LIGHTS-ON, IGNITION KEY, SEATBELT D: FASTEN BELTS INDICATOR TEST Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: CHIME MODULE (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN Connect Jumper Between

Correct Result

For Diagnosis

7 (ORN)& 2

Indicator See 1 & 2 YELIBLK) Lights If the Indicator response was correct, replace the Chime Module. 1. Check bulb, checklrepair the YELIBLK wire (237), BLK wire (150), and Instrument Cluster printed circuit for an open. 2. Check Instrument Cluster printed circuit for a short to Battery.

E: LIGHTS-ON INPUT TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: CHIME MODULE (Disconnected) Conditions: s Ignition Switch: RUN Twilight Sentinel: OFF Instrument Panel Dimmer: BRIGHT

Measure BeLween 8 (GRY)& Ground

Volt age

For Diagnosis

-

-

WARNINGS AND ALARMS: CHIME

(Continued from ~ r e v i o u column) s Lieht Switch: PARK or HEAD (GRY)& Ground

I

Battery

I

I

SEATBELT WARNING

See 1

I

If both voltages are correct, replace Chime Module.

1. Checklrepair the GRY wire. If equipped

with Twilight Sentinel, see 8A-101, Headlights with Sentinel for further diagnosis. If not equipped with Twilight Sentinel, see 8A-114, Interior Lights: Instrument Panel Lights for further diagnosis.

CIRCUIT OPERATION The Warnings and Alarm System sounds a chime t o bring attention t o one or more of several conditions. These conditions are: 1) the lights are on and the Ignition Switch is set t o LOCK, OFF, or ACCY; 2) the Ignition Key is in the Ignition Switch when the driver's door is open and 3) the seatbelt is unbuckled when the Ignition Switch is in any position but OFF. Voltage is applied a t all times through the CIG-CLK Fuse to terminal 7 to power the solid state Chime Module. IGNITION KEY WARNING

0 Volts

See 1


Voltage is applied t o the Chime Module by the CIG-CLK Fuse. Whenever the key is in the Ignition Switch and the Ignition Switch is in LOCK, OFF, or ACCY, and the driver's door is open, terminal 6 sf the module is grounded. This sounds the alarm.

With the Ignition Switch in RUN, BULB TEST, or START, voltage is applied through the ST BLTIACC Fuse t o the Multi-Function Chime (MFC) Module. With the driver's seatbelt not buckled, terminal 4 of the module is grounded through the Seat Belt Switch. The FASTEN BELTS Indicator always goes on for about 5 seconds when the Ignition Switch is set to RUN, BULB TEST, or START. LIGHTS-ON WARNING

When the Light Switch is in HEAD or PARK and the Dimmer Switch Rheostat is not a t the dimmest setting, voltage is applied through the INST PLS Fuse t o the Multi-Function Chime (MFC)Module. When the Ignition Switch is in RUN, BULB TEST, or START, voltage is applied through the ST BLTIACC Fuse t o the Module. These two voltages are sensed and the alarm is not sounded. When the Ignition Switch is turned t o LOCK, OFF, or ACCY, the S T BLTIACC Fuse loses voltage. The Multi-Function Chime (MFC) Module senses the change. If voltage is still available from the INST LPS Fuse, voltage from the CIG-CLK Fuse is applied to sound the alarm. The alarm can be turned off by turning the Light Switch t o the OFF setting. The Module no longer senses voltage from the Light Switch, so the alarm does not sound. If the Twilight Sentinel System is operating and the Light Switch i s in OFF, t h e alarm i s not sounded.

INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER [D

LIGHTS AND INDICATORS

SEE LIGHTS: INS7RUMENT CLUSTER


-

SEE GROUND DISTRlBUflON

m

T

INSTRUM N T PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER

y

g C)

?

INDICATORS

COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL

MULTI-PORT FUEL INJECTION

CRUISE CONTROL

THEFT DETERRENT

INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER Dl

INDICATORS . . --I S A W

it

.B PNKIBLK SEE FUSE -5I-.S&3 BLOCK DETAILS

r""'-"'""--"----------I

I

------j 239

1

.8 PNKIBLK (J 239 1 5 X G

*

I

GCK

I

"OILICHOKE" INOIGATOR

..................................

7 INSTRUMENT

*

X

lPRINTED "BRAKE" WITH GAGES,THE I

'HOT' INOICATOR LIGHTS IN BULB

I

STARTER AND CHARGING SYSTEM

.35 T A N

I


31

IGNITION H=

(TURBO V I N 7) B TEMPERATURE HEATER

--

*"

4 OPENS A T 27 kPa (4 PSI)

--

PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER FUEL GAGE

VSS SPEED BUFFER

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

4

-

-

SEEGROURO DISTRIBUTIOM

CO

INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER TURBO BOOST GAGE AND TACHOMETER

: I 00 0 P

INSTRI YrFNT ..PANFl INDICATORS CLUSTER ... ...-...-... ...-.. . ...-.-. .. -...

Y


C1 ELK

.

I

I

C2 BLU

VOOOI 9.0 Ignition Switch

.

I

C 100 See Page 202-0

ELK

ELK

ELK

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Computer Controlled Coil Ignition (CCCI)Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear of engine. above intake manifold . . . . . . . . 201- 7-A Coolant Temperature Switch (VIN 7). Front of engine. right of coolant outlet . . . . . . . . . 201- 6-A Coolant Temperature Switch (VIN A) Top of engine. behind water pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- O-A Coolant Temperature Switch (VIN Y) Top LH side of engine. behind generator . . . . . . . . 201- 2-C Engine Oil Pressure Switch (VIN 7) . RH front of engine. below turbocharger . . . . . . . . . 201- 5-D Engine Oil Pressure Switch (VIN A) . Lower RH front of engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- O-A Engine Oil Pressure Switch (VIN Y) . RH top rear of engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 2-C Fuel Tank Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-22-D Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base of steering column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-A Turbo Boost Gage Sensor . . . . . . . . . On RH front fender. above wheel well . . . . . . . . . . 201- 8-C ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 9-B C115 (VIN 7) (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . Taped to engine harness. behind generator . . . . . . 201- 8-A C209 (11cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attached to LH side of fuse block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-C C311(1 cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind center of rear bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-21-B C312 (3 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind center of rear bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-21-B C320 (6 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear LH corner of trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-22-A C437 (15 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind RH side of IIP. behind glove box . . . . . . . . 201-17-B GI04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. to left of steering column . . . . . . . . . . 201-15-A G177 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear LH corner of trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-22-A G804 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind fuel tank. left of license plate . . . . . . . . . . . 201-22-D S203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IIP harness. above steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-B S213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. above radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-16-A S290 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. above steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-15-A S376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. above fuse block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-B S438 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IIP harness. above fuse block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-15-A

INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

C2 BLK

Cl BLK

Instrument Cluster

BLK12033709 Coolant Temperature Switch ( V 8 VIN Y ) BLK 12033852 C312

BLK 12034163

BLK 12004275

Computer Controlled Coil Ignition


a

INSTR

dwENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER


BLK 12015796 BLK8917693

Turbo Boost Gage Sensor

Instrument Cluster Dimmer Switch

r WHT

WHT 12020031

BLK 12020585

Light Switch

Oil Pressure Switch ( V 6 VlN 7)

BLK

BLK12041255 TachometerITurbo Boost Gage

INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS For lnstrument Cluster removal and replacement procedures see Body Service Manual Section 8C. Try the following checks before doing the System Check.

3. Check the INST LPS Fuse by observing the Instrument Panel Lights. 4. Check the suspect Indicator Bulbs. Go to System Check for a guide to normal operation.

SYSTEM CHECK For Instrument Cluster removal and replacement procedures see Body Service Manual Section 8C.

1. Check the Gages Fuse by Inspection.

Use the System Check Table as a guide to normal operation. Refer to the diagnosis given if other results occur.

2. Check the CIG-CLK Fuse by operating the

Tests follow in System Diagnosis.


Cigar Lighter.

Refer t o System Diagnosis for a list of symptoms.


NORMAL RESULT

FOR DIAGNOSIS

SERVICE ENGINE SOON Indicator lights

See Section 6 of the Service Manual

OILICHOKE Indicator lights

Do Test E (also see Test H pin 2)

VOLTS Indicator lights

See Starter and Charging System 8A-30 (also see Test H pin 3)

FASTEN BELTS Indicator lights for 6 to 8 seconds

See 8A-75 to 77 (also see Test H pin 6)

Fuel Gage indicates the correct fuel level (LOW FUEL Indicator lights if fuel is low)

See Symptom Table (also see Test H pin 9)

Turn the Ignition Switch to BULB TEST

WATER TEMP Indicator lights

Do Test D (also see Test H pin 4)

With the Ignition Switch in RUN, apply the Park Brake

BRAKE Indicator lights

See Brake Warning System 8A-41 (also see Test H pin 5)

Turn the Headlights and HI Beams on

HI BEAM Indicator lights

See Headlights 8A-100 and 101 (also see Test H pin 18)

With the Headlights on, adjust the Instrument Panel Dimmer Control

Instrument Panel illumination varies as the control is adjusted

See Interior Lights Dimming, 8A-117 (also see Test H pin 10)

With Ignition in RUN, operate the Turn signals and Hazard lights

LH & RH Turn Indicators light

See Exterior Lights, 8A-110 (also see Test H pins 17 and 7)

Turn the Ignition Switch to RUN

-


-

v

INSTRU ENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER

(Continued from previous column) DOTest E (also see Test H pin 2)

For Instrument Panel removal and replacement procedures see Body Service Manual Section 8C.

OILICHOKE Indicator lights continuously with the oil pressure OK Security Indicator does not operate

See Theft Deterrent, 8A-133

Do the tests listed for your symptom in the Symptom Table below or when directed by the System Check.

HIGH BEAM Indicator does not work properly

See Headlights, 8A-100 and 101 (also see Test H pin 18)

(Continued from facing page)

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

Tests follow the Symptom Table. Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of symptoms.

SYMPTOM TABLE

TURN Indicators do not work properly

See TurnIHazard, 8A-110 (also see Test H pins 17 and 7)

SERVICE ENGINE SOON Indicator does not work properly

See Section 6 of the Service Manual

VOLTS Indicator does not work properly

See Starter and Charging System, 8A-30 (also see Test H pin 3)

BRAKE Indicator does not work properly

See Brake Warning System, 8A-41 (also see Test H pin 5)

FASTEN BELTS Indicator does not work properly

See Warnings and Alarms, 8A-75 to 77 (also see Test H pin 6)

Do Test E (also see

CRUISE Indicator does not work properly

See Cruise Control, 8A-34 (also see Test H pin 16)

Speedometer does not work properly but the Odometer works

Replace the Instrument Cluster (see Body Service Manual Section 8C)

Odometer does not work but the Speedometer works

Replace the Instrument Cluster (see Body Service Manual Section 8C)

Indicator does not



(Continued from previous column) Speedometer and Odometer do not work

See Section 7A of the Service Manual

Instrument Panel Illumination will not vary with the Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch ~osition

1 See Interior Lights Dimming, 8A-117 (also see Test H pin 10)

-

lhchometer does not work properly

Do Test F (also see Test I pin B)

Turbo Boost Gage does not work properly

Do Test G (also see Test I pins F, G, H)

A: FUEL GAGE SENDER TEST Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: FUEL TANK UNIT CONNECTOR HARNESS HALF (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Recycle lgnition Switch after each jumper connection Connect Between

Correct Results

For Diagnosis

PNK (30) & Ground

Fuel Gage Reads Empty

See 1

PNK 30 & BLK (150)

Fuel Gage Reads Empty

See 2

Do Not Connect

Fuel Gage Reads Full

See 3

A: FUEL GAGE SENDER TEST (Continued on next page)

INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER A: FUEL GAGE SENDER TEST (Continued from ~ r e v i o u s~ a a e ) If all three Fuel Gage Indications are correct, replace Fuel Gage Sender. 1. Check the PNKIBLK (239) wire for a n open (see schematic). If OK, replace the Fuel Gage. 2. Check the BLK (150) wire for an open (see schematic). 3. Check the PNKiBLK (239) wire for a n open

B: INACCURATE FUEL GAGE TEST 1. Temporarily replace the Fuel Gage Sender with a known good unit. Move float up and down. If the Fuel Gage responds properly, replace the Fuel Gage Sender. If the Fuel Gage does not respond properly, check for clean and tight Fuel Gage connections. Replace the Fuel Gage if the connections are OK.

C: IGNITION SWITCH TEST Measure: RESISTANCE At: IGNITION SWITCH CONNECTOR C1 (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: BULB TEST Measure Between

Ground

*

Correct Results

For Diagnosis

Ohmmeter Reads 0 ohms

See 1


E: ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH TEST


Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN

If the resistance is correct, checklrepair the DK GRN (35) wire (see schematic) for an open. Check Instrument Panel printed circuit. 1. R e ~ a i r i r e ~ l a Ignition ce Switch.

D: TEMPERATURE INDICATOR SWITCH TEST Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Connect Between

Correct Result

B (DK GRN) & WATER TEMP Indicator lights Ground WATER TEMP Do Not Indicator is Connect OFF

Connect Between

1I

Do Not Connect

1I

Result

Oil Indicator lights Oil Indicator does not light

1

For Diagnosis Of Incorrect

I1

Results

See see 2

I 1 1

If both test results were correct, replace the Engine Oil Pressure Switch. 1. Check the TAN (31) wire and the Instrument Cluster Printed Circuit for a n open (see schematic). 2. Check the TAN (31) wire and the Instrument Cluster Printed Circuit for a short to ground (see schematic).

For Diagnosis

See

See 2

If both Indicator responses are correct, repairireplace Temperature Indicator Switch. 1. Check the DK GRN (35) or (112) wire and the Instrument Cluster printed circuit for an open (see schematic) and see Body Service Manual section 8C). 2. Check the DK GRN (35) or (112) wire (see schematic) for a short to ground. Check Instrument Cluster printed circuit. If OK, do Test C: Ignition Switch Test.

TAN (31) & Ground

!

Correct

F: TACHOMETER INPUT TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: CONNECTOR C2 (Connected) Conditions: Engine Running Measure Between

1

I

(WHT) &

1 I

Correct Voltage

1

1

1 to 7 Volts varies with Engine RPM

1

I

-

!

For Diagnosis

See

F: TACHOMETER INPUT TEST (Continued on next page)

1 I

INSTR

rn

ENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER

F: TACHOMETER INPUT TEST (Continued from previous page) If the voltage readings are correct, replace the Instrument Cluster (see Body Service Manual Section 8C). 1. Check the WHT (121) wire for an open. If OK the Computer Controlled Coil Ignition (CCCI) is at fault (see Section 6D of the Service Manual).

G: TURBO BOOST GAGE TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: TURBO BOOST GAGE SENSOR CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition: RUN Measure Between

Correct Voltage

For Diagnosis

C (GRY) & Ground

5 volts

See 1

volts

See 2

C (GRY) & A (BLK)

If both tests give the correct voltage, check the LT GRN (900) wire for an open (see schematic), then go to G1. 1. Check the GRY and GRYIBLK (916) wires for a n open (see schematic). 2. Check the BLK and BLKIWHT (952) wires for a n open (see schematic).

G I . REPLACE THE TURBO BOOST GAGE SENSOR WITH A KNOWN GOOD UNIT

If t h e Turbo Boost Gage does not work properly replace the Instrument cluster (see Body Service Manual Section 8C). Reinstall the original Turbo Boost Gage Sensor. If the Turbo Boost Gage now works properly, permanently replace the Turbo Boost Gage Sensor.

INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER

-

H: C1 PINOUT TEST IGNITION SWITCH IN RUN EXCEPT FOR RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS DISPLAY. VARIABLE VOLTAGE WITH

INDICATOR. EMPTY = 0 OHMS, FULL =

MEASURETO GROUND UNLESS ANOTHER TERMINAL IS GIVEN GROUND TO G104. CLUSTER CONNECTOR C l AS SEEN FROM THE DRIVER'S SEAT WlTH THE DIGITAL CLUSTER REMOVED IF THE CORRECT VOLTAGE OR RESISTANCE IS FOUND AT THE TERMINALS, AND THE CLUSTER FUNCTIONTHAT USES THOSE TERMINALS DOES NOT OPERATE, REPLACE THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER. (CHECK BULBS AND AND PRINTED CIRCUIT FIRST)

NOT USED

NOT USED

---IF THE CORRECT VOLTAGE OR RESISTANCE IS NOT FOUND AT A TERMINAL, DO THE TEST GIVEN OR GO TO THE PAGE REFERRED

PERATURE SWITCH

INSTR

rn

ENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER

-I: C2 PINOUT TEST IGNITION SWITCH IN RUN EXCEPT FOR RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS

MEASURETO GROUND UNLESS ANOTHER TERMINAL IS GIVEN

CLUSTER CONNECTOR C2 AS SEEN FROM THE DRIVER'S SEAT WITH THE DIGITAL CLUSTER REMOVED

IF THE CORRECT VOLTAGE OR RESISTANCE IS FOUND AT THE TERMINALS, AND THE CLUSTER FUNCTION THAT USES THOSE TERMINALS DOES NOT OPERATE, REPLACE THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER. (CHECK BULBS AND AND PRINTED CIRCUIT FIRST)

IF THE CORRECT VOLTAGE OR RESISTANCE IS NOT FOUND AT A TERMINAL, DO THE TEST GIVEN OR GO TO THE PAGE REFERRED

DIMMER RHEOSTAT IS ADJUSTED.

CIRCUIT OPERATION

FUEL GAGE DISPLAY

The operation of an indicator is explained in the operation of its circuit. See the circuit referred to for the complete operation of an indicator and the other components that work with it. Only the gages and indicators that do not appear in other schematics are described in this section.

The pointer of the Fuel Gage is moved by the magnetic fields of two coils. The coils are at right angles to each other. Battery voltage is applied to the E coil and the circuit divides at the opposite end of this coil. One path continues to ground through the F coil. Another goes to ground through the variable resistor of the Fuel Gage Sender.

TURBO BOOST GAGE AND TACHOMETER

With the Ignition Switch in RUN, BULB TEST, or START, voltage is available to terminal A (Power Input) of the TachometerITurbo Boost Gage. When the Turbo System is operating, the Turbo Boost Gages Sensor signals the boost gage concerning the amount of turbo boost. The gage then displays how much turbo boost the engine is receiving. The Tachometer/Turbo Boost Gage at the Tachometer input receives a signal from the Computer Controlled Coil Ignition (CCCI). The gage then displays engine RPM. Voltage to light the gage displays is available at all times through the Light Switch, the Instrument Cluster Dimmer Switch and the INST LPS Fuse. The Dimmer Switch can be used to control the brightness of the gage displays.

When the tank is low, the resistance of the sender is low. A large flow of current passes through the E coil and the Fuel Gage Sender resistor. This pulls the pointer toward E on the scale. At the same time more current is allowed to flow through the LOW FUEL Indicator causing it to light. When the tank is full, the sender resistance is high. More current now flows through the F coil, moving the pointer toward F on the scale. With two coils operating the pointer, the gage is not affected by changes in the voltage of the system.

INSTRUMENT PANEL: DIGITAL CLUSTER tD

srr-'-l

.8 BLKIWHT

450

.8 BLKIWHT

SEE GROUND

MSTRIBUTIOIU

.8 BLK/WHT

450 (TURBO VIN 7)

1 BLWWHT

450

-

m

INSTRUk

T PANEL: DIGITAL CLUSTER

LIGHTS AND INDICATORS

LIGHTS: TURNIHAZARD HEADLIGHTS

WARNINGS AND ALARMS

CIRCUIT

.3 BLK

I

150

m

-

INSTRUMENT PANEL: DIGITAL CLUSTER INDICATORS

------

1 FUSE

a I

1FUSE

BLOCK

I I 28 AMP

I

an--@ .B PNKIBLK V6 VtNA V8VIN Y

I ,y,

.8 ORN

I

I I

40

239

-

TURBO VlN 7

.8 PNKIBLK

I

239

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

TURBO BOOST INDICATOR SWITCH (TURBO VIN 7 ONLY) CONTACTS CLOSE A T PRESSURE SHOWN I N INCHES OF MERCURY

-

#NT PANEL: DIGITAL CLUSTER

INSTRU n .

INDICATORS

-


START CHARGING SYSTEM

A6

.5 TAN

.8 TAN

B

I

E

O


.35 DK GRN

I 35

31 (V8 VIN Y) 31 (TURBO VIN 7)

-

IGNITION

OIL PRESSURE

27 kPa (4 PSI)

INSTRUMENT PANEL: DIGITAL CLUSTER HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES C 100. See Page 202-0

. .

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Coolant Temperature Switch (VIN 7). Front of engine. right of coolant outlet . . . . . . . . . 201- 6-A Coolant Temperature Switch (VIN A) Top of engine. behind water pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 0-A Coolant Temperature Switch (VIN Y) Top LH side of engine. behind generator . . . . . . . . 201- 2-C Engine Oil Pressure Switch (VIN 7) . RH front of engine. below turbocharger . . . . . . . . . 201- 5-D Engine Oil Pressure Switch (VIN A) . Lower RH front of engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 0-A Engine Oil Pressure Switch (VIN Y) . RH top rear of engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 2-C Fuel Tank Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201-22-D Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base of steering column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-A Turbo Boost Indicator Switch . . . . . . On RH front fender. above wheel well . . . . . . . . . . 201- 8-B ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 9-B C209 (11cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attached to LH side of fuse block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-C C311(1 cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind center of rear bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-21-B C312 (3 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind center of rear bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-21-B C320 (6 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear LH corner of trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-22-A C437 (15 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind RH side of IIP. behind glove box . . . . . . . . 201-17-B G 104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. to left of steering column . . . . . . . . . . 201-15-A G120 (VIN 7). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine. on cylinder head . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 7-A G120 (VIN A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine. on cylinder head . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 1-A G120 (VIN Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine. near distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 4-A G177 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Rear LH corner of trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-22-A G804 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind fuel tank. left of license plate . . . . . . . . . . . 201-22-D S201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. above radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-16-A S203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. above steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 1-13-B S213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IIP harness. above radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-16-A S290 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. above steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-15-A S376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IIP harness. above fuse block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-B S438 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IIP harness. above fuse block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-15-A S668 (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness. near relay bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 8-B S668 (VIN A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCC harness. near blower motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-20-B

-

-

-

INSTRUMENT PANEL: DIGITAL CLUSTER

-


BLK 12020585

C2 BLK

Oil Pressure Switch

& ; T , I em^^^^^

BLK

(V6 VIN 7)

C1 BLK

VOOOI 7.0

Instrument Cluster

um" WHT

BRN 2965981 Turbo Boost Indicator Switch BLK

BLK12004275

WHT 12020031


Light Switch

(V6 VIN A )

INSTRUMENT PANEL: DIGITAL CLUSTER TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS For lnstrument cluster removal and replacement procedures, see section 8C of t h e Service Manual. For a list of possible symptoms, go t o System Diagnosis. Try the following checks before doing the System Check.

1. If only one display in a cluster does not operate, the condition is probably in the vehicle circuit supplying that display.

2. Check the Gages Fuse by operating t h e Parking Brake and observing the Brake Indicator Light (Ignition Switch in RUN).

3. Check the INST LPS Fuse by moving the light switch to PARK and observing the Ash Tray Light. 4. Check the CIG-CLK F'use by observing the glove box light.

5. If an indicator light will not light, check the bulb.

6. If a group of lights will not light, check the wire common to all affected lights for an open (see schematic).

Go t o System Check for a guide t o normal operation. Go t o System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

SYSTEM CHECK For Instrument Cluster removal and replacem e n t procedures see section 8C of t h e Service Manual. Use the System Check Table as a guide t o normal operation. Refer t o the diagnosis given if other results occur. Tests follow in System Diagnosis. Refer t o System Diagnosis for a list of Symptoms.


INSTRUMENT PANEL: DIGITAL CLUSTER SYSTEM CHECK TABLE ACTION

1. Turn the Ignition Switch to RUN

NORMAL RESULT

A. All display segments light for 2 seconds Display then indicates actual values B. FASTEN BELTS Indicator lights for about 5 seconds

FOR DIAGNOSIS

Refer to Symptom Diagnosis

C. OIL INDICATOR lights D. VOLTS INDICATOR lights E. SERVICE ENGINE SOON Indicator lights

I

2. Set the Parking Brake (Ignition Switch in RUN)

Brake indicator lights

Refer to Brake Warning System (8A - 41)

3. Operate the Turn Signals (Ignition Switch in RUN)

Green turn indicator arrows flash on and off with the turn lights

Refer to Exterior Lights (8A - 110)

4. Place the light switch in the PARK or HEAD Position

The Cluster Illumination lights come on

Refer t o Interior Lights Dimming (8A - 117)

5. Operate the High Beam Light Switch (Light Switch on)

High Beam Indicator comes on with the High Beams

Refer t o Headlights (8A - 100)

6. Turn the Reset EIM Knob on the cluster (Ig-. nition Switch in RUN)

Readouts change between English and metric reading, this affects t h e Speedometer and Odometer.

Replace the cluster (see Section 8C)

7. Press the Reset EIM Knob on the cluster (Ignition Switch in RUN)

The Trip Odometer resets to zero

Replace the cluster (see Section 8C)

8. Put the Hazard Lights on

Both Turn Indicators flash on and off repeatedly

Refer to Exterior lights (8A - 110)

9. Rotate the Dimmer Switch (Ignition Switch in RUN)

Digital Display brightness varies with Dimmer Switch position

Do Test A: Dimmer Test

10. Rotate the Dimmer Switch with the Light Switch in the PARK position

Illumination Light brightness varies with Dimmer Switch position

Refer t o Interior Lights Dimming (8A - 117)

11.Turn Ignition from RUN to OFF

Security Indicator flashes (Theft Deterrent Only)

Refer t o Theft Deterrent (8A - 133)

If all results are normal, the system is OK.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS For Instrument Cluster removal and replacement procedures, see Section 8C of the Service Manual.

Do the tests listed for your symptom in the Table Or when directed by the System Check.

Tests follow the Symptom Table. • The Cluster Connector Pinout Voltage charts

are shown as Tests L and M.


INSTRUMENT PANEL: DIGITAL CLUSTER (Continued from previous page) DISPLAYS

CLUSTER

SPEEDMETEWODOMETERS

SYMPTOM TABLE Illumination lights do not light

Refer to Interior Lights Dimming (8A-117)

Display segments are not all lit or the digits displayed are incomplete Illumination brightness does not vary with the Dimmer Switch Digital display brightness does not vary with Dimmer Switch Digital displays do not change between English and Metric Display elements do not light at all Speedometer does not operate, Trip Odometer is OK

Replace the Cluster (see Section 8C)

Trip Odometer does not operate, Speedometer is OK Speedometer and Trip Odometer do not operate Trip Odometer will not reset to zero Trip Odometer resets each time ignition is switched off Odometer does not operate or reads incorrect miles Speedometer and Trip Odometer read incorrect values

FUEL

FOR DIAGNOSIS

SYMPTOM

Display always shows a flashing "En even with a full tank Display always shows this "- -" symbol Display reading is incorrect

Refer to Interior Lights Dimming (8A-117) Do Test A Replace the Instrument Cluster (see Section 8C) Do Test B Replace the Cluster (see Section 8C) Replace the cluster (see Section 8C) Refer to Vehicle Speed Sensor (optical type) See 8A-33 Replace the cluster (see Section 8C) Do Test C Check cable connection, then replace cluster Refer to Vehicle Speed Sensor (optical type) See 8A-33 Do Test D Do Test E Do Test F

-


-


w

(Continued from facing page) INDICATORS

OIL Indicator does not light in BULB TEST OIL Indicator lights constantly VOLTS Indicator does not light in BULB TEST VOLTS Indicator lights constantly BRAKE Indicator does not light BRAKE Indicator is on constantly WATER TEMP Indicator does not light in BULB TEST WATER TEMP Indicator lights constantly WATER TEMP Indicator does not light when Engine overheats. Indicator light lights in BULB TEST RH or LH turn signals won't light

Do Test G Do Test H Refer to Starter and Charging System (8A-30) Refer to Starter and Charging System (8A-30) Refer to Brake Warning System (8A-41) Refer to Brake Warning System (8A-41) Do Test J Replace the Coolant Temperature Switch Do Test I Refer t o Exterior Lights (See Test L Pins 6 and 16)

HIGH BEAM Indicator will not light FASTEN BELTS Indicator will not light SERVICE ENGINE SOON Indicator will not light during BULB TEST CRUISE Indicator does not light

Refer t o Warnings and Alarms (See Test L Pin 5, Refer to Computer Command Control (VIN A or Y) or Multi-port Fuel Injection (VIN 7)

TURBO POWER ECONOMY or Power lights do not come on SECURITY Indicator does not light

Refer Cruise (8A - 34) Do Test K Refer t o Theft Deterrent (8A - 133)

Refer to Headlights (See Test L Pin 8)


INSTRUMENT PANEL: DIGITAL CLUSTER (Continued from previous page)

D: FUEL GAGE SHORTED SENDER TEST

B: POWER INPUT TEST

A: DIMMER TEST

1

If all tests are correct, replace the Instrument Cluster (see Section 8C). 1. Replace the Dimmer Switch.

-

-

Connect: TEST LAMP At: CONNECTOR C2 (Disconnected) Condition: Ignition Switch: RUN Connect Between

1

'Orrect

Indication

Separate connector C312 (VIN 7) or C311 (VIN A or Y)and switch the Ignition Switch t o RUN. Observe the Fuel Gage.

1

For Diagnosis Incorrect Results

P (PNKIBLK) & Ground

Test Lamp lights

See 1

P (PNKIBLK) & S (BLKI WHT)

Test Lamp lights

See 2

If all tests are correct, replace the cluster (see Section 8C). 1. Check the PNKIBLK (239) wire for an open (see schematic). 2. Check the BLKIWHT (450) wire for an open (see schematic). -

If the Fuel Gages reads "--," replace the Fuel Gage Sending Unit. If the Fuel Gage displays a Flashing "E," check the PNK (30) wire for an open, If OK, replace the cluster (see Section 8C).

1

E: FUEL GAGE OPEN SENDER TEST At: CONNECTOR C312 (VIN 7), C311 (VIN A or Y) HARNESS SIDE (Disconnected) Condition :

C Jumper Between

Fuel Gage Ground

Connect: TEST LAMP At: CONNECTOR C2 (Disconnected)

U (ORN) & Ground

'Orrect

Result

Test Lamp lights

Result

For Diagnosis o f Incorrect Results

Do for VIN 7 only

C: MEMORY WIRE TEST

Connect Between

'Orrect

I For Diagnosis o f Incorrect Results

See 1

If the lamp lights, replace the Instrument Cluster (see Section 8C). 1. Check the ORN (40) wire for an open (see schematic).

Flashing "E"

I

Do for VIN A or Y only PNK & Ground

Fuel Gage displays a Flashing "E"

See 1

If the Fuel Gage displays a Flashing "E," replace the Fuel Gage sending unit. 1. Check the PNK (30) wire for an open. If the wire is OK, replace the cluster (see Section 8C).

-

J€NT PANEL: DIGITAL CLUSTER

INSTRU

F: FUEL GAGE SENDER ACCURACY TEST Replace the Fuel Gage Sender with a known good one and switch the Ignition to RUN. Observe the Fuel Gage.

If the OlUCHOKE Indicator is on, check the tan (31) wire for a short t o ground (see schematic).

I

I

B (TAN) & Ground

Result

I

OILICHOKE Indicator lights

I

Results

See

For Diagnosis Of lncorrect Results

Correct Result

Jumper Between

B (BK GRN) & Water Temp Ground Indicator lights

I

See 1

I

If t h e W a t e r T e m p Indicator lights, replace the Coolant Temperature Switch. 1. Check the DK GRN (35) wire for an open (see schematic).

For Diagnosis

Jumper Between

1

If the Oil Indicator lights, replace the Engine Oil Pressure Switch. 1. Check the TAN (31) wire and Flex Circuit for a n open (see schematic).

H: SHORTED OIL PRESSURE SWITCH TEST Disconnect the TAN (31) wire from the Oil Pressure Switch and switch the Ignition to RUN. Observe the OILICHOKE Indicator. If the OIUCHOKE lndicator is off, replace the Oil Pressure Switch.

At: TURBO BOOST INDICATOR SWITCH CONNECTORS (Disconnected) Condition:

1

At: COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Condition: lanition Switch: RUN

If the Fuel Gage still displays an incorrect fuel level, replace the Instrument Cluster.

At: ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Condition: lanition Switch: RUN

1 Connect: FUSED JUMPER

I:OPEN WATER TEMP WIRE

If the Fuel Gage now displays the correct fuel level, permanently replace the Fuel Gage Sender.

G: OPEN OIL PRESSURE SWITCH TEST

K: TURBO BOOST SWITCH TEST

1

B (DK GRN) & Battery

1

1

For Diagnosis ~f Incorrect Result Results

Test Lamp lights

Result

1

For Diagnosis o f Incorrect Results

Do only if the YEL Economy Light does not light.

1

B (WHTIBLK) Economy Light & Ground lights

1

See

Do only if the ORN Power Light does not light. Power Light lights

I

See

1 I 1

If both tests yield the correct response, replace the Turbo Boost Indicator Switch with a known good one. If lights still do not operate, see section 6. 1. Check the WHTIBLK (902) wire for a n open (see schematic). 2. Check the BLUIYEL (903) wire for a n open (see schematic).

At: COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWTICH CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Condition: lgnition Switch: BULB TEST 'Orrect

1

( A &(BLUIYEL) ( Ground

J: OPEN WlRE TEST

Connect

I

Jumper Between

1

See 1

1. Check the DK GRN (35) wire between ClOO and Terminal G1 of C1 for an open. If the wire is OK, replace the Ignition Switch. (Continued on next page)

I

INSTRUMENT PANEL: INDICATORS CLUSTER

II 00

N

L: CONNECTOR C1 PINOUT TEST

--

-L

IGNITION SWITCH IN RUN EXCEPT FOR RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS

MEASURETO GROUND UNLESS ANOTHER TERMINAL IS GIVEN

"OILICHOKE" INDICATOR. GROUNDED WlTH ENGINE OFF. SEE TESTS G, H.

I

"OIL", "VOLTS", "BRAKE", AND "WATER T E M P INDICATORS. BAlTERY VOLTAGE IN RUN.

CLUSTER CONNECTOR C1 AS SEEN FROM THE DRIVER'S SEAT WlTH THE DIGITAL CLUSTER REMOVED

CONNECTOR C1 IS ON THE LEFT SIDE

IF THE CORRECT VOLTAGE OR ..- - .- .....- - .- .

- - ..- . ..

...-

TERMINALS, AND THE CLUSTER FUNCTION THAT USES THOSE TERMINALS DOES NOT OPERATE. REPLACE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (CHECK BULBS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT FIRST.)

IF THE CORRECT VOLTAGE OR RESISTANCE IS NOT FOUND AT A TERMINAL, DO THE TEST GIVEN OR GO TO THE PAGE REFERRED ~-

-

~

-- -

~

-

9

10 (BLK 150)

I

-


-

-

M: CONNECTOR C 2 PINOUT TEST IGNITION SWITCH IN RUN EXCEPT FOR RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS

MEASURE TO GROUND UNLESS ANOTHER TERMINAL IS GIVEN

NOT USED

NOT USED

CLUSTER CONNECTOR C2 AS SEEN FROM THE DRIVER'S SEAT WITH THE DIGITAL CLUSTER REMOVED CONNECTOR C2 IS ON THE RIGHT SIDE IF THE CORRECT VOLTAGE OR RESISTANCE IS FOUND AT THE TERMINALS, AND THE CLUSTER FUNCTION THAT USES THOSE TERMINALS DOES NOT OPERATE, REPLACE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (CHECK BULBS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT FIRST)

IF THE CORRECT VOLTAGE OR RESISTANCE IS NOT FOUND AT A TERMINAL, DO THE TEST GIVEN OR GO TO THE PAGE REFERRED

NOT USED

NOT USED


-


TURBO BOOST INDICATORS

WATER TEMP

CIRCUIT OPERATION

With the Ignition Switch in RUN, BULB TEST, or START, current flows through the GAGES Fuse, the two TURBO POWER Indicators and the Turbo Boost Indicator Switch to ground. At intake manifold pressure of 2.5-10 in. Hg (inches of mercury), the low boost switch closes. The yellow indicator comes on. Above 10 in. Hg, the high boost switch closes. The orange indicator comes on.

With the Ignition Switch in BULB TEST or START, battery voltage is applied to the WATER TEMP Indicator through the GAGES Fuse. With the Ignition Switch in BULB TEST, current flows through the WATER TEMP Bulb, the DK GRN (35) wire, and the Ignition Switch to ground, causing the WATER TEMP Indicator to light. With the Ignition Switch in RUN, battery voltage is applied to the Coolant Temperature Switch Circuit. When the coolant temperature is above 250°F the Coolant Temperature switch closes, lighting the WATER TEMP Indicator.

The operation of a n indicator is explained in the operation of its circuit. See the circuit referred to for the complete operation of a n indicator and the other components that work with it. Only the gages and indicators that do not appear in other schematics are described in this section. DIGITAL DISPLAYS

With the Light Switch in OFF, no voltage is applied to the GRY (8) wire. The Digital Display shows maximum brightness. With the Light Switch in PARK, or HEAD, battery voltage is applied to the Display Dim Enable Input at the Instrument Cluster. Voltage also applied through the instrument cluster dimmer and the INST LPS Fuse GRY (8) wire to the Instrument Cluster. Voltage applied to the Dim Display Input varies as the dimmer is moved. The digital display dims as the voltage is reduced to this input.

FUEL GAGE DISPLAY

Voltage from the Instrument Cluster (Digital) is applied to the Fuel Tank Unit. The resistance of the Fuel Sender changes with the amount of fuel in the tank. With a full tank the resistance is 90 ohms, and with an empty tank the resistance is less than 6 ohms. The information processor is programmed to account for battery voltage changes. Therefore, changes in battery voltage do not affect the fuel gage reading.

SPEEDOMETER DISPLAY

OIUCHOKE INDICATOR

Voltage is applied to the Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer from the GAGES Fuse, with the Ignition Switch in RUN, BULB TEST, or START. Vehicle Speed Sensor input voltage is applied to the Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer from a g e n e r a t o r mounted in the transaxle. The number of pulses per second from the Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer varies with the speed of rotation of the shaft.

With the Ignition Switch in RUN, BULB TEST or START, battery voltage is applied to the OIL/ CHOKE Indicator through the GAGES Fuse. This allows current to flow through the normally closed Engine Oil Pressure Switch and TAN (31) wire to light the OILJCHOKE Indicator. When the engine is running, oil pressure exceeds 27kPa (4 PSI), this opens t h e Engine Oil Pressure Switch, causing the OILICHOKE Indicator to go out. Whenever the oil pressure dips below 27kPa (4PSI) the oil pressure switch closes, lighting the OILJCHOKE Indicator.

i I

11

SEE POWER OlSTRl6UTlON

25AMP

I

7T

WIPER/ ASHER

=



u BLK 1202049 1

C815

C2 BLK

C1 BLK

V00008.0 WiperlWasher Motor Module

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WiperlWasher Motor Module . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment, near brake master cylinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . C815 (7 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, on RH side of steering column . . . .

201-12-A 201- 9-B 201- 9-B 201-13-A


1. Check the WIPER Fuse by visual inspection. 2. Check that the three Wiper Motor mounting bolts are clean and tight. 3. Check that the WiperlWasher Switch connector ((2815)is correctly mated. 4. If the Washer does not operate, check that: - Washer reservoir is filled. - Hoses are not pinched or kinked. - Hoses are correctly attached. - Nozzles are not clogged. Go to System Check for a guide t o normal operation. Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

SYSTEM CHECK Use the System Check Table as a guide to normal operation. Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of Symptoms and Diagnostic Steps.


Hold t h e Washer Switch ON for one or two seconds

Turn t h e Wiper Switch to LO Turn the Wiper Switch to H I Turn the Wiper Switch to MIST, and release Turn the Wiper Switch to OFF

NORMAL OPERATION

Washer sprays the windshield as long as Washer Switch is held ON Wipers run a t low speed and continue to run in LO after washer cycle is completed Wipers run continuously at low speed Wipers run continuously a t a f a s t e r speed Wipers make one complete sweep and then park Wipers complete sweep at low speed and park




DO TEST

Wipers do not oper- A. WiperIWasher Switch Battery ate in any mode Voltage Test B. WiperlWasher Motor Module Input Test Wipers run in low B. WiperIWasher Motor Module speed only Input Test Wipers will not shut B. WiperlWasher Motor Module off Input Test Wipers run in high B. WiperIWasher Motor Module speed only Input Test Washer will not oper- C. Washer Motor Module Voltage ate Test Washer runs contin- B. WiperlWasher Motor Module uously Input Test

w!

WIPER1

SHER

=

A: WIPERIWASHER SWITCH BATTERY VOLTAGE TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: WIPERMASHER SWITCH CONNECTOR (C815) (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: ACCY Measure Between

Correct Voltage

B: WIPERIWASHER MOTOR MODULE


INPUT TEST

CONNECTORS C1 & C 2 (Connected)

Check that the WiperlWasher Switch connector (C815)is correctly mated. If OK, replace the WiperlWasher Switch. 4. Replace the WiperlWasher Switch.

C: WASHER MOTOR MODULE VOLTAGE TEST

For Diagnosis

(WHT)& Battery See 1 Ground If voltage is correct, do Test B. 1. Check Wiper Fuse and WHT (93)wire for an open (see schematic).

At: WIPERIWASHER MOTOR MODULE CONNECTOR C1 (Connected)

Module for repair (see Section 8E for diagnostic procedures). 1. Check the DK GRN (95)wire for an open. Check that the WiperlWasher Switch connector (C815) is correctly mated. If OK, replace the WiperlWasher Switch. 2. Check the GRY (91) wire for an open. Check that the WiperlWasher Switch connector (C815) is correctly mated. If OK, replace the WiperIWasher Switch.

. Check PNK (94) wire for an open. Check

(Continuedin next column) (Continued on next page)

(Continued from previous page) CIRCUIT OPERATION LO SPEED

When the WiperlWasher Switch is in the LO position, battery voltage is applied to the Park Relay through the GRY wire. This closes the relay contacts and supplies battery voltage to the Wiper Motor through the DK GRN and YEL wires. The wiper blades run continuously. When the WiperlWasher Switch is turned to the OFF position, the Wiper Motor still receives battery voltage and still runs. A mechanical arm riding on a wheel attached to the Wiper Motor keeps the relay contacts closed until the wipers park or complete the last sweep. After this last sweep the mechanical arm falls into a detent permitting the relay contacts to open. This stops the Wiper Motor, and the wiper blades remain in park. HI SPEED

When the WiperlWasher Switch is in the HI position, the same Park Relay operation occurs. However, battery voltage is applied to the high speed brushes of the Wiper Motor through the PPL wire. The wipers run continuously a t a higher speed. When the WiperlWasher Switch is turned OFF, the wiper blades will move a t low speed for the final sweep and then park. MIST

When the WiperIWasher Control is moved to MIST and released, the wipers make one sweep at low speed and return to park. Circuit operation is the same as that of LO.

WASHER OPERATION

When the Washer Switch is pressed ON, battery voltage is applied to the Washer Motor as well as mechanically advancing the Wiper Switch to LO. The Washer sprays the windshield as long as its switch is held ON. The wipers must be turned off manually after the wash cycle. The Wiper Motor is protected by a Circuit Breaker. The Circuit Breaker will open if the wiper blades are blocked, by ice on the windshield, for example. The Circuit Beaker resets automatically when it cools.

WIPERIWASHER: PULSE


C 100, See Page 202-0

C1 BLK

C2 BLK

V00008.0

WiperlWasher tvlotor Module

BLK 1202049 1 C815

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WiperlWasher Motor Module. . . . . LH rear of engine compartment, near brake master cylinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . C815 (7 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, on RH side of steering column . . . .

201-12-A 201- 9-B 201- 9-B 201-13-A

WIPEWASHER: PULSE SYSTEM CHECK TABLE


1. Check Wiper Fuse by visual inspection.

2. Check that the three Wiper Motor mounting bolts are clean and tight. 3. Check that Wiper~WasherSwitch connector (C815) is mated correctly. 4. If Washer does not operate, check that: Washer reservoir is filled Hoses are not pinched or kinked

Hoses are correctly attached Nozzles are not clogged Go to System Check for a guide to normal operation. Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.


I

- -

I

NORMAL OPERATION

I

Washer sprays windshield as long as Washer Switch is held ON. I t continues to spray for 2% seconds after switch is released. Wipers run at low speed and continue for approximately 6 seconds after washer cycle is completed and then return to park. Wipers make one 2. Turn Wiper Switch to PULSE complete stroke then pause for 0 to 25 (Delay Mode). seconds before making the next stroke. The wait time is adjusted by turning Wiper Switch through the delay range. (Continued in next column)

1. Hold Washer Switch ON for one or two seconds.

Continued from previous column) Washer sprays 3. With Wiper windshield as long as Switch in Washer Switch is PULSE, push held ON. Washer Switch to ON for one or two Wipers run at low seconds. speed during spray period and continue running for approximately 6 seconds after washer stops. Wipers return to PULSE operation. Wipers run 4. Turn Wiper continuously a t low Switch to LO. meed.

6. Turn Wiper Switch to OFF. 7. Turn Wiper Switch to MIST.

Wipers return to park position at low speed. Wipers make one complete stroke and then park.


SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Do the Tests listed for your symptom in the Symptom Table below. Tests follow the Symptom Table.



SYMPTOM

Wipers do not operate in any mode.

No delay in Pulse Mode. Wipers will not shut off. Wipers run at high speed only (low speed inoperative). Washer will not operate, but Wipers run.

Wipers run at low speed only (high speed inoperative).

A: Wipermasher Battery Voltage Test B: Wipermasher Motor Module Input Voltage Test C: Wipermasher Pulse Control Resistance Test B: Wipermasher Motor Module Input Voltage Test B: WiperIWasher Motor Module Input Voltage Test D: Washer Motor Voltage Test B: Wiper Motor Module Input Voltage Test

I

Measure Between

&

I i:::,I ": 1 I I 1 For Diagnosis

Battery

See 1

If voltage is correct, return to Symptom lhble. 1. Check Wiper Fuse and WHT (93) wire for an open.

B: WIPEWASHER MOTOR MODULE INPUT VOLTAGE TEST At: WIPEWASHER MOTOR MODULE CONNECTORS C1 & C2 (Connected)

(Continued from ~reviouscolumn) Wiper Switch in OFF, LO, & MIST

I

I

ClID (PNK) & See 4 Ground If all voltages are correct but Wiper1 Washer Motor Module does not operate normally, remove the Wipermasher Motor Module for repair. See Section 8E for diagnostic procedures. 1. Check the DK GRN (95) wire for an open. If wire is good, replace the Wipermasher Switch. 2. Check the GRY (91) wire for an open. If wire is good, replace the Wipermasher Switch. 3. Check the PPL (92) wire for an open. If wire is good, replace the WiperIWasher Switch. 4. Check the PNK (94) wire for an open. If wire is good, replace the WiperJWasher Switch.

C: WIPEWASHER PULSE CONTROL RESISTANCE TEST Measure: RESISTANCE At: WIPEWASHER MOTOR MODULE CONNECTOR C1 (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: OFF Negative Battery Terminal Disconnected Wiper Switch: LO

-

A: WIPEWASHER BAlTERY VOLTAGE TEST At: WIPEWASHER SWITCH CONNECTOR C815 (Disconnected) Conditions:

(Continued in next column) (Continued in next column)


WIPEWASHER: PULSE (Continued from previous page)

Correct Measure Between

Correct Resistance

C (DK GRN) Approximately 24 K ohms & D (PNK)

For Diagnosis

See

Move Wiper Switch through delay range to maximum delay position. Resistance C (DK GRN) increases to & D (PNK) approximately 1.2 Megohms

LO SPEED


See 1

If resistance are correct but Pulse Mode does not operate, remove the Wiper Motor Module for repair. (See Section 8E for diagnostic instructions). 1. Check PNK (94) and DK GRN (95) wires for opens. If wires are good, replace the WiperIWasher Switch.

D: WASHER MOTOR VOLTAGE TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: WIPEWASHER MOTOR MODULE Conditions: Remove Washer Motor (see Section 8E for procedure) Ignition Switch: ACCY Washer Switch: ON


I

I

I

I

For Diagnosis

I

1

Positive Washer Motor Battery See 1 Terminal & I Ground I I If voltage is correct, replace the Washer Motor (see Section 8E for procedure). 1. Replace Wiper Cover and solid-state Control Board.

I

I I

CIRCUIT OPERATION PULSE

With the WipertWasher Switch in PULSE, voltage is applied to the PNK and GRY wires to the Wipermasher Motor Module and the solidstate Control Board. The Control Board momentarily supplies battery voltage to the coil of the Park Relay to start the Wiper Motor. After the wipers have started, the contacts of the Park Relay are held closed by a mechanical arm until wipers have completed their stroke and have parked. They remain parked until the Control Board again applies a battery voltage pulse to start another sweep cycle. The length of delay time between sweeps is controlled by the variable PULSE Delay resistor. The delay is adjustable from 0 to 25 seconds.

In the LO position, the Wiper~WasherSwitch supplies voltage to the DK GRN as well as the PNK and GRY wires. The Park Relay is energized continuously. Battery voltage is applied to the relay contacts and the Wiper Motor. I t runs continuously. HI SPEED

With the Wipermasher Switch in the HI position, battery voltage is supplied directly to the Wiper Motor, without passing the Park Relay contacts. The PPL wire is connected to a separate armature terminal for high speed operation. When turned off from HI, the wipers complete the last sweep at low speed and park. To do this, the Wiper Motor receives battery voltage in the OFF position of the Wiper Switch. This is applied through the GRY wire to terminal B of C1. The Wiper Motor is protected by a Circuit Breaker. If the wipers are obstructed by snow or ice, the Circuit Breaker will sense the high current through the motor and open the circuit. The Circuit Breaker resets automatically when it cools.

WASHER

When the Washer Switch is turned on, battery voltage is applied to the Control Board through the PNK and GRY wires. The Control Board turns on the Washer Motor for approximately 2% seconds. The voltage on the GRY wire also operates the Park Relay. The Control Board turns on the Wiper Motor at low speed, which continues for approximately 6 seconds after the washer stops. If the wipers have been OFF or in PULSE, LO, or HI, they would revert to that operation after the wash cycle. If the Washer Switch is held for more than 1 second, this is noted by circuits on the Control Board which then keeps the Washer Motor on only as long as the Switch is held. The wipers also come on at low speed and continue for approximately 6 seconds after the Washer Switch is released. Then they return to park position. MIST

When the Wiper/Washer Switch is turned to MIST and released, the wipers make one sweep at low speed and return to park. The circuit operation is the same as that of LO or MIN DELAY.

HEADLIGHTS CD

3 RED

-

2

SEE POWER DlSTRlBUTION

INSTRUMENT

--

SEE GROUND OlSTRlSUTlON

-

----

DISTRIBUTtDN

-

-

a!

HEADL

TS

m


C 100, See Page 202-0

COMPONENT LOCATION Fusible Link B (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near starter solenoid

........ Fusible Link B (VIN A). . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Fusible Link B (VIN Y). . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Headlight Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . On LH side of steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On front fender, behind LH front lights. . . . . . . G103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On RH front fender, behind headlights . . . . . . . G104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, to left of steering column. . . . . . . . . S210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front lights harness, behind LH front lights. . . S212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front lights harness, behind RH front lights. . . S213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP Harness, above radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front lights harness, behind LH front lights. . .

lnstrument Cluster Connector (Digital), See Page 82-5

WHT 12020031 Light Switch

BLK8917693

Headlight Dimmer Switch

Page-Figure


201- 6-B 201- 0-A 201- 5-A 201-11-B 201- 9-B 201-20-E 201-214 201-15-A 201-20-C 201-21-A 201-16-A 201-20-C

TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Try the following checks before doing the System Diagnosis.

1. If Headlights on one side are on dimly, check the ground on that side. 2. If Hi Beams do not light, but the BRIGHT Indicator lights, check LT GRN (11)wire for an open. 3. If one Headlight doesn't work, check the connections, Headlight, and wires to the Headlight. 4. If Headlights do not turn off, without Twilight Sentinel, replace Light Switch; with Twilight Sentinel, go to Page 8A-101. Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.


A: ALL HEADLIGHTS INOPERATIVE OR INTERMITTENT (TABLE 1)

B: LO BEAMS ON BOTH SIDES ARE INOPERATIVE, OR HI BEAMS AND BRIGHT INDICATOR ARE INOPERATIVE

Connect: TEST LAMP At: LIGHT SWITCH CONNECTOR (Connected) Condition: Light Switch: HEAD

At: HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH CONNECTOR (Connected)

I

Connect Between


( CgruyDddI &Lights I I

I

1

see 1

& Go to Table 2 Lights Ground If both results are correct, go to Test B. 1. Check Fusible Link B and RED (2) wire for an open.

I ( I

I

A: ALL HEADLIGHTS INOPERATIVE OR INTERMITTENT (TABLE 2)

I Connect: A FUSED JUMPER At: LIGHT SWITCH CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: Put a 15 amp fuse in the fused jumper Dimmer Switch: LO

SYMPTOM TABLE

B: Lo Beams on both sides are inoperative or Hi Beams and BRIGHT Indicator are

Jumper Between

1

I

Correct Result

For Diagnosis

Headlights C (RED)& D See 1 light (YEL) Put Dimmer Switch in H I Hi Beams C (RED)& D See 1 light (YEL) If results are correct, replace Light Switch. 1. Check for short to ground in wiring to Headlights.

I

lights for an open. 1. Check YEL (10)wire for an open. 2. Replace Dimmer Switch.

CIRCUIT OPERATION Voltage is applied to the Light Switch at all times. The Light Switch includes a self resetting circuit breaker. When the Headlight circuit draws too much current, the circuit breaker opens, and interrupts the current flow. With no current flow, the circuit breaker cools off and resets automatically. When the Light Switch is in HEAD, the Dimmer Switch directs voltage to either the Lo Beams or the Hi Beams. The BRIGHT Indicator receives voltage along with the Hi Beams.

-

HEADLIGHTS WITH TWILIGHT SENTINEL


C 100, See Page 202-0

COMPONENT LOCATION Convenience Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fusible Link B (VIN 7) . . . . . . . . . . Fusible Link B (VIN A). . . . . . . . . . Fusible Link B (VIN Y). . . . . . . . . . Headlight Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sentinel Amplifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sentinel Photocell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C367 (2 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C368 (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GI04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S826. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page-Figure Behind IIP, left of radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . Engine harness, near starter solenoid . . . . . . . . On LH side of steering column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base of steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, right of radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top center of IIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, left of heater-AIC control head . . . . Behind IIP, right of radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, to left of steering column. . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above fuse block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, near brake pedal arm . . . . . . . . . . .

C2

C1

BLK

BLK8917693

Headlight Dimmer Switch

VOOOI 9.0

Ignition Switch

BLK 12034299

Conveniece Center (Chime Module)

-

BLU

201-15-A 201-12-A 201- 6-B 201- 0-A 201- 5-A 201-11-B 201-13-A 201-13-D 201-13-D 201- 9-B 201-13-D 201-13-D 201-15-A 201-16-A 201-13-B 201-12-A

HEADLIGHTS WITH TWILIGHT SENTINEL HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES


I I

A B C D E F G H J K L M

BLK8911258 Sentinel Amplifier

Sentinel Control

-


1. If the lights stay on with Ignition Switch OFF and in daylight, check for a disconnected or open BLK (151)wire to terminal B of the Sentinel Amplifier connector.

2. If the lights turn on in daylight when Ignition Switch is turned on, check if the Sentinel Photocell has fallen from its mounting position.

3. If either the Headlights or the park lights, but not both, will not turn off, disconnect the

Sentinel Amplifier. - If lights go off, replace the Amplifier. - If lights don't go off, replace the Light Switch.

SYSTEM CHECK Use the System Check table as a guide to normal operation. Refer to the Diagnosis given if other results occur. Tests follow in System Diagnosis.

Go to the System Check for a guide to normal operation. Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.


NORMAL RESULT

FOR DIAGNOSIS

With Sentinel Control OFF, put Light Switch in PARK.

Park and taillights go on.

See 8A-110.

Put Light Switch in HEAD, Dimmer Switch in LO.

Headlights go on.

See 8A-100

Put Light Switch in OFF.

Headlights and park lights go off.

Do Test A

Turn Sentinel Control ON, cover Sentinel Photocell with a dark cloth, and put Ignition in RUN.

Headlights and park lights go on within 60 seconds.

No lights go on: Do Test B. Headlights or Park lights go on: Do Test A.

Remove cloth and shine bright light on Photocell.

Lights turn off after 10 and before 60 seconds

Do Test C

Cover Photocell and wait for lights to turn on. wait 15 seconds, then turnl e t i o n switch OFF.

Lights turn off after a time delay, a few seconds with control is minimum delay position and 1 112 to 4 112 minutes in MAX

Do Test A

Open Driver's Door

Chime does not sound

Do Test C

Put Light Switch in PARK

Warning chime sounds.

Do Test C.


HEADLIGHTS WITH TWILIGHT SENTINEL (Continued from previous page)

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Do the tests listed for your symptom in the Symptom Table below, or when directed by the System Check.

r

SYMPTOM TABLE Lights turn on and off a t wrong light levels when operated with Twilight Sentinel: Lights do not turn on in darkness: Lights do not go off in bright light: Lights do not stay on for adjustable time after Ignition is turned OFF: Lights-on warning does not operate, or sounds when it should not; all other Twilight Sentinel functions operate normally:

I

Measure Between

FOR DIAGNOSIS

I t:i I

I Lgrz,"I Do Test B

Do Test A

Do Test C

-

(

For Diagnosis

I

open

I

Jumper Between


(WHT)&

Headlights go off within 60 Go To Table 3. seconds

I

L(PPL)&O I 0 See 1 Turn Twilight Sentinel Control OFF

Do Test D

Do Test A

Connect: A FUSED JUMPER At: TWILIGHT SENTINEL AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR (Connected) Conditions: Ignition Swtich: RUN Light Switch: OFF Twilight Sentinel Control: ON

Measure: RESISTANCE At: TWILIGHT SENTINEL CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: Light Switch: OFF Negative Battery Cable: DISCONNECTED Twilight Sentinel Control: ON


SYMPTOM

A: AMPLIFIER TEST (TABLE 2)


I

I

See 2

H (DK GRNI WHT) & D See 3 (ORN) Turn Twilight Sentinel Control between MINandMAX 500 ohms to A (BLKIYEL) 250,000 ohms See & E (LT GRN) Varies with control If all resistances are correct, go to table 2. 1. Check Sentinel Control, PPL wire, and BLK wire (150) for an open (see schematic). 2. Check Sentinel Control and PPL (271) wire for short (see schematic). 3. Check Light Switch and ORN (273) wire for an open (see schematic). 4. Check Sentinel Control, BLKIYEL (270) wire, and LT GRN (272)wire for an open (see schematic).

1

If Headlights go off within 60 seconds and do not go off normally in daylight, check the WHT (278)and BLK (279)wires for an open, then replace the Photocell as necessary.

Measure: VOLTAGE At: SENTINEL AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Swtich: RUN Light Switch: OFF Measure Between

I

M (RED1 WHT) & Ground

Correct votlaae

I

H (DK GRNI WHT) & Ground &

Ground

For Diagnosis

Battery

Battery

I Ic

I I

Battery

I I ISee5

I

I

I

see3

(PNKIWHT) Battery & Ground I I Turn Ignition Switch OFF. C (PNKIWHT) &Ground O H (DK GRNl WHT) & Ground

I

I

(ORN)& Ground

I

I I

F(YEL)8r 0 Ground I I Turn Light Switch to PARK

I

See 4

See6

B: PHOTOCELL TEST



1

I

Battery

See 7

Battery

See 8

If all the voltages are correct, replace Twilight Sentinel Amplifier. 1. Check Light Switch and REDIWHT (2) wire for open or short (see schematic) 2. Check BLK (150) wire for an open (see schematic). 3. Check TAIL LP Fuse and ORN (240)wire for an open (see schematic). 4. Check PNKIWHT (3)wire for an open and check Igniton Switch (see schematic). 5. Replace Ignition Switch. 6. Replace Light Switch. 7. Check Light Switch and ORN (240),BRN (9), and DK GRNIWHT (274)wires for an open (see schematic). 8. Check Light Switch and YEL (10)wire for an open (see schematic).

Separate: CONNECTOR At: PHOTOCELL CONNECTOR C367 (Disconnected) Conditions: lgnition Swtich: RUN Twilight Sentinel Control: ON Light Switch: OFF Action

Correct Result

For Diagnosis

Separate Lights go on Photocell Do Test A within 60 connector seconds If the lights go on within 60 seconds but they did not go with the Photocell connected and in darkness, replace the Photocell.

I

F(YEL)& 0 See6 Ground H (DK GRNl WHT) & Battery Ground Turn Light Switch to HEAD (Continued in next column)


HEADLIGHTS WITH TWILIGHT SENTINEL I (Continued from previous page)

C: CHIME TEST INEL AMPLIFIER

D: PHOTOCELL SUBSlTUTlON TEST Connect a known good Photocell in place of the suspect Photocell, and operate Twilight Sentinel. If lights turn on and off at proper light levels, replace the old Photocell. If lights still turn on and off at improper levels, replace Sentinel Amplifier.

CIRCUIT OPERATION

If all voltages are correct, check wiring to Audio Alarm Assembly for an open, and check Audio Alarrn System. 1. Check circuit 301 and 985 for a short to ground, then do Test C.

The Twilight Sentinel system automatically turns the driving lights on and off according to light conditions. The system also keeps the lights on for a selected amount of time after the driver has parked and left the car. The system can be turned off to give the driver manual control over the lights. Voltage is applied a t all times through a hot circuit breaker and the Light Switch to the Sentinel Photocell and Sentinel Amplifier a t terminal M. Voltage is also applied at all times through the TAIL LP Fuse to both Light Switch terminal 5 and Sentinel Amplifier terminal K. With the Light Switch OFF, voltage is applied from the Light Switch to terminal D when the Sentinel Amplifier is powering the parWturnlmarker lights and Instrument Cluster lights. This cancels the Lights-On Warning. When the Light Switch is in HEAD or PARK, no voltage is applied to terminal D and the Lights-On Warning will function normally.

The Twilight Sentinel System is triggered by a control voltage from the Ignition Switch and current through the Sentinel Photocell. With the Ignition Switch in RUN, BULB TEST, or START, a control voltage is applied through the PNK and PNKIWHT wires to terminal C of the Sentinel Amplifier. When the Photocell senses darkness outside the car, voltage at terminal J changes, and the Sentinel Amplifier turns on the exterior lights. Voltage at terminal M is applied to terminal F, and feeds the Headlight circuit. Voltage through terminals K and H feeds the other exterior lights. The Amplifier turns the lights off if the Photocell senses light. If the Ignition Switch is moved to OFF, the Sentinel Control will cause a delay of five (5)seconds to three (3)minutes and then turn the lights off. This delay is set by changing the resistance of the Delay Rheostat (in the Sentinel Control). When the Delay Rheostat is turned to OFF, the path to ground at terminal L of the Sentinel Amplifier is opened. The system is turned off. The Sentinel Amplifier does not react instantly to photocell signals. Turn-on or turnoff is delayed about 30 seconds. This avoids needless operation for short peroids of time.

ul

EXTERIOR LIGHTS: TURNIHAZARDISTOP

-

EXTERIOR LIGHTS: TURNIHAZARDISTOP HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A Inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In trunk, behind center of rear seat . . . . . . . . . . 201-21-D

BLK 12004147 C 104

pmq

BLK

1

ELK

ELK

],

t BLK

BLK

z II

EXTERIOR LIGHTS: TURNIHAZARDISTOP TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Try the following checks before doing the System Diagnosis.

1. If neither the Turn Lights nor Back Up Lights work, check the TURN B/U Fuse. 2. If neither the Stop Lights nor Hazard Lights work, check the STOP-HAZ Fuse.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

A: TURN LIGHTS TEST



DO TEST

3. If the Stop Lights do not work, check the Brake Switch, and ORN (140) wire for continuity (see schematic).

Turn Lights do not work but Hazard Lights do

A: Turn Lights Test

4. If Stop Lights do not turn off, adjust or replace the Brake Switch as necessary.

Hazard Lights do not operate but Stop Lights do Stop Lights do not work but the signals work Stop-Turn Lights on one or both sides do not work

B: Hazard Lights Test

5. If the High Level Stop Light does not work, check bulb, LT BLU (820) and BLK (150) wires for an open. Repairlreplace as necessary. 6. For any of the following symptoms replace the Turn-Hazard Switch Assembly: -Some Turn Lights work and all Hazard Lights work. -Some Hazard Lights work and all ~ u k n Lights work. - Hazard lights do not turn off. 7. If Turn Indicator and Front Turn Light on

one side are inoperative, check the connection at C104B, then replace Turn-Hazard Switch Assembly as necessary. 8. If Turn Lights stay on (do not flash) in both TURN LEFT and TURN RIGHT, replace the Turn Flasher. 9. If Hazard Lights stay on (do not flash) in HAZARD, but Stop Lights go off normally, replace the Hazard Flasher.

10. If only one light does not operate, check bulb, socket and related wiring (see schematic). Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

4.

Connect: TEST LAMP At: CONNECTOR C104B (Connected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN For Diagnosis

Correct Result

Connect Between

Test Lamp L (PPL) & See 1 lights Ground If the Test Lamp lights, replace Turn-Hazai-d Switch Assembly. 1. Check Turn Flasher and PPL (16) wire for an open.

C: Stop Lights Test

B: HAZARD LIGHTS TEST (TABLE 1) C: Stop Lights Test

Park Lights do not turn off

D: Park Lights Short Test

Coach Lights do not work but Tail Lights do

E: Inverter Test

Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: HAZARD FLASHER CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: Hazard Switch: HAZARD Jumper Between

ORN & BRN

I

Correct Result

All Turn Lights turn on

I

For Diagnosis

See 1

If the result is correct, replace the Hazard Flasher. 1. Go to Table 2.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS: TURNIHAZARDISTOP D: PARK LIGHTS SHORT TEST (TABLE 1)

B: HAZARD LIGHTS TEST (TABLE 2) Measure: VOLTAGE At: CONNECTOR C104B (Disconnected) Conditions: Hazard Flasher: CONNECTED Measure Between

(BRN) & Ground

I

1

I I

1

Correct Voltage

Battery

I I

1

For Diagnosis

See 1

If the voltage is correct, replace the TurnHazard Switch Assembly. 1. Check ORN (140) and BRN (27) wires for a n open.

At: Sentinal Amplifier Connector (if equipped) (Disconnected)

II I

E: INVERTER TEST

Action

I

I


Disconnect I I Connector Lights turn off from Sentinel Amplifier

I

1. Go to Table 2.

I

I

Disconnect: CONNECTOR At: LIGHT SWITCH I

Action

I

I (

results are correct, check bulb, connecn and related wiring. 1. Check the Brake Switch, WHT (17) and ORN (140) wires for continuity.

Disconnect Connector from Light Switch


Lights turn off

I

Diagnosis

C1/4 & C2/1

Battery

See 2

See 1

1

If lights go off, replace light switch. 1. Check BRN (9) wire for a short to voltage.

~ 2 1 2& ~ 2 1 3

1

110volts

I

See 3

1

If the above results are correct, check the Electroluminescent lights, D K BLU (351) and WHT (352)wires for opens. 1. Check Coach Lights and BRN (9) wires for opens (see schematic). 2. Check BLK (150)wire for an open. 3. Replace the inverter.

D: PARK LIGHTS SHORT TEST (TABLE 2)

At: CONNECTOR C104B (Connected)

Correct Result

Set J 34029-A or equivalent multimeter to AC V 200.

If lights turn off, go to 8A-101.

C: STOP LIGHTS TEST

Measure Between

I

See 1

1

I

Measure: VOLTAGE At: INVERTER CONNECTOR (Connected) Conditions: Light Switch: PARK

I

1 I

CIRCUIT OPERATION Rear Turn Lights

If the turn left switches in the Turn-Hazard Switch Assembly are closed to the left, the StopTurn light comes on. Battery voltage is applied to the Turn Flasher, the hazard switch, the turn left switch, and the YEL wire. The LH Front Turn Light and the LH Turn Indicator also come on. They are fed through the LT BLU wire. The current through the bulbs heats the Turn Flasher. It opens and closes to flash the left turn lights. The right turn lights operate in a simliar way when the two light switches are closed to the right. (Continued on next page)

EXTERIOR LIGHTS: TURNIHAZARDISTOP (Continued from previous page) If the Brake Switch is closed at the same time the left turn switch is closed, the LH Turn Lights will continue to receive power through the Turn Flasher. The RH Rear Stop-Turn Light comes on steadily as long as the Brake Switch is closed. Hazard Lights If the Hazard switches are moved to the Hazard lights will flash simulposition, the taneously. In this situation, power for all the lamps comes through the Hazard Flasher. Stop Lights

Voltage is applied directly from the Brake Switch to the High Level Stop Light. The Stop-Turn Lights receive voltage through the WHT wire that feeds the TurnHazard Switch. With the switches in the positions shown in the schematic, the Stop-Turn Lights are connected to the WHT wire through the YEL and DK GRN wires and the turn switches. They will come on when the Brake Switch is closed.

EXTERI~ I G H T S TURNIHAZARDIMARKERIPARK :

EXTERIOR LIGHTS: TURNIHAZARDIMARKERIPARK I I


COMPONENT LOCATION Page-Figure Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 9-B

a a

0


BLK 12015454

C898 Instrument Panel Connector (Indicators Cluster), See Page 80-6

C899, See C898

Instrument Panel Connector (Digital Cluster), See Page 82-5

z

G)

a

F

-

EXTERIOR LIGHTS: TURNIHAZARDIMARKERIPARK TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Try the following checks before doing the System Diagnosis.

1. If one of the Turn Indicators goes on when the Park Lights are turned on, check the Front Turn Light on that side. 2. If a Turn Indicator does not light but the turn signals work, check the bulb, connections, and wiring to the Indicator. If neither the Park, Marker, nor 'hi1 Lights work, check TAIL LP Fuse, ORN (240), BRN (9) wire and the Light Switch for an open. 3. If only one light does not operate, check bulb, socket, and related wiring (see schematic). Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Refer to System Diagnosis for Exterior Lights: TurnIHazardlStop.

CIRCUIT OPERATION Turn Lights

If the turn left switches in the Turn-Hazard Switch are closed to the left, the LH ParkPrurn lights come on. It gets battery voltage through the Turn Flasher, the Hazard Switch, the Turn Left Switches. The LH Front ParkITurn Light and the LH Turn Indicator also come on. They are fed through the LT BLU wire. The current through the bulbs heats the Turn Flasher. It opens and closes to flash the left turn lights. The right turn lights operate in a similar way when the turn light switches are closed to the right.

Front Marker Lights

Front Park Lights

The Front Marker Lights can be lit by either the Park Lights or the Turn Lights. Neither of the two wires t o each of the marker bulbs is a ground wire.

The Front Park Lights can be lit by either the Park Lights or the Headlights.

With the Park Lights on, battery voltage is supplied through the BRN wires to both Marker Lights. The path to ground for the marker bulbs is through the Turn Lights. The small Marker Light bulbs light up, but not the larger turn bulbs. When the Turn Lights are on, but not the Park Lights, battery voltage is applied through the BLU wires to the Marker Lights. They glow since they are grounded through the entire Park Light system. As before, the small marker bulbs light up, but not all the parking bulbs. If both the Park Lights and a set of Turn Lights are on at the same time, the marker bulb for that side will not light up. With battery voltage on both sides of a bulb, it will not glow. When the Turn Lights flash off, however, the marker bulb on t h a t side will come on since i t is now grounded through the Turn Lights. This circuit makes the turn and marker bulbs flash out of step with each other when the Park Lights are on.

With the Park Lights or Headlights on, battery voltage is provided through the BRN wires to both Park Lights. The path to ground for the Park Lights is G102 (LH) or G103 (RH).

m

EXTERIOR LIGHTS: TAILIMARKERILICENSE

.80RN

240

.8 0 R N

TWILIGHT SENTINEL E

LIGHT SWITCH

.8 E R N

S

I 9

3

m

7

6

.

r

COACH LIGHTS

.8 ERN

.8 ERN

S361

w

EXTERI

LIGHTS: TAILIMARKERILICENSE


BLK

COMPONENT LOCATION Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C209 (11 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C320 (6 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C558 (1 cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C559 (1 cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G177 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S360. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page-Figure Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attached to LH side of fuse block . . . . . . . . . . . Rear LH corner of trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In rear lights harness, above license plate . . . . . In rear lights harness, above license plate . . . . . Rear LH corner of trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear lights harness, below RH tail lights. . . . . . Rear lights harness, below LH tail lights. . . . . . Rear lights harness, below LH tail lights. . . . . . Rear lights harness, below RH tail lights. . . . . . IIP harness, above fuse block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

m 1 I..

I

BLK


201-12-A 201-13-C 201-22-A 201-21-B 201-21-B 201-22-A 201-21-B 201-21-B 201-21-B 201-21-B 201-13-B

EXTERIOR LIGHTS: TAILIMARKERILICENSE TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Try the following checks before doing the System Diagnosis.

1. If Tail, Rear Marker and License Lights work, check the TAIL LPS Fuse, Light Switch, ORN (240),BRN (9) and BLK (150) wire for continuity.

2. If LH TAIL, and Rear Marker lights do not work, but RH Tail and Rear Marker lights do work, check connections of C559 and C558 and BRN (9) and BLK (150)wires for continuity. 3. If the Tail, Rear Marker, License, and Coach Lights do not work, but the Front Exterior Lights work, check C320 and related wiring (see schematic). Go to Systerri Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Refer t o S y s t e m Diagnosis for Exterior Lights: TurnlHazardlStop.

CIRCUIT OPERATION Voltage is applied through the 'l'ail LP Fuse t o r I I ~ : 1,ight Switch at all times. With the 1,ight Switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied LO all of the lights in this circuit.

lRIGHTS: COACH

EXTERIO

.8 0RN E

b240, 240

.80RN

TWILIGHT SENTINEL

EXTERIOR LIGHTS: COACH HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

m D

E

F

G

H

1

COMPONENT LOCATION

1

Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In trunk, behind center of rear seat . . . . . . . . . . C209 (11cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attached to LH side of fuse block . . . . . . . . . . . C320 (6 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear LH corner of trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C780 (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear LH corner of trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GI29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front center of trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above fuse block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BLK

Page-Figure

I ~ T ~ I

201-12-A 201-21-D 201-13-C 201-22-A 201-22-A 201-21-D 201-13-B

BLK

I

I

BLK


ELK

BLK

v!

EXTERI

LIGHTS: COACH


1. If both Coach Lights do not work, check TAIL LP FUSE by operating Park Lights. 2. If one Coach Light does not operate, replace the bad lamp assembly, check WHT (352) and DK BLU (351) wires. Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Refer t o System Diagnosis for Exterior Lights: TurnIHazardlStop.

CIRCUIT OPERATION Voltage is applied through the Tail LP Fuse to the Light at all times. With the Light Switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the input of the Inverter and the Inverter then supplies a 110 volt AC signal to the Coach Lights.

-

m

BACK UP LIGHTS

FUSE BLOCK

.8 D K B L U

TURN LIGHTS

I

75

GEAR SELECTOR

SWlTCH CLOSED WITH GEAR SELECTOR I N REVERSE

.8 LT GRN

.8 BLK 1 1 5 0 * - - - - 4 d

BACK h H T s

rn

1


COMPONENT LOCATION Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear Selector Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . C209 (11cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C320 (6 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C558 (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G177 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I

ELK

Page-Figure Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attached to base of steering column . . . . . . . . . Attached to LH side of fuse block . . . . . . . . . . . Rear LH corner of trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In rear lights harness, above license plate. . . . . Rear LH corner of trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear lights harness, below RH tail lights. : . . . . Rear lights harness, below LH tail lights. . . . . .

-1-

ELK

BLK2973407

Gear Selector Switch

1

BACK UP LIGHTS TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS



1. Check the Turn-BIU Fuse and DK BLU (75)

wire by operating the Turn Lights. 2. If Back Up Lights go on in the wrong gear, adjust the Gear Selector Switch.

SYMPTOM TABLE A: Back Up Lights do not operate B: Back Up Lights stay on in park or neutral

Go to System Check for a guide to normal operation.

A: BACK UP LIGHTS DO NOT OPERATE Connect: TEST LAMP At: GEAR SELECTOR SWITCH CONNECTOR Condition:




NORMAL RESULT

Put the Ignition Switch in RUN and the Gear Shift in P (park) Put the Gear Shift in R (reverse)

Back Up Lights are off

Put the Gear Shift in N (neutral)

Back Up Lights go out

Back Up Lights turn on


I I

Connect Between

DK BLU & Ground

I I

Correct Result

Test Lamp lights

I

For Diagnosis

I

See 1

I

DKBLU& TeF!rp See2 LT GRN If the above results are correct, adjust1 replace Gear Selector Switch. 1. Check DK BLU (75)wire for an open. 2. Check LT GRN (24)wire for an open.

I

B: BACK UP LIGHTS STAY ON IN PARK OR NEUTRAL Remove the connector from the Gear Selector Switch. If Back Up Lights go out, adjustlreplace the Gear Selector Switch. If Back Up Lights do not go out, check for short to voltage in LT GRN (24)wires. CIRCUIT OPERATION With the IGNITION SWITCH in RUN, BULB TEST, or START, voltage is applied through the Turn BIU Fuse to the Gear Selector Switch. Whenever the gear selector is shifted to REVERSE, the Gear Selector Switch closes, and voltage is applied to the Back Up Lights.

rn

CORNERING LIGHTS



COMPONENT LOCATION Turn-Hazard Switch Assembly. . . . ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C104 (11 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C118 (1 cavity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C119 (1 cavity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GI02 GI03 G105

........................ ........................ ........................

G106

........................

S376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BLK

BLK

Page-Figure Top of steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . Attached to RH side of steering column . . . . . . LH front of engine compartment, behind LH park and turn light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH front of engine compartment, behind RH park and turn light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On front fender, behind LH front lights. . . . . . . On RH front fender, behind headlights . . . . . . . LH front of engine compartment, on inner fender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH front of engine compartment, on inner fender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above fuse block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

201-13-A 201- 9-B 201-13-A 201-20-D 201-20-D 201-20-E 201-21-C 201-20-E 201-21-C 201-13-B


1. Check the TAIL L P Fuse and Light Switch

by turning on the Lights and observing the License Light.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Make the following measurements if one or both Cornering Lamps do not operate.

CORNERING LIGHTS TEST

2. If one or both Cornering Lamps do not turn off,

the Turn-Hazard Switch Assembly is at fault. Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

. Check the BRN (9)wire for an open (see

CIRCUIT OPERATION Voltage is applied a t all times to the Light Switch. With the Light Switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the Cornering Light Switch (part of the Turn-Hazard Switch Assembly). With t h e Turn-Hazard Switch Assembly in either TURN RIGHT or TURN LEFT, the corresponding Cornering Light goes on.

INTERIOR LIGHTS h

1 FUSE SEE FUSE

.80RN WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS

POWER DOOR LOCKS

L

1

I 1

40

WITHOUT POWER

~ 2 0 9DOOR LOCKS

R H FRONT OOOR JAMB S m H CLOSED WITH OOOR OPEN

INTERIOR LIGHTS FRONT CIGAR LIGHTERICLOCKIGLOVE BOX LIGHTIENGINE COMPARTMENT LIGHTIVANITY LIGHTS AND TRUNK LIGHT

---------

---------

1 FUSE

I I

CIG-CLK FUSE

I I

SEE fUSE

I

1 FUSE

:-LO^^ 1

I

SEE FUSE I BLOCK DETAILS I

.8 O R N


POWER LOCKS

SEE OROUBO DBTRiBUTIQU

C3

.8 BLKIORN

w

w

YF

INTER1 R LIGHTS HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

C 100, See Page 202-0

ELK

ELK

Instrument Panel Connector (Digital Cluster), See Page 82-5 WHT 12004036 Glove Box Light

Instrument Panel Connector Indicators Cluster), See Page 80-6

WHT 12010487 C366, See 365

C319, See 318

WHT 12020032

C453, See Page 202- 1 Headlight Dimmer Switch

lnstrument Panel Dimmer Switch

INTERIOR LIGHTS TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Try the following checks before doing the System Diagnosis.

1. If none of the Courtesy Lights work, check the CIG-CLK Fuse. 2. If only one light does not operate, check bulb and related wiring..

-

3. Make sure connector C453 is mated properlv. Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Do the tests listed for your symptom in the Symptom Table below.

A: LIGHT SHORT TEST

CIRCUIT OPERATION

With all doors closed and the Panel Dome Light Control turned off, disconnect connector C209. If the Footwell Courtesy lights turn off but the Dome and CourtesylWarning Lights stay on, check all the Door Jamb Switches and WHT (156) wires (see schematic) for a short to ground. If the Dome and CourtesylWarning Lights turn off but the Footwell Courtesy Lights stay on, check the Instrument Panel Dimming Switch and WHT (156) wires for a short to ground (see schematic).

Voltage is applied at all times through the CIG-CLK Fuse to each of the components in this circuit. The Dome, CourtesylWarning, and Courtesy Footwell Lights operate when either the Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch or the Door Jamb Switches are closed and provide a path to ground. The Cigar Lighter, Glove Box Light, Engine Compartment Light, Trunk Light, Vanity Mirror Lights, and Reading Lights are individually operated by their respective switches.



FOR DIAGNOSIS

Courtesy Lights stay on at all times Instrument Panel Dimming Switch does not operate Interior Lights, but lights turn on with any door open

Do Test A Check WHT (156)and BLK (150)wires (see schematic) for opens Check Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch for continuity RepairlReplace as necessary Check Vanity Mirror Lights connector and related wiring (see schematic) If connector and wiring are OK, repairlreplace Vanity Mirror RepairlReplace Vanity Mirror

Vanity Mirror does not operate

Vanity Mirror operates only in bright or only in dim Cigar Lighter does not work

Check for corrosion or element damage Check for voltage at socket with a test lamp, replace Cigar Lighter if test lamp lights

INTERIOR LIGHTS DIMMING b

SEE LIGHT SNITCH 0ETAlI.S

*--CONSOLE SHIFT

SEE MSTRUMENT PANEL FOR PIN NUMBERS

OkSTRIBlJTION

INTERIOR LIGHTS DIMMING HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Under LH side of I/P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A C237 (1 cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, right of radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-16-A G104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, to left of steering column. . . . . . . . . 201-15-A G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Below RH side of I/P, near shroud. . . . . . . . . . . 201-17-A G230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In console, behind gear shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . 201-14-C S103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/C harness, behind glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-17-A S213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IIP harness, above radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-16-A S260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IIP harness, near front of console. . . . . . . . . . . . 201-14-C S376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above fuse block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-B S438. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/P harness, above fuse block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-15-A C3 BLU

G!WHT

C1 BLK

v00010.0

Radio

C2 BLK

C3 BLK

C1 BLK

V00071 .O

Electronic AIC Control Head


lnstrument Cluster Connector (Digital Cluster), See Page 82-5

-

-

INTERIO~LIGHTSDIMMING TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Try the following checks before doing the System Check.

1. Check the TAIL LPS Fuse by observing the Marker Lights.


NORMAL RESULT

Move the Light Switch to the Park or Head Lamp position

The Digital Display, Instrument Cluster, Radio, Defogger, Ashtray, Shift Indicator, AIC and Heater Control Head, Tachometer, and the Illuminated Trim Plate Lights come on

2. If a group of Interior lights do not come on, check the wires to t h e suspect lamps (see schematic).

3. If a single Interior Light does not come on, check the bulb and wires to the suspect lamp (see schematic). 4. If the brightness will not vary the Dimmer Switch position, replace the Light Switch. 5. If the Interior Lights will not turn off, replace the Light Switch. Go t o System Check for a guide t o normal operation. Go t o System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

SYSTEM CHECK Use the System Check as a guide t o normal operation.

Move the Dimmer Switch to both extremes

In one direction the lights are bright, in the other direction they become dim

Refer t o the System Diagnosis when a result is not normal.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Do the tests below if none of the Interior Lights come on.

A: LIGHT SWITCH CONNECTOR TEST Connect: TEST LAMP At: LIGHT SWITCH CONNECTOR (Connected) Connect Between

Correct Display

For Diagnosis

5 (ORN) & Ground

Test Lamp lights

See 1

Light Switch in the Park or Head Lamp position 4 (BRN)&

Ground

Test Lamp lights

See 2

If all tests yield the correct response, go to Test B. 1. Check the ORN (240) wire and the TAIL LP Fuse for a n open (see schematic). 2. Replace the Light Switch.


INTERIOR LIGHTS DIMMING (Continued from previous page)

CIRCUIT OPERATION

B: INSTRUMENT DIMMER SWITCH TEST

Voltage is applied at all times through the TAIL LP Fuse to the Light Switch. With the Light Switch in the PARK or HEAD position, voltage is applied through the Instrument Cluster Dimmer Switch and then through the INST LPS Fuse to the individual Instrument lamp and the Digital Cluster.

Connect: TEST LAMP At: INSTRUMENT DIMMER SWTICH (Connected) Condition: Linht Switch

I

I

ID

Connect Between

I I

Correct Display

I I

For Diagnosis

Dimmer Switch in the bright position (DK GRN) & Ground

I

Test Lamp lights

1

See 2

If all tests yield the correct response, check the GRY (8) wire, DK GRN (49) wire and t h e INST LPS Fuse for a n open (see schematic). 1. Check t h e BRN (9) for a n open (see schematic). 2. Replace the Dimmer Switch.

I

I

1

A rheostat inside the Instrument Cluster Dimmer Switch controls the brightness of the lights. When the Dimmer Switch is turned the resistance of the rheostat either increases or decreases thus decreasing or increasing the Instrument Light brightness.

POWER WINDOWS

D

2 PNK

POWER SUNROOF

I

4-• 76

I""

-

POWER WINDOWS H HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A Window Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower front of each door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-22-F C342 (3 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH shroud, a t center access hole . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-22-F C343 (3 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH shroud, a t center access hole . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-22-F G187 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In LH front door, near front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-22-F S340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross car harness, above steering column

RH Window Motor, See LH Window Motor

BLK 12004140 LH Window Motor

C343,See C342 BLK 12034136 RH Window Switch

WHT 12010121

Master Switch Assembly

POWER WINDOWS TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

Try the following check before doing the System Check.

Do the tests listed for your symptom in the Symptom Table below.

If all the Power Windows do not operate, check the WDO CIRCUIT BREAKER by operating the Sunroof (if equipped).


Go to System Check for a guide to normal operation.


SYMPTOM

No Power Windows operate from any switch



No Power Windows operate from the Master Switch Assembly

LH Front Window does not operate -


With the Ignition Switch in RUN, operate each window UP and DN from the Master Switch Assembly Operate the RH Front Window from the RH Front Window Switch (UP and DN)

NORMAL RESULT

--

Each window operates quietly and smoothly, with no sticking

RH Front Window operates quietly and smoothly, with no sticking


-

-

-

-

RH Front Window does not operate from the Master Switch Assembly -

R H Front Window operates from- the Master Switch Assembly but does not operate from the RH Front Window Switch

A: Window Power and Ground Test B: Master Switch Assembly Test D: Window Motor Test A: Window Power and Ground Test B: Master Switch Assembly Test C: RH Front Window Switch Test D: Window Motor Test B: Master Switch Assembly Test D: Window Motor Test B: Master Switch Assembly Test C: RH Front Window Switch Test D: Window Motor Test E: RH Front Window Switch Power Test

If your symptom does not appear in the Symptom Table, perform all of the tests.

-

POWER WINDOWS

m

I I

At: MASTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR (Connected) Condition: lgnition Switch: RUN

Connect Between

I

I


Test Lamp A (PNK)& See 1 lights Ground A (PNK)& F Test Lamp See lBLKI lights If all results are correct, go to Symptom Table. 1. Checklrepair the PNK (76) wire for an open (see schematic). 2. Checklrepair the BLK (150) wire and GI87 for an open (see schematic).

I

C: RH FRONT WINDOW SWITCH TEST

B: MASTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY TEST

A: WINDOW POWER AND GROUND

Connect: TEST LAMP At: RH FRONT WINDOW SWITCH CONNECTOR (Connected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Operate the RH Front Window Switch in the Master Switch Assembly UP and DN (see schematic)

At: MASTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR (Connected) Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Operate the LH Front Window UP and DN from the Master Switch Assembly

I

Connect Between


Connect Between

D (DK BLU) Test Lamp & E (BRN) lights Operate the RH Window UP and DN from the Master Switch Assembly.

I

1 I

1

1

(DK BLU1 Test Lamp WHT) & C ITANI sghts I If all results are correct, go to Symptom Table. 1. Replace Master Switch Assembly. I

1 I


ITAN) & Test Lamp See 1 (DK BLUI lights WHT) C (DK BLU) & Test Lamp See 2 lights D (BRN) If all results are correct, go to Symptom Table. 1. Checklrepair wires from the Master Switch Assembly for an open (see schematic). 2. Replace the RH Front Window Switch.


POWER WINDOWS I E: RH FRONT WINDOW SWITCH POWER TEST

(Continued from previous page) - -

D: WINDOW MOTOR TEST Connect: TEST LAMP At: WINDOW MOTOR CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN Operate associated switch in the Master Switch Assembly UP and DN (see schematic) Connect Between

Correct Resuk

For Diagnosis

DK BLU wire & BRN wire Test Lamp See 1 lights (see schematic) If the result is correct, replace the Window Motor. Refer to Section 5 of the Body Service Manual for replacement procedures. 1. Checklrepair the wires to the Window Motor for an open (see schematic).

Connect: TEST LAMP At: RH FRONT WINDOW SWITCH CONNECTOR (Connected) Condition: Ignition Switch: RUN 'Onnect

Between

Correct Result

For Diagnosis

A (PNK)& Test Lamp See 1 lights Ground If the result is correct, replace the RH Front Window Switch. 1. Checklrepair the PNK (76) wire for an open (see schematic).

CIRCUIT OPERATION The Power Windows are driven by reversible permanent magnetic motors. Each motor is controlled by two normally closed to ground switches. When the RH Front Window U P Switch in the Master Switch Assembly is presed, the DK BLU motor wire is connected to battery voltage through the RH Front Window Switch. The motor drives the window up. When the switch is released, the contacts return to their normal position and the DK BLU motor wire is returned to ground. The motor stops. To lower the window, the RH Front Window DN Switch in the Master Switch Assembly connects the BRN motor wire to battery voltage through the RH Front Window Switch. The polarity across the motor is reversed from the polarity that occurs when the UP Switch is pressed. The motor runs the opposite way to drive the window down. When the RH Front Window Swtich is operated, voltage to run the Window Motor is switched from the PNK wire to either motor wire. The other motor wire remains grounded. Each motor is protected by a built-in circuit breaker. If a Window Switch is held on too long with the window obstructed or after the window is fully up or down, the circuit breaker opens the circuit. The circuit breaker resets automatically a s it cools.

u,

SUNROOF

1 FUSE

I I

BLOCK 7

BREAKER 30 AMP

SEE FUSE

MTH POWER WINOOW5

A

(BLK'

I

I

, WITHOUT POWER WfIYDOWS

SUNROOF SWITCH ASSEMBLY

--

SUNROOF

W

R

w-

SUNRO


COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof Motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Center of windshield header area . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof Switch Assembly. . . . . . . . Center of windshield header area . . . . . . . . . . . . C553 (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind LH side of IIP, near upper access hole. . G241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH side of windshield header area . . . . . . . . . . . S340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross car harness, above steering column

BLK2989743

Sunroof Motor

BLK 12004602

Sunroof Switch Assembly

201-12-A 201-23-C 201-234 201-23-C 201-2343

SUNROOF

-


1. Check the WDO Circuit Breaker by operating the Power Windows (if equipped). 2. Check that G241 is clean and tight. Go to System Check for a guide t o normal operation.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Do the tests below if the Sunroof does not operate.

B: SUNROOF MOTOR CONNECTOR TEST Connect: TEST LAMP At: SUNROOF MOTOR CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN Operate Sunroof Switch in OPEN and CLOSE positions

A: SUNROOF SWITCH ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR TEST

CONNECTOR (Connected)

Go t o System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

Between

SYSTEM CHECK Use the System Check Table as a guide to normal operation.

-

Refer t o System Diagnosis for a list of symptoms and diagnostic steps.



Switch in RUN, move the Sunroof Switch to open. 2. Hold the Sunroof Switch in CLOSE position

NORMAL RESULT

Sunroof operates smoothly with no sticking to full open position

For Diagnosis

(BLKlWHT) Test lamp See 1 wire & (LT lights GRN) wire If the result is correct, replace the Sunroof Motor. Refer to Section 8 of the Body Service Manual for removal and installation procedures. 1. Checklrepair BLKIWHT (942) and LT GRM (941)wires for an open. -

CIRCUIT OPERATION

Sunroof operates smoothly with no sticking and closes completely

Refer to System Diagnosis if a result is not normal.

Correct Result

1. ChecWrepair PNK (76)wire for an open. 2. Checklrepair BLK (150)wire for an open. 3. Replace Sunroof Switch Assembly.

With the Ignition Switch in RUN and the Sunroof Switch in OPEN, voltage is applied to the Sunroof Motor windings through the BLKl WHT wire and the Sunroof opens. When the Sunroof Switch is placed in CLOSE, voltage is applied to the Sunroof Motor through the LT GRN wire. The motor runs in the opposite direction and the window closes.

POWER DOOR LOCKS

I I

I

SEE FUSE

BREAKER SEE FUSE

-

I I

POWER SEATS

THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM

POWEO

R LOCKS


COMPONENT LOCATION Door Lock Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Lock Relay Assembly . . . . . . Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C209 (11cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C364 (2 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C365 (6 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C366 (6 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C453 (18 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

++-

ELK

Page-Figure In bottom of each door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-23-B Lower RH shroud, at bottom access hole. . . . . . 201-22-E Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A Attached to LH side of fuse block . . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-C Near RH shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-15-B LH shroud, near center access hole . . . . . . . . . . 201-23-B RH shroud, near center access hole . . . . . . . . . . 201-23-B Behind LH side of IIP, near shroud . . . . . . . . . . 201-14-A

GRY

I

Door Lock Motor (RH), See Door Lock Motor (LHI

BLK 12004155

1m 1 l

Door Switch (LH) ELK

Door Switch (RH), See Door Switch (LH)

C366, See C365


I

WHT 12004595 Door Lock Motor (LH)

I

VOOO18.0

Door Lock Relay

POWER DOOR LOCKS TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

SYMPTOM TABLE

SYSTEM CHECK TABLE


DO TEST

SYMPTOM

1. Check the PWR ACCY Circuit Breaker by op-

Only some of the doors lock and unlock

A: Door Lock Motor Test on suspect Door Lock Motor

The Power Door Locks do not operate from one or more Door Lock Switch(es)

B: Door Lock Switch Test on suspect Door Lock Switch(es)

The Power Door Locks do not operate from all Door Lock Switches

C: Door Lock Relay Test

erating the Power Seats (if equipped). 2. Check the CIG-CLK Fuse by observing that the Glove Box Light comes on when opened.

3. Check that the Door Lock Relay Assembly case ground is making good contact. 4. If one or more of the door lock motors do not operate properly, but the other door locks function normally, check the wiring to the motors. If the wiring is correct, replace that motor. 5. Check for mechanical binds in the Door Lock System. Go t o System Check for a guide t o normal operation. Go t o System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

SYSTEM CHECK Use the System Check Table as a guide t o normal operation. Refer t o System Diagnosis for a list of symptoms and diagnostic steps.

Unlock one door using the vehicle key

That door unlocks, but the other doors remain unlocked

With all the doors closed and locked, operate the inside door handle to try to open each door

The doors will not open

Open the LH door and move the LH Door Lock Switch to the LOCK position, close the door, and try to open each door from the outside

The doors will not open

A: DOOR LOCK MOTOR TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: SUSPECT DOOR LOCK MOTOR CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Condition: LH Door Lock Switch: UNLOCK and hold Measure Between

Refer t o System Diagnosis when a result is not normal.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Do the tests listed for your symptom i n the Symptom Table below. Tests follow the Symptom Table.

I

(TAN) & Ground

Correct Voltage

1

1

Battery Battery

I

I

For Diagnosis

See 1 See 2

If all the voltages are correct, replace the suspect Door Lock Motor. 1. Check the TAN (294) wire for an open (see schematic). 2. Check the GRY (295) wire for a n open (see schematic).

1

POWEO

R LOCKS

B: DOOR LOCK SWITCH TEST


C: D-OOR LOCK RELAY TEST (TABLE 1) Connect: TEST LAMP At: DOOR LOCK RELAY CONNECTOR C2 (Disconnected) For Diagnosis

Correct Result

Connect Between

& Ground

/

lights

C: DOOR LOCK RELAY TEST (TABLE 2) At: DOOR LOCK RELAY CONNECTORS C1& C2 (Connected) Condition: Door Lock Switch: LOCK and hold

1

Connect Between

Correct Result

C1:A (LT BLU) & Ground C2:C (GRY) & Ground

Test Lamp lights Test Lamp lights

C2:C (GRY) & C2:B (TAN)

/

Test Lamp lights

For Diagnosis

See 1

1

See 3

See

C~:C (GRY) & C2:B (Tan)

1

Test Lamp lights Test Lamp lights %st Lamp lights

See 2

1

See 3

See

If all the results are correct, check the TAN (294) and GRY (295) wires for opens (see schematic). If OK, do Test A. 1. Check the LT BLU (195) wire for an open (see schematic). If the wire is good, do Test B. 2. Check the BLK (194) wire for an open (see schematic). If the wire is good, do Test B. 3. Replace the Door Lock Relay.

If all the results are correct, proceed to Table 2. 1. Check the PWR ACCY Circuit Breaker. Check the ORNIBLK (60) and (460) wires for opens (see schematic).

If all the voltages are correct, check the LT BLU (195) wire and BLK (194) wire for a n open (see schematic). 1. Check the CIG-CLK Fuse. Check the ORN

C1:B (BLK) & Ground C2:B (TAN) & Ground

1

Move the Door Lock Switch to UNLOCK and hold (Continued in next column)

1

CIRCUIT OPERATION When a Door Lock Switch is activated in the Power Door Lock system, all of the doors will lock or unlock in unison. Each lock can also be operated manually from the locking post. The locks are operated by reversible Motors that receive voltage from two relays in the Door Lock Relay Assembly. These relays operate to t u r n the Motors on by applying a voltage to one of the terminals and a ground to the other terminal. When either Door Lock Switch is moved to the LOCK position, it completes the circuit to the coil of the Door Lock Relay Assembly. The lock relay is energized. The contact for the Lock Relay closes, a n d i s connected to battery voltage through the ORNIBLK wire which is the high current feed for driving the Motors. Voltage is then applied to the GRY wire and the Door Lock Motors, which are grounded by the TAN wire from the other terminal of the Motor through the contact for the Unlock Relay. The Motor i n each door runs to operate the Door Locks. When the Door Lock Switch is released, the Lock Relay contact returns to ground and the Motors turn off.

A similar action occurs with the unlock relay when it is energized by either of the Door Lock Switches closing to the UNLOCK position. Now the TAN wires to the Motors carry battery voltage and the GRY wires are grounded. The polarity of the voltage to the Motors has been reversed. The Motors run in the opposite direction to unlock the doors. The Door Lock Switches are usually closed for just a moment. If they are held closed, a circuit breaker in each motor will open to protect against damage. The circuit breakers close automatically when they cool off.

I


SEE FUSE

I

INSTRUMENT

30K GRN

29 3 0 K GRN HORNS

29 HEADLIGHTS

REAR LIGHTS, MARKERIPARKITAIL AND LICENSE

r----------------------------------------------------------------POWER

I I I I I I

INPUT

ALARM CONTROL

I6NITION SWITCtf INPUT SIGNAL

CONTROLLER

L--------------r-----------------------------------------------------------

ARM AN0 TAMPER INPUT

MEASURE RESISTANCE

IGNITION KEY WARNING .8 T A N C857 .8 L T GRN 262

8 TAN

.8 L T BLU

159

263

.8 L T BLU

a -----

-

FRONT -AM. SWITCH CLOSED WlTH OOOR OPEN

-

-

263

CLOSED WITH

.8 WHT

-

-

150

1 6301

-

STARTER AND

CONTROL

SYSTEM ARMING

SYSTEM CANCEL

DISTRIBUTION

1 TAN

POWER DOOR LOCKS

294

POWER DOOR LOCKS

THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM S HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

C100. See Page 202-0

ELK

WHT 12010487

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Door Lock Cylinder Switches . . . . . In door. near key cylinder Door Lock Relay Assembly . . . . . . Lower RH shroud. a t bottom access hole . . . . . . 201-22-E Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base of steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-A In-Line Fuse A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Taped to IIP harness. behind RH side of cluster 201-11-A In-Line Fuse B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Taped to IIP harness. behind RH side of cluster 201-11-A Starter Interrupt Relay . . . . . . . . . Taped to IIP harness. near fuse block . . . . . . . . . 201-11-A Theft Deterrent Controller . . . . . . . Behind IIP. near LH shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-11-A Theft Deterrent Diode . . . . . . . . . . Behind LH side of IIP. in C857 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-11-A Theft Deterrent Relay . . . . . . . . . . . BBehind IIP. left of steering column . . . . . . . . . 201-11-A Trunk Lock Tamper Switch . . . . . . Rear center of trunk lid. a t lid lock cylinder . . . . 201-224 ClOO (45 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH rear of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201- 9-B C209 (11cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attached to LH side of fuse block . . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-C C300 (2 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In LH front door. below lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-23-B C301 (2 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In RH front door. below lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-23-B C364 (2 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Near RH shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-15-B C365 (6 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH shroud. near center access hole . . . . . . . . . . 201-23-B C366 (6 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH shroud. near center access hole . . . . . . . . . . 201-23-B C453 (18 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind LH side of IIP. near shroud . . . . . . . . . . 201-14-A C599 (2 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Below RH side of IIP. at upper RH shroud . . . . 201-15-B C600 (2 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Below LH side of IIP. a t upper LH shroud . . . . . 201-15-B C604 (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base of LH shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-15-B C857 (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP. near LH shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-11-A GI04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind I/P. to left of steering column . . . . . . . . . 201-15-A G252 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear of trunk lid. near key tumbler . . . . . . . . . . 201-224 G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In LH front door. near lock cylinder switch G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In RH front door. near lock cylinder switch S213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. above radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-16-A S290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. above steering column . . . . . . . . . . 201-15-A S380 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft center harness. near LH shroud . . . . . . . . 201-11-A S826 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness. near brake pedal arm . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A S831. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft center harness. near LH shroud . . . . . . . . 201-15-B


C30 1, See C300

C2 BLK BLK

WHT

C1 CRY

V00018.0 Door Lock Relay Assembly

C600, See C599 BLK 12004155 BLK

ELK

Door Lock Switch (LH)

Door Lock Switch (RH),

C366, See C365 ELK

ELK

See Door Lock Switch (LH)

THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM S HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

C1 BLK

C2 BLU

V00019.0

BLK

VOOOOI 3.1 Starter Interrupt Relay

lgniton Switch

BLK12010105 In-Line Fuse (A) Fuse Holder

BLK 1 2 0 1 5 1 3 0 Theft Deterrent Controller

In-Line Fuse (B) Fuse Holder. See In-Line Fuse (A) Fuse Holder

ti BLK8917540 Theft Deterrent Relay

m

-


-

SWITCH INPUTS

SWITCH OUTPUTS BATTERY POWER

HORNS IGNITION LH DOOR

TRUNK L I D FORCED ENTRY LH DOOR LOCK CYLINDER

ARM INPUT

1

-

THEFT DETERRENT RELAY

HEADLIGHTS

EXTERIOR LIGHTS

I

DISARM INPUT

(

SOLID STATE ARM INPUT

POWER DOOR LOCKS "UNLOCK"

,

AND TAMPER INPUT

RH DOOR LOCK CYLINDER

"LOCK"

THEFT DETERRENT CONTROLLER

ARM CANCEL INPUT

-

STARTER INTERRUPT RELAY

STARTER SOLENOID

SYSTEM CHECK TABLE


1. Check the Wiper Circuit Breaker by operat-

2.

3. 4.

5.

6.

ing the Windshield Wiper. Check the PWR ACC Circuit Breaker by operating Defogger. Check the CLK-CIG Fuse by operating the Glove Box Light. Visually check In-Line Fuses A and B. If the Ignition Key Warning is set off by all doors, replace the Theft Deterrent Diode (see schematic). If the Horns are sounding without the lights coming on, replace the Theft Deterrent Relay. Go to System Check for a guide to normal operation. Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

SYSTEM CHECK Use the System Check Table as a guide to normal operation. NOTE: To reduce alarm noise, muffle the vehicle

horns with rags. Put all windows fully down before testing.

ACTION

NORMAL RESULT

Arming the System Turn the Ignition Switch to RUN and then to Off Open the driver's door

SECURITY Indicator flashes

Move the front Door Lock Switch to the LOCK position (LH door open) Close the door (stay in the car)

SECURITY Indicator remains on

Unlock the LH door using the Door Lock Post, then open the door

While alarms are operating, turn the Ignition Key to START

SECURITY Indicator goes out (system is armed) Horns pulse on and off, Headlights flash on and off, and Exterior Lights flash on and off These alarms cycle on and off approximately once a second for two to four minutes Starter does not operate (Engine does not start)

Disarming the System

Get out of the car Using the Key, unlock the LH door Rearm the system using the RH Front Door Lock Switch Get out of the car and close the door Unlock the RH door with the key and open it Rearm the system while remaining in the car Put the key in the Ignition and turn it to RUN Unlock the LH door using the Door Lock Post and open the door

Alarms stop Systemis armed

Alarms do not sound (the key unlock disarms the system) System is armed System is disarmed Alarms do not sound

Reset After Alarms

Rearm the system and unlock the RH door using System is armed the Door Lock Post Alarms sound Open and close the RH Door After alarms stop in about three minutes, open Alarms sound RH door Unlock RH door using the key Alarms stop (SYSTEM CHECK TABLE continued on f

w

Page)

v€

THEFT

TERRENT SYSTEM

(SYSTEM CHECK TABLE continued from facing page) Lock Without Arming While remaining in the car, lock each door using SECURITY Indicator goes off when t h e l a s t the Door Lock Posts of the outside Key Lock door is closed (System is not armed) and close all doors (do not use the Power Door Locks) Unlock the LH door using the Door Lock Post Alarms do not sound and open the door

(Continued from previous column) If a l l tests yield the correct lamp response, replace the Theft Deterrent Controller. 1. Check the WHT (93)wire for an open (see schematic). 2. Check the Door Jamb Switches, Door Lock Cylinder Switches, TAN (159) wire and LT BLU (263) wire for a short to ground (see schematic). 3. Check the LT BLU (263)wire, TAN (159) wire and Door Jamb Switches for an open (see schematic). 4. Check the YEL (261)wire for an open (see schematic).

-



A: SYSTEM WON'T ARM; INDICATOR FLASHES AFTER DOOR SWITCH IS LOCKED

SYMPTOM TABLE A: System won't arm; Indicator flashes after Door Switch is locked B: System won't arm; Indicator stays on after door is closed C: System won't cancel arming when Door Lock Switch is unlocked D: System won't disarm with Door Key E: Alarms won't operate; system arms F: Only the Horn or some lights operate when alarm is activated (Horn and all lights work when operated from their switches) G: Starter Interrupt doesn't work; Alarms operate H: Security Indicator doesn't work I: Alarm sounds when no tamper inputs are present J: Starter Motor will not operate If the system does not have one of the symptoms listed, do all of the following tests.

Measure: TEST LAMP At: THEFT DETERRENT CONTROLLER (Disconnected) Condition: Ignition Switch: ACCY or RUN Connect Between

~~~~~

I

I

I I

For Diagnosis

II

(WHT)& Test Lamp on Ground All Doors closed

I

(WHT)& (TestLamp off See 2 Ground Each Door Open (one a t a time)

I

I Kk",EcI I I

Test Lamp on

I I

See 1

B: SYSTEM WON'T ARM; INDICATOR STAYS ON AFTER DOOR IS CLOSED

1

I

1

See 3

I I 1

I

Hold each Lock Switch in the LOCK Position & Test Lamp on See 4 Ground I (Continued in next column) I

I

At: THEFT DETERRENT MODULE CONNECTOR (Disconnected)

(B: SYSTEM WON'T ARM; INDICATOR STAYS ON AFTER DOOR I S CLOSED Continued on next page)

-

THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM I (B: SYSTEM WON'T ARM, INDICATOR STAYS ON AFTER DOOR IS CLOSED continued from previous page) - If all t e s t s yield t h e correct lamp response, replace the Theft Deterrent Controller. 1. Check the Door Jamb Switches, Door Lock Cylinder Switches, TAN (159) wire and LT BLU (263) wire for a short to ground (see schematic). 2. Check the Door Jamb Switches, the LT BLU (263)wire and the TAN (159)wire for an open.

D: SYSTEM WON'T DISARM WITH DOOR KEY RENT CONTROLLER

C: SYSTEM WON'T CANCEL ARMING WHEN DOOR LOCK SWITCH IS UNLOCKED Connect: TEST LAMP At: THEFT DETERRENT CONTROLLER CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Condition: RH or LH Front Door Lock Switch: UNLOCK Connect Between

Correct Display .

For Diagnosis

-

Test Lamp M (PNK)& A See 1 on (ORNIBLK) If the lamp lights, replace the Theft Deterrent Controller. 1. Check the PNK (266)wire for an open (see schematic).

E: ALARMS WON'T OPERATE; SYSTEM ARMS

Relay by grounding the BLKlWHT (901) wire, then replace the Theft Deterrent Controller (see schematic). 1. Check the WHT (93)wire for an open (see

. Check the LT GRN (262) wire and Door

open (see schematic).

Irn

THEFT

TERRENT SYSTEM

F: ONLY THE HORNS OR SOME LIGHTS OPERATE WHEN ALARM IS ACTIVATED (HORNS AND ALL LIGHTS WORK WHEN OPERATED FROM THEIR SWITCHES

H: SECURITY INDICATOR DOESN'T WORK

G: STARTER INTERRUPT DOESN'T WORK, ALARMS OPERATE

I

Connect: TEST LAMP At: STARTER INTERRPUT RELAY CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN

I g:,".".": I I I I

Correct Disdav

(PNK) & Test Lamp on Ground Alarms sounding

I 1

I

I

Connect: VOLTMETER At: THEFT DETERRENT CONTROLLER CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Connect Between

For Diagnosis

See 1

(PNK) & Test Lamp on See 2 (LTBLU) If the lamp lights in both tests, replace the Starter Interrput Relay. 1. Check the PNK (3) wire and Ignition Switch for an open (see schematic). 2. Check the LT BLU (865)wire for an open, then replace the Theft Deterrent Control-

N (RED/ WHT) & Ground

WHT) & A Battery (BLK) Ignition Switch: ACCY

See 2

I I

K(WHT)BrA (BLK)

Battery

(DK GRN)

Battery

& A (BLK)

2. for an open (see schematic). 2. Check the DK GRN (29)wire for an open (seeschematic). 3. Check the TAN (12)wire for an open (see schematic). 4. Check the BRN (9)wire for an open (see schematic).

For Diagnosis

See 1

1.

1. Check the REDWHT (2)wire and Fuse B

1

Battery

I I

I tz:t:

3. 4.

I I

I

See3 See4

If the lamp lights in all the tests, replace the Theft Deterrent Controller. Check: the REDWHT (2)wire for an open (see schematic). Check the BLK (150)wire for an open (see schematic). Check the WHT (93)wire for an open (see schematic). Check the Security Indicator bulb and the DK GRN (264)wire for an open.

(Continuedon next page)


-

(Continued from previous page) I: ALARM SOUNDS WHEN NO TAMPER INPUTS ARE PRESENT (TABLE 1) Connect: TEST LAMP At: THEFT DETERRENT RELAY CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: Theft Deterrent System: ARMED All doors: CLOSED Connect Between

Correct Display

I: ALARM SOUNDS WHEN NO TAMPER INPUTS ARE PRESENT (TABLE 2) At: THEFT DETERRENT CONTROLLER

Connect: FUSED JUMPER At: STARTER INTERRUPT RELAY CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Condition: (Hold)Ignition Switch in the START position Connect Between

For Diagnosis

A (RED1 WHT) & F Test Lamp off See 1 (BLKIWHT) If the lamp does not light, replace the Theft Deterrent Relay. 1. Check BLKIWHT (901) wire for a short, then go to Table 2.

J: STARTER MOTOR WILL NOT OPERATE

For Diagnosis

Starter Motor cranks the See 1 engine If the Starter Motor cranks the engine, replace the Starter Interrupt Relay. 1. The problem is not in the Theft Deterrent System. Refer to Cell 30 (StartlCharging).

D (PPLIWHT) & A (PPL)

is still the possibility of intermittent shorts. Check LT BLU (263) wire and all door switches for exposed wiring or a faulty switch, then replace the Theft Deterrent Controller. 1. Check the Door Jamb Switches and LT BLU (263)wire for shorts (see schematic). 2. Check BLK (150)wire for an open.

Correct Result

-

-

THEFT DETERRENT RELAY CIRCUIT OPERATION When the Theft Deterrent System has been turned on, or armed, it will automatically operate alarms. I t sounds the vehicle horns, flashes the exterior lights, and interrupts the starter circuit. This happens when any of the doors are opened, or forced entry switches on the door locks and/or any of the trunk locks are closed.

voltage at terminal K, the Ignition ON Input. If either Door Lock Switch is moved to LOCK, and at least one door is open, momentary battery voltage is applied at terminal G , the System Disarming Input. At the same time, the open door places a ground at terminal J. The arming sequence is completed by closing the last door, which removes the ground signal from terminal J.

Alarms

The light and horn alarms are operated by the Theft Deterrent Relay. The coil of this relay is grounded by the Solid State Theft Deterrent Controller to turn on the relay. When the relay contacts close, battery voltage is supplied to the headlights, exterior lights, and the horn. The controller then opens the relay coil circuit e ~ pulse on and off to turn off the a l a r m s . - ~ hwill every second for 2 to 4 minutes after the system has been triggered by tampering or forced entry.

Cancellation

The arming sequence can be cancelled. This is done by moving a Front Door Lock Switch to the UNLOCK position before the door is closed to complete the arming of the system. Battery voltage is applied momentarily to terminal M with the door switch in UNLOCK. This cancels the arming. Disarming

The starter circuit is disabled by the Starter Interrupt Relay. This relay coil is also grounded by the Theft Deterrent Controller when the alarms have been set off. The relay is energized when the Ignition Switch is in RUN, BULB TEST, or START. Its contacts then open and break the circuit to the Starter Solenoid. This prevents the engine from starting.

When one of the doors is unlocked with a key, a grounding switch in the Front Door Lock Cylinder closes. This grounds terminal H of the controller, the Disarm Input. The system is disarmed and no alarms will operate when a door is opened. The system can be disarmed from inside the vehicle with the key. Turning the Ignition Switch to RUN applies battery voltage to terminal K of the controller, the Ignition ON Input.

Arming

Tampering

The arming sequence begins with the Ignition Switch turned off. This removes battery

The alarms are set off when terminal J , the Tamper Input, is grounded. The door jamb switches close to ground, the Tamper Input, with the door open. In addition, the Forced

Starter Interrupt

Entry switches close when there is motion between a door or the trunk and its switch. This happens when a door lock is forced or removed. The Forced Entry switches then ground the Tamper Input and set off the alarms. The Theft Deterrent Diode isolates the LH Front Door Jamb Switch. The Voice or Alarm Information System also uses this switch. The diode prevents the other switches in the Theft Deterrent System from operating the information system.

-

w

THEFT DETERRENT RELAY CIRCUIT OPERATION When the Theft Deterrent System has been turned on, or armed, it will automatically operate alarms. I t sounds the vehicle horns, flashes the exterior lights, and interrupts the starter circuit. This happens when any of the doors are opened, or forced entry switches on the door locks andlor any of the trunk locks are closed.

voltage at terminal K, the Ignition ON Input. If either Door Lock Switch is moved to LOCK, and at least one door is open, momentary battery voltage is applied at terminal G, the System Disarming Input. At the same time, the open door places a ground at terminal J. The arming sequence is completed by closing the last door, which removes the ground signal from terminal J.

Alarms

The light and horn alarms are operated by the Theft Deterrent Relay. The coil of this relay is grounded by the Solid State Theft Deterrent Controller to turn on the relay. When the relay contacts close, battery voltage is supplied to the headlights, exterior lights, and the horn. The controller then opens the relay coil circuit will pulse on and off to turn off the every second for 2 to 4 minutes after the system has been triggered by tampering or forced entry.

alarms.- he^

Cancellation

The arming sequence can be cancelled. This is done by moving a Front Door Lock Switch to the UNLOCK position before the door is closed to complete the arming of the system. Battery voltage is applied momentarily to terminal M with the door switch in UNLOCK. This cancels the arming. Disarming

The starter circuit is disabled by the Starter Interrupt Relay. This relay coil is also grounded by the Theft Deterrent Controller when the alarms have been set off. The relay is energized when the Ignition Switch is in RUN, BULB TEST, or START. Its contacts then open and break the circuit to the Starter Solenoid. This prevents the engine from starting.

When one of the doors is unlocked with a key, a grounding switch in the Front Door Lock Cylinder closes. This grounds terminal H of the controller, the Disarm Input. The system is disarmed and no alarms will operate when a door is opened. The system can be disarmed from inside the vehicle with the key. Turning the Ignition Switch to RUN applies battery voltage to terminal K of the controller, the Ignition ON Input.

Arming

Tampering

The arming sequence begins with the Ignition Switch turned off. This removes battery

The alarms are set off when terminal J , the Tamper Input, is grounded. The door jamb switches close to ground, the Tamper Input, with the door open. In addition, the Forced

Starter Interrupt

Entry switches close when there is motion between a door or the trunk and its switch. This happens when a door lock is forced or removed. The Forced Entry switches then ground the Tamper Input and set off the alarms. The Theft Deterrent Diode isolates the LH Front Door Jamb Switch. The Voice or Alarm Information System also uses this switch. The diode prevents the other switches in the Theft Deterrent System from operating the information system.

TRUNK RELEASE 0

AIR CONDITIONING

ml

RELEASE SOLENOID

--

TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Try *e following checks before doing the System Check.

1. Check the AIC Fuse by operating the Heater. 2. Check that the Trunk Release Solenoid case ground is clean and tight. Go to System Check for a guide to normal operation. Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.


SYSTEM CHECK TABLE

S w i t c h in R U N , press Trunk Release Refer to System Diagnosis if a result is not normal.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Make the measurements given in the following Tables if the Trunk Release does not operate properly.

-

-

v TRUNK RELEASE

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A Release Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear center of trunk lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-22-B C219 (1cavity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, near control head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-17-A

(TABLE 1)

(TABLE 2)

Measure: VOLTAGE At: TRUNK RELEASE SOLENOID CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Condition: Ignition Switch: RUN Measure Between

Correct Voltage

Measure: VOLTAGE At: TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN Release Solenoid: CONNECTED

For Diagnosis

BLK & 0 Volts See 1 Ground Press and hold the Trunk Release button BLK & Battery See 1 Ground If both voltages are correct, repairl replace Trunk Release Solenoid. 1. Go to Table 2.

Measure Between

II I

1

Correct Voltage

I

For Diagnosis

I

Battery See 1 Ground BRN& BRN &BLK 1 Batters I See 2 If both voltages are correct, repairl replace the Trunk Release Switch. 1. Checklrepair the BRN (50)wire. 2. Checklrepair the BLK (142)wire.

I 1

I

I

CIRCUIT OPERATION With the Ignition Switch in RUN, BULB TEST, or START, voltage is applied through the AIC Fuse to the Trunk Release Switch. With the Switch closed, voltage is applied to the Trunk Release Solenoid, releasing the trunk lock.

POWER SEATS: THREE MOTORS

-

DEFOGGER

C453H

2 ORNIBLK

POWER DOOR LOCKS

LH POWER SEAT SWITCH


COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A C380 (6 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH front seat C453 (18 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind LH side of IIP, near shroud . . . . . . . . . . 201-14-A C479 (2 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH front s e a t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201-24-A GI94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On floor pan, near LH front door sill . . . . . . . . . 201-24-A

BLK 12004677

C380

WHT

V00037.0 LH Seat Switch

WHT

WHT

POWER SEATS: THREE MOTORS TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Try the following checks before doing the System Diagnosis.

1. If none of the Seat Functions operate, check the PWRIACC Cirucit Breaker, by operating the power door locks.


SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

tion, but the entire seat moves up and down, replace the Seat Switch. 3. If the entire seat moves up and down, but the rear or front height does not, replace the Seat Switch. Go to System Check for a guide t o normal operation. Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

SYMPTOM TABLE A: None of the seat functions work B: Some, but not all seat functions work

A: NONE OF THE SEAT FUNCTIONS WORK Connect: TEST LAMP At: POWER SEAT SWITCH CONNECTOR (Connected) Connect Between

SYSTEMCHECK Use the System Check Table as a guide t o normal operation.


NORMAL RESULTS

Move Rear Height switch up and down Move Front Height switch up and down Move the Entire Seat switch up and down Move the Entire Seat switch Forward and Back

Rear of seat moves up and down Front of seat moves up and down Entire seat moves up and down Entire seat moves forward and back

t: POWER SEAT SWITCH CONNECTOR

Diagnostic steps for the symptoms listed in the following table are listed after the table.

2. If the Rear or Front height does not func-

Correct Display

B: SOME, BUT NOT ALL SEAT FUNCTIONS WORK

For Diagnosis

ORNIBLK Test Lamp See 1 ON (60)& Ground ORNIBLK Test Lamp (60)& BLK See 2 ON (151) If lamp lights in both tests, check Connector C380 then replace the Seat Switch. 1. Check the PWRIACCY Fuse and the ORNIBLK (151)wire (see schematic). 2. Check Ground G194 and BLK (151)wire (see schematic).

-

POWER SEATS: THREE MOTORS CIRCUIT OPERATION There are three reversible motors that operate the Power Seats. The front and back of a seat are operated by different Motors. They can be raised or lowered independently of each other. When the Entire Seat Switch is pushed to the UP or DOWN position, both Motors run to move the front and back of the seat at the same time. The Forward-Back Motor is operated by the Entire Seat Switch. When it is held in the FORWARD position, battery voltage is applied throggh the Switch contacts to the LT GRN uire mlcl the Forward-Back Motor. The Motor is grounded through the TAN wire and the contact of the Back Switch to G194. The Motor runs to drive the seat forward until the switch is released. In the BACK position, the TAN wire receives battery voltage and the LT GRN wire is grounded. This reversed polarity causes the Motor to run in the opposite direction and drive the seat backward. The Front Height Motor works in a similar way when the Front Height Switch is operated.

To raise the entire seat, the Entire Seat Switch is held in the UP position. This applies battery voltage to both the LT BLU and DK BLU wires, and both the Front Height and Rear Height Motors. The YEL and the DK GRN wires are grounded through the Height Switches and Entire Seat Down Switch that was not operated. Both Motors run to drive the entire seat up. A similar action occurs to move the entire seat down. Each Motor contains a self-resetting circuit breaker to protect it from overload.

m

RADIO

-

AMIFM MONO

MONO RADIO

GROUND STRAP

3 1 0 4 -6

BLOWER M O T O R ASSEMBLY

DASH G R O U N D

'a

RADIO ELECTRONICALLY TUNED AMIFM STEREO

RADIO: 6 SPEAKER SYSTEM

l------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------I

1 RADIO

:

I I

!

=STATE

I 0 0 NOT

! MEASURE

--*---------------. Ku-------------

YEL

H

116

5 OK 5BRN

199

RADIO HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-12-A Radio Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower LH corner of fuse block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-C C258 (2 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-15-A C260 (4 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201-15-A C261 (2 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind RH side of radio G104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Behind IIP, to left of steering column. . . . . . . . . 201-15-A S213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IIP harness, above radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-16-A S290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IIP harness, above steering colum 201-13-B S376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IIP harness, above fuse block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201-13-B ELK

ELK

C3 BLU

ELK

v02011.2 C261

O WHT

Cl

v00010.0 Radio


BLK

RADIO

-


SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

NOISE

Try the following checks beforedoing the System Check. RADIO

1. Check the Radio Fuse.

2. (Electronically Tuned Radio)Check the CIG-

CLK Fuse by operating the Front Cigar Lighter. 3. Check that the antenna connector and coaxial cable are properly connected. 4. Adjusting the Radio controls will change the operation of the sound system. Consult the Delco Sound Service Guide for information regarding the operation of these controls.

1. For proper diagnosis, take the car outside where signals are strong. Close the hood, and keep away from metal buildings or sources of radio interference. 2. Ignition noise on FM may indicate a possible defective Ignition system. 3. Coated screws or bolts can cause a poor

ground condition. Scrape ground screw clean of any paint or varnish. Go to System Check for a guide to normal operation. Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.


SPEAKER

Before troubleshooting a suspect speaker, check all connections to that speaker.

Refer to System Diagnosis for a list of symptoms and diagnostic steps.

SYSTEM CHECK TABLE NORMAL RESULT

ACTION

With the Ignition Switch in RUN, turn the Radio ON

Operate the Radio controls

Turn Headlight Switch to PARK

The display comes on (Electronically Tuned Radio) The Digtial Clock operates Sound comes from all four speakers Consult the Delco Sound Service Guide for information regarding the operation of the controls The Panel Light comes on (Electronically Tuned Radio) The Digital display dims


*



Radio does not appear to work (no display lights, no sound) Clock (if equipped) does not operate Panel Light does not come on Display Dimming function will not operate (Electronically Tuned Radio) No sound or distorted sound comes from a speaker Excessive noise comes from all speakers

FOR DIAGNOSIS

Do Test A

Do Test B Do Test C Do Test D

Do Test E

Do Test F

w

RADlO

Measure: VOLTAGE At: RADlO CONNECTOR C1 (Disconnected) Condition: Ignition Switch: RUN

Ground &

'Orrect

Voltage

For Diagnosis

Battery

See 1

Battery

See 2

(BLK) If the voltages are correct, remove Radio for service. 1. Check YEL (43)wire for an open. 2. Check BLK (150) wire for an open to ground.

Measure: VOLTAGE At: RADlO CONNECTOR C258 (Disconnected) Voltage

For Diagnosis

A (ORN)& Battery See 1 Ground If the voltage is correct, remove Radio for service. 1. Check ORN (40)wire for an open (seeschematic).

Connect: ANALOG OHMMETER At: SUSPECT SPEAKER Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN Radio: ON Ohmmeter on RX 1 scale Speaker Wires: DISCONNECTED

Measure: VOLTAGE At: RADlO CONNECTOR C1 (Disconnected) Conditions: Light Switch: PARK Dimming Switch: HI Measure Between

Voltage

For Diagnosis

Action

(GRY)& 10 Volts See 1 Ground If the voltage is correct, remove Radio for service. 1. Check GRY (8)wire for an open (see schematic).

D: DISPLAY DIMMING TEST Measure: VOLTAGE At: RADlO CONNECTOR C258 (Disconnected) Condition: Light Switch: PARK

B: CLOCK TEST

Measure Between

E: SPEAKER TEST (TABLE 1)

C: PANEL LIGHT TEST

A: RADIO POWER INPUT TEST

Measure Between

z

II

Measure Between

Correct Voltage

Correct Result

For Diagnosis

Connect Speaker Ohmmeter See 1 "pops " across speaker terminals If the result is correct, proceed to Table 2. 1. Replace the problem speaker with a new one.

E: SPEAKER TEST (TABLE 2) At: RADlO OUTPUT FOR SUSPECT SPEAKER Conditions: lgnition Switch: RUN

For Diagnosis

I

(BRN)& Battery See 1 Ground If the voltage is correct, remove Radio for service. 1. Check BRN (9)wire for an open (see schematic).

Action

Connect voltmeter across outputs for suspect speaker with Radio tuned to a strong

I

I

Correct Voltage

For Diagnosis

Varying around 1Volt AC

See 1

between the Radio and the suspect speaker. 1. Remove Radio for service. (Continued on next page)

I

RADIO

If the noise disappears, i t was being picked up by the Antenna. Consult the Delco Sound Service Guide for Antenna noise diagnosis.


F: NOISE DIAGNOSIS TEST

If the noise persists, it is coming in the Radio wiring. Refer to the following chart for a possible cause and corrective action.

Unplug the Antenna a t the back of the Radio.

NOISE DIAGNOSIS TEST SYMPTOM

POSSIBLE CAUSE

Harsh popping noise that changes with engine rpm High whine (like a siren) that changes with engine rPm

Ignition noise

Perform the steps under Ignition Noise p. 150-7.

Generator noise

Add filter package 1224205to 14 volt andlor memory lead to the Radio. See Fig. 2, p 150-7. By-pass the generator output andlor the bi-field wire of the generator with 250 MFD 100 v capacitor. See Fig 3, p. 150-7. Exchange the defective Radio with a good Radio. If the noise disappears, send the defective Radio for repair. Install a dedicated ground strap on the Radio. See Fig. 1, p. 150-7. Run a direct wire from battery + to generator. Replace generator. Install filter package 1224205in the power lead(s)to that accessory. See Fig. 2, p. 150-7. Install a .5 MFD by-pass capacitor at the power lead to that accessory. Consult Delco Sound Service Guide. Temporarily replace the antenna with another one. Repairlreplace the defective one if the radio reception improves. Check at the antenna Coax Lead-In and the connector. Remove Radio for repair. Remove Radio for repair. Install filter package 1224205 in the power leads to the Electronic Control Module (ECM) Instrument Panel Digital Cluster. Replace defective antenna with a good antenna. If noise disappears repair or replace the defective antenna. Check antenna ground, Coaxial Cable Braid, and grounds at connectors. If noise persists with replacement antenna, the problem must be repaired at the source of noise (generator,ignition system, accessory, etc.). See the Delco Sound Service Guide for noise "snifting" procedures.

I

I

I I

REPAIR ACTION

I

I

Noise occurs only when an accessory is on

Condition in that accessory

All stations weak, noisy, both AM and FM AM only, weak, noisy FM only, weak, noisy Noise present with engine not running Noise that stops when antenna is unplugged from back of Radio

Defective antenna or leadin wire AM alignment FM alignment ECM or Digital Cluster Antenna noise

I I

RADIO

-

I

For more detailed noise repair procedures consult the Delco Sound Service Guide. Service procedures are given for: Accessory noises CB antennas and noise Computer noise Windshield antennas

IGNITION N O I S E

TOGROUND (TRY GROUNDED A N D UNGROUNDED)

I

4. Reroute spark plug wires laying against any-

thing that could possibly transmit noise to the Radio (car wiring or sensor leads that travel into the passenger compartment). 5. Replace distributor cap and rotor. 6. Check the ground from engine to firewall: install a braided ground strap if necessary.

14 V O L T L I N E T O R A D I O ( I G N I T I O N OR M E M O R Y )

7. Install a braided ground strap on the hood. 8. Check heater core ground; clean or install braided ground strap if necessary. 9. Check air conditioner accumulator ground; clean or install a braided ground strap if necessary.

Figure 2 - Install a 1224205 filter package.

\

B R A I D E D GROUND

TO STEERING COLUMN

I

BROWN F I E L D W I R E 250 M F D lOOV CAPACITOR

I

ALTERNATOR OUTPUT L E A D

I

Figure 1 - Cut the black (ground) wire from the black plug at the back of the Radio and run a braided ground strap from the case of the Radio to good, unpainted body ground.

1. Check for loose or defective spark plug wire. 2. Check for defective spark plug. 3. Move all wiring away from Ignition System and spark plug wires.

FUSE BLOCK

Shielding of wiring and components Locating vehicle noise

I

Try the following fixes in the given order.

I

I

f

I

100" CAPACITOR

I

Figure 3 - Install a 250 M F D 1 0 0 1 capacitor on the alternator output lead andlor the brown field wire of the alternator to ground.


RADIO

-


CIRCUIT OPERATION The Radio Fuse provides main power to the Radio and to the Power Antenna. With the Ignition Switch in ACCY or RUN, voltage is applied through the Radio Fuse and the YEL wire to the ON-OFF switch in the Radio. The circuit is grounded at G104. With the ON-OFF switch closed, voltage is applied through the Radio Fuse, Radio switch (PowerAntenna), and the Solid State Radio circuits to ground. Two wires coraect each speaker to the Radio. The ETR Radio has two inputs that other models do not have: Dim Display Signal and Battery Power. The ETR model is an AMlFM radio that changes stations electronically. The frequencies of pre-selected stations can be stored in the electronic memory. The ETR model also provides a digital display of time or station frequency. As in other models, the Light Switch controls panel light dimming. I n the ETR model, dimming is also controlled by the Radio itself by means of the Dim Display Input Signal. The ETR model's clock memory and Radio memory functions are powered a t all times through the CIG-CLK Fuse. If power to the ETR model is cut off - by disconnecting the Battery, for example - the operator must reset the memory functions when power is restored.

POWER ANTENNA 0

SEE GROUND OISTRIBUTiOl

=

POWElwNTENNA HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES

COMPONENT LOCATION

Page-Figure

Antenna Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C369 (1cavity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C464 (3 cavities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G104 G220 S213. S290.

........................ ........................ ........................ ........................

Inside RH front fender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind RH side of IIP, right of glove box . . . . . Under LH side of IIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, near RH shroud. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH rear of engine compartment, near power antenna motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behind IIP, to left of steering column. . . . . . . . . Bottom RH side of IIP, underneath glove box . . IIP harness, above radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IIP harness, above steering column . . . . . . . . . .

Antenna Motor (C464)

0 BLU

C2 WHT

C1 BLK

C1 BLK

C2 vooo11 .o

Antenna Relay

GRY

v00010.0

Radio

201-23-E 201-17-D 201-12-A 201-16-C 201-23-F 201-15-A 201-17-D 201-16-A 201-15-A

POWER ANTENNA W TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS


1. Check the Radio Fuse by turning the Radio ON and noting that the display lights come on. 2. Check the CIGICLK Fuse by operating the Front Cigar Lighter.

Make the measurements given in the following tables if the Antenna does not operate.

A: ANTENNA DOES NOT OPERATE (TABLE II Measure: VOLTAGE At: ANTENNA RELAY CONNECTOR C1 (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN Radio: ON

3. Power Antenna goes up or down part way. - Check Power Antenna mast for bent condition or dirt. If mast is dirty andlor bent, straighten the mast and clean off the dirt. Lube with light oil and check operation. If the mast is straight and clean, replace the Antenna Motor. Go to System Check for a guide to normal operation. Go to System Diagnosis for diagnostic tests.

I I

A(oRN'& Ground

Ground (PNK)&

I

Correct Voltaoe

I

Battery

/ I

For Diagnosis

See 1

Battery

I

See 2

1

Battery

(

See 3

(

-



NORMAL RESULT

With t h e Ignition Switch in RUN, turn Radio ON

Antenna m a s t extends to full height Radio receives strong broadcast signals Antenna retracts into fender

Turn Radio OFF

Measure Between


If all voltages are correct, go to Table 2. 1. Check ORN (40)wire for an open. 2. Check BLK (150) wire for an open to ground. 3. Check PNK (143)wire for an open to the Radio. Remove the Radio for repair if wire is OK (see schematic).

A: ANTENNA DOES NOT OPERATE (TABLE 2)

#r

POWE

NTENNA I

A: ANTENNA DOES NOT OPERATE (TABLE 3) Measure: VOLTAGE At: ANTENNA MOTOR CONNECTOR C464 (Disconnected) Conditions: Ignition Switch: RUN Radio: ON Measure Between

I

A (DK GRN) & Ground

I

I

Correct Voltage

Battery

A ( D K GRN) Battery & B (GRY) Turn the Radio OFF.

I

For Diagnosis

I

I

See 1

(

see2

I

C(WHT)& Battery See 3 Ground If the voltages are correct, replace the Antenna Motor. 1. Check DK GRN (145) wire (see schematic). 2. Check GRY (161)wire (see schematic). 3. Check WHT (160)wire (see schematic).

CIRCUIT OPERATION When the Radio is turned on, voltage is applied from the PNK wire to the Antenna Relay coil. The Antenna Relay contacts close, and battery voltage is supplied to the DK GRN wire and then to the Antenna Motor. The other motor terminal is grounded through the UP Switch, the GRY wire, and the relay contacts. The motor drives the Antenna up. At the end of its travel, the Up Switch opens and the motor stops.

When the Radio or ignition is turned off, the circuit through the Antenna Relay coil opens. The contacts open to the position shown in the schematic, applying battery voltage to the WHT wire. The DK GRN wire is now grounded. Since the DN Switch at the Antenna is now making contact to the WHT wire, the voltage to the motor has reversed polarity. I t runs in the opposite direction and drives the antenna down. At the end of the travel, the DN Switch opens the circuit. Both sets of switches are now in the positions shown in the schematic with the Radio off and the Antenna down. The Antenna is connected to the Radio by a coaxial cable.

COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS

Figure B - RH Front Of V I N A Engine

.ELECTRONIC SPARK CONTROL.

Figure A - RH Front Of V I N A Engine

-

EFE RELAY

RECOVERY BOTTLE

-

12HF130

Figure C Middle Of RH Front Fender (VIN A)

*

,

f

M I X U R E CONTROL SOLENOID AND CONNECT

S457

ELECTRONIC VACUUM

SPARK TIMING DlSTRl BUTOR

12HF128

5

Figure B - Front Of V I N A Engine CONNECTOR EXHAUST

A I R DIVERTER CONNECTOR

6120

12HF126

Figure A - Rear Of V I N A Engine

12FF6

Figure C - R H Rear Of V I N A Engine


Figure B - Top Front Of VIN A Engine

COOLANT TEMPERATURE

ELECTRONIC SPARK TIMING DISTRIBUTOR

CLUTCHCONNECTOR C497 FUSIBLE LINK D 12HF124

Figure A - Top RH Side Of VIN A Engim

SWITCH

1 2 ~ ~ 1 4 2

-

Figure C LH Side Of VIN Y Engine

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

EGRIRVBII LC SOLENOID

DIAGNOSTIC DWELL METER CONNECTOR

-

Figure B LH Front Of V I N Y Engine

COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

\

SOLENOID

SWITCH 12HF147

Figure A - LH Side Of VIN Y Engine

12HF143A

-

Figure C RM Rear Of V I N Y Engine Compartment


Figure R -Top Of V I N Y Engine Cempartment

1 DlAGNOSTlC DWELL

AIR DIVERTER AND SELECT SWITCHING VALVES Figure A - RH Side Of V I N Y Engine

cil

PUMP 12HF146 4

-

-

Figure C - Top LH M Engine compartment (VIN Y)

S107

AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH Figure A - L H Rear Of VIN Y Engine

Figure B - Front Center O f Engine ( V I N Y)

1 2 ~ ~ 1 4 3

-

Figure C R H Side Of V I N Y Engine

Figure 0- R H Front Of V I N 7 Engine

-

Figure E R H Front Of VIN 7 Engine

-

Figure F R H Front Of V I N 7 Engine Compartment

I N 0 A ,

tn

m


-

L

THROTTLE POSITION

OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR

IDLE AIR COOLANT FAN TEMPERATURE

-

Figure B R H Rear Of V I N 7 Engine

I

TEMPERATURE

CRANKSHAFT SENSOR

TEMPERATURE

CAMSHAFT SENSOR CONNECTOR 12HF116

Figure A

-

Front Of V I N 7 Engine

-

I

12HF119

Figure C - L H Front Of V I N 7 Engine

L

COMPUTER CONTROLLED COIL IGNITION

A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH S112

A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH CONNECTOR WITH DIODE

-

1 2 ~ ~ 1 1 8

Figure B Lower L H Front Of V I N 7 Engine

S115 S217

S462

KNOCK SENSOR 12HF11P.

Figure A - Top Rear Of V I N 7 Engine

Figure C - R H Rear Corner Of VIN 7 Engine Compartment

If

COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS CU

Figure B - R H lnner Fender Panel, Above Wheel Well ( V I N 7) b

FUEL PUMP

R TURBO BOOST GAGE SENSOR (WITHOUT DIGITAL CLUSTER)

/

E

, ~

i

A

/ -

CUT-OUT SWITCH -

A/C CUT O U T R E L A Y FUEL PUMP PRIME CONNECTOR 12HF118

Figure A - LH Front Of V I N 7 Engine

I

.

12HF122

Figure C - R H lnner Fender Panel, Above Wheel Well (VIN 7)

BRAKE ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE SWITCH

COOLANT F A N DELAY RELAY

LOW SPEED APlD HIGH SPEED COOLANT F A N

SWITCH CONNECTOR

Figure B - L H Rear Of Engine Compartment

BRAKE RESERVOIR PUMP MOTOR

: I

BRAKE RELAY

N

12HF114

Figure A - L H Rear Of V I N 7 Engine Compartment

.

1 2 ~ ~ 1 1 0

-

0 A

Figure C L H Rear Corner Of Engine Compartment CO


AIC ACCUMULATOR

MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR

M A N I F O L D AIR TEMPERATURE (MAT)

12HF129

i

Figure B - R H Rear Of Engine Compartment

TRANSMISSION CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONNECTOR CANISTER PURGE

TRANSMISSION -6

L

S170

-

12HF121

Figure A - L H Front Of V I N 7 Engine Compartment

12HF138

Figure C - L H Side Of Automatic Transmission

I

-

B


IN-LINE FUSES " A AND "B"

-

-

THEFT DETERRENT RELAY AND CONNECTOR

-

Figure B LH Side Of Steering Column

DIODE l2LFBl

Figure A - Behind LH Side Of I/P

Figure C - LH Side Of Steering Column

rn


S801

I STEERING

CRUISE CONTROL MODULE

COLUMN BRACKET

I

' T U R N FLASHER

Figure B - R H Side Of Steering Column Bracket

I PARK BRAKE

PARK BRAKE

ASSEMBLY

12HF16

Figure A - Behind L H Side Of I/P

I

12JF1

Figure C - Behind L H Side Of I/P

1

T U R N 1 HAZARD SWITCH ASSEMBLY

CIRCUIT BREAKER A N D CONNECTOR

IGNITION KEY VYARNING, AND T U R N A N D CORNERING LAMPS

WASHERS)

12LF1

12HF12

Figure A - R H Side Of Steering Column

-

Figure B Behind L H Side Of IIP

Figure C - Behind L H Side Of I/P

Figure D - Behind Center Of I/P

m

-


POWER

DOOR

I

RADIO

I ALDL

11

CONNECTOR

-

12HFll

I

-

Figure B Below Center Of IIP R H FRONT DOOR

LH FRONT DOOR

READING LIGHTS

TRUNK LIGHT

READING AND V A N I T Y LIGHTS

Figure A - Near L H Shroud, C453 Views

m

-

11 380202

I

12~613

-

Figure C Front Of Center Console

w

rn


Figure A - Behind IIP

Figure B - Behind IIP, Cross Car Harness

-

-

Figure C - Right Center Top Of I/P

Figure D - Behind Center Of I/P

m


I N CAR SENSOR CONNECTOR

I

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR BUFFER

12HF87

Figure B - Behind R H \Side Of I/P

CENTER

12HFt9

Figure A - Behind Center Of I/P

Figure C1- Behind I/P, Right Of Radio


Figure A - Behind R H Side Of IIP

BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

PAD

( V l N A and V I N

Y)V~&F~

Figure B - Behind R H Side Of IIP

Figure C- Behind R H Side Of V I N 7 I/P

Figure D - Behind R H Side Of I/P


-

----/---

CRUISE CONTROL SERVO

WIPERIWASHER MOTOR MODULE

12HF81

Figure D - Left Front Fender

Figure A - LH Front Of Dash (VIN A)

CHECK VALVE

CRUISE CONTROL

WINDSHIELD

\

IFigure B

/

6~4-55

LH Side Of VIN A Engine Compartment

CRUISE CONTROL SERVO

121-1~82

Figure C Inside LH Front Fender (VIN 7)

I

I

-

-

Figure E R H Rear Of Engine Compartment

I

AMBIENT

BLOWER AND AIC CLUTCH

12HF90

12HF89

-

-

Figure C RH Rear Of Engine Compartment (VIN A And V I N Y )

Figure A RH Front Of Dash V I N 7 Electronic A/C

AIR INLET DOOR

CYCLING SWITCH >

Figure B - RH Rear Of VIN 7 Engine Compartment

12HF88'

MODE VACUUM MOTOR

CONNECTOR

-

~iglrreD Behind IIP (Electronic AIC)

I A ~ J F ~


PRESSURE CYCLING

Figure A - RH Rear Of Engine Compartment (VIN A And V I N Y)

L H HEADLIGHTS

Figure D - LH Front Corner Of Car

OF CAR

12HF95A

Figure - 0 - R H Rear Corner Of V I N A Engine Compartment

*

Figure C - Behind L H Headlights

Figure E - L H Front Of Engine Compartment

-


-

-

12HF93

Figure A

-

Figure C - R H Front Of Engine Compartment

Front Panel Forward Of Radiator

C311(Except VIN 7) Figure B Behind Rear Bumper

I

1 1-08-06-2

Figure D - Behind L H Side O f Rear Seat


6252

SWITCH CONNECTOR Figure A - L H Rear Corner Of Trunk

1 1-22-03-4

Figure C - Underside Of Trunk Lid

L-Y -

FUEL TANK

-

Figure E Base Of R H Shroud

WINDOW

1 1 - 1 2-02-08

Figure B - Underside Of Trunk Lid

Figure D - Below Rear Of Trunk

Figure F - L H Door And Shroud

-

-


Figure C - L H Side Of Windowshield Header

Figure A - Upper L H Shroud I

b

I

Figure E - In R H Front Fender

ANTENNA CONNECTOR

11 -12-02

Figure B - L H Door And Shroud

Figure D - L H "C" Pillar, Behind Panel

1 2 ~ ~ 5 5

Figure F - RH Inner Fender Panel

It?


Figure A - LH Side Of Floor Plan

Figure 0 - Behind Front Seats

Figure C - Under LH Front Seat

HARNESS CONNECTOR FACES BULKHEAD CONNECTOR: ClOO

-

I$

n

FRONT LIGHTS HARNESS CONNECTOR (REMOVED FROM C100)

ClOO TERMINAL VIEW (AS MOUNTED ON COWL)

ENGINE HARNESS CONNECTOR (REMOVED FROM C100)

WIRE COLOR CAVITY

PIN HALF

SCHEMATICS -PAGE

SOCKET HALF

BRN

66 C4 C5 C6 D4

1 I

TAN

TAN

WHT

WHT

BRN RED

RED

TANNVHT

I TANiWHT

PNKIBLK

I

PNKIBLK PNK DK GRN

1

I

PNKIBLK

I

PNKIBLK

I

DK GRN

PPL RED

Charg~ngSystem (VOLTS IndlcatorlGenerator) - 3 0 - 0 No Connection lnstrument Panel: Warn~nglndicators (Oil Pressure) - 80-2. 82-3 lnstrument Panel: lndicators Turbo Boost Gage and Tachometer (TurboVIN 7, V 8 V I N Y) - 8 0 - 4

PPL

I 1

ORN

I I 1

Turbo VIN 7 - 31 - 0 Power Distribution ( I g n ~ t ~ Switch on and Fuse Block) - 30-0. 30-1 No Connection TurboVIN 7 - 4 1 - 0 , 46-0 No Connection TurboVIN 7 - 2 1 - 1 TurboVIN 7 Ignition and Engine Check Light - 20-2. 22-0 Instrument Panel: Digital (Coolant Temperature) - 82-3 Instrument Panel: lndicators (Coolant Temperature) - 80-2 Starter - 30-0. 30-1 No Connection TurboVlN 7 - 10-1. 46-0. 31-0 No Connection No Connection

RED

RED

GRY

TANNVHT

Power Distribution (Light Switch and Fuse Block) - 10-0 No Connection TurboVIN 7 - 21-1

BRNNVHT PNKIBLK PPL

BRNNVHT PNKiBLK PPL

Choke Heater ( V 6 V l N A ) - 32-0 TurboVIN 7 - 2 1 - 0 Turbo VIN 7

1

HARN

CONNECTOR FACES

-

JUNCTION BLOCK CONNECTOR: C453

CONNECTORS WITHIN EACH BRACKET CAN BE INTERCHANGE

Figure 1 - C453 Located At Upper LH Cowl Area

HARNESS ROUTING VIEWS

SYMBOLS

CONNECTOR

GROMMET

HARNESS

NUMBER

-

-

-

HARNESS NAME

DETAIL VIEW PAGE-FIGURE

FORWARD LAMP

201-21-A

ENGINE

201-0-A

AIR CONDITIONING

201-20-A

-

4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

201-15-A

5

CROSS BODY

201-15-8

6

FRONT BODY

201-23-A

7

REAR BODY

201-21-8

Buick Grand National Electrical Diagnosis Manual section 8A

National Electrical Code Handbook

Frommer's: Grand Canyon National Park

Hiking Grand Teton National Park

Frommer's Grand Canyon National Park

Getting Started AutoCad Electrical 2005- Electrical Manual

Getting Started AutoCad Electrical 2005- Electrical Manual

Getting Started AutoCad Electrical 2005- Electrical Manual

Getting Started AutoCad Electrical 2005- Electrical Manual

National Electrical Safety Code 2002

National Electrical Code (NEC) Handbook

National Electrical Code Handbook (Usa)

Nec Handbook (National Electrical Code)

CDC - Electrical Safety - Student Manual

Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy

Electrical Safety Code Manual: A Plain Language Guide to National Electrical Code, OSHA and NFPA 70E

Estimator's Electrical Man-Hour Manual,

Stephen King - Buick 8

Jaguar Xk8 electrical service manual

Frommer's Yellowstone & Grand Teton National Parks

Fodor's Yellowstone & Grand Teton National Parks

Interpreting the National Electrical Code , Eighth Edition

McGraw-Hill National Electrical Code 2008 Handbook, 26th Ed. (Mcgraw Hill's National Electrical Code Handbook)

National Electrical Code 2005 Softcover Version

Electrical Safety - Safety and Health for Electrical Trades Student Manual

Electrical Safety: Safety and Health for Electrical Trades Student Manual

Grand

Buick Motor Company, Flint, Michigan

Buick Grand National Electrical Diagnosis Manual section 8A

National Electrical Code Handbook

Frommer's: Grand Canyon National Park

Hiking Grand Teton National Park

Frommer's Grand Canyon National Park

Getting Started AutoCad Electrical 2005- Electrical Manual

Getting Started AutoCad Electrical 2005- Electrical Manual

Getting Started AutoCad Electrical 2005- Electrical Manual

Getting Started AutoCad Electrical 2005- Electrical Manual

National Electrical Safety Code 2002

National Electrical Code (NEC) Handbook

National Electrical Code Handbook (Usa)

Nec Handbook (National Electrical Code)

CDC - Electrical Safety - Student Manual

Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy

Electrical Safety Code Manual: A Plain Language Guide to National Electrical Code, OSHA and NFPA 70E

Estimator's Electrical Man-Hour Manual,

Stephen King - Buick 8

Jaguar Xk8 electrical service manual

Frommer's Yellowstone & Grand Teton National Parks

Fodor's Yellowstone & Grand Teton National Parks

Interpreting the National Electrical Code , Eighth Edition

McGraw-Hill National Electrical Code 2008 Handbook, 26th Ed. (Mcgraw Hill's National Electrical Code Handbook)

National Electrical Code 2005 Softcover Version

Electrical Safety - Safety and Health for Electrical Trades Student Manual

Electrical Safety: Safety and Health for Electrical Trades Student Manual

Grand

Buick Motor Company, Flint, Michigan

Recommend Documents